RDR-HX900 RMT-D206A

SERVICE MANUAL CND Model

SPECIFICATIONS

System Outputs General

Laser: Semiconductor laser
Channel coverage:
NTSC
VHF: 2 to 13/UHF: 14 to 69/CATV: A-8 to
A-1, A to W, W+1 to W+84
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer
system
Audio reception: Split carrier system
Antenna: 75-ohm antenna terminal for VHF/
UHF
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer indication:
12-hour cycle (digital)/Power back-up
duration: 1 hour
Video recording format: MPEG Video
Audio recording format/applicable bit rate:
Dolby Digital, 2 ch/256 kbps
When you play PCM sound tracks with a 96 kHz
sampling frequency, the output signals from the
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack
are converted to 48 kHz sampling frequency.
(Jack name: Jack type/output level/output
impedance)
LINE OUT 1/2
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y:1.0 Vp-p, C:
0.286 Vp-p
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL):
Optical output jack/–18 dBm (wave length:
660 nm)
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL):
Phono jack/0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB, PR:
interlace*=0.648 Vp-p, progressive or
interlace**=0.7 Vp-p
* “Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level” is “On”
** “Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level” is “Off”
SET TOP BOX CONTROL:
Mini jack
Power requirements: 120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 54 W
Dimensions (approx.): 430 × 89 × 346 mm
(17 × 3 5/8 × 13 5/8 in.) (width/height/depth)
incl. projecting parts
Hard disk drive capacity: 160 GB
Mass (approx.): 5.9 kg (13.01 lb)
Operating temperature: 5 ºC to 35 ºC
(41 ºF to 95 ºF)
Operating humidity: 25 % to 80 %
Supplied accessories:
Audio/video cord (1)
Power cord (1)
Antenna cable (1)
Set top box controller (1)
Remote commander (remote) (1)
Size AA(R6) batteries (2)
Specifications and design are subject to change
without notice.

Inputs
(Jack name: Jack type/input level/input
impedance)
LINE IN 1/2/3
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than 22
kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y:1.0 Vp-p, C:
0.286 Vp-p
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100
COMPONENT VIDEO IN (Y, PB, PR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB/PR:
interlace*=0.648 Vp-p, interlace**=0.7
Vp-p
* “Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level” is “On”
** “Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level” is “Off”
CONTROL S IN: Mini jack

DVD RECORDER
 WARNING!!
WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH
THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO
CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE
FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE
OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.
CAUTION:
The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye
hazard.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes
and bridges.
2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
—2—
Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead-
free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
: LEAD FREE MARK
Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
ordinary solder.
Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
about 350°C.
Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Strong viscosity
Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
4. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
recommend their replacement.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
during repairing.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE NOTE
1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY
CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION) ············ 5
1. GENERAL
WARNING ············································································ 1-1
Precautions ············································································· 1-1
Ways to Use Your DVD Recorder ·········································· 1-1
Quick Guide to Disc Types ···················································· 1-2
Hookups and Settings ································································ 1-3
Hooking Up the Recorder ······················································ 1-3
Step 1: Unpacking ································································· 1-3
Step 2: Connecting the Antenna Cable and Set Top Box
Controller ··············································································· 1-3
Step 3: Connecting the Video Cords ······································ 1-4
Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords ····································· 1-4
Step 5: Connecting the Power Cord ······································· 1-5
Step 6: Preparing the Remote ················································ 1-5
Step 7: Easy Setup ································································· 1-6
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device ···································· 1-7
Guide to Displays ······································································ 1-8
Using the On-Screen Menus ·················································· 1-8
Using the TV Guide On Screen System ································ 1-8
Using the Title List ································································ 1-9
Using the “Disc Info” Screen (disc settings) ························· 1-9
Checking the Play Information and Playing Time ··············· 1-10
How to Enter Characters ······················································ 1-10
Recording ················································································ 1-11
Before Recording ································································· 1-11
Timer Recording (TV GUIDE/Manual/VCR Plus+) ··········· 1-11
Checking/Changing/Canceling Timer Settings ··················· 1-12
Recording Without the Timer ·············································· 1-12
Recording From a VCR or Similar Device ·························· 1-13
Playback ·················································································· 1-13
Playing ················································································· 1-13
Chasing Playback/Simultaneous Rec and Play ···················· 1-15
Searching for a Title/Chapter/Track, etc. ····························· 1-15
Playing MP3 Audio Tracks ·················································· 1-15
Editing ····················································································· 1-16
Before Editing ······································································ 1-16
Editing a Title ······································································ 1-16
Creating and Editing a Playlist ············································ 1-17
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) ······················································ 1-18
Before Dubbing ··································································· 1-18
Dubbing a Single Title (Title Dub) ······································ 1-18
Dubbing Multiple Titles (Dub Selected Titles) ···················· 1-18
DV/Digital8 Dubbing (DV t HDD/DVD) ···························· 1-19
Before DV/Digital8 Dubbing ··············································· 1-19
Recording an Entire DV/Digital8 Format Tape (One Touch
Dubbing) ·············································································· 1-19
Program Edit ········································································ 1-20
Settings and Adjustments ························································ 1-20
Using the Setup Displays ····················································· 1-20
Antenna Reception and Language Settings (Settings) ········· 1-21
Video Settings (Video) ························································· 1-21
Audio Settings (Audio) ························································ 1-22
Recording and Parental Control Settings (Features) ··········· 1-22
Disc and Remote Control Settings/Factory Settings
(Options) ·············································································· 1-23
Easy Setup (Resetting the Recorder) ··································· 1-23
Additional Information ···························································· 1-24
Troubleshooting ··································································· 1-24
Self-diagnosis Function (When letters/numbers appear in the
display) ················································································ 1-25
Notes About This Recorder ················································· 1-25
Specifications ······································································· 1-25
About i.LINK ······································································· 1-25
—3—
Guide to Parts and Controls ················································· 1-26
Glossary ··············································································· 1-27
Language Code List ····························································· 1-27
Cable Box/Satellite Receiver Brand Code ··························· 1-28
2. DISASSEMBLY
2-1. UPPER CASE ································································· 2-2
2-2. EPG-001 BOARD, EPG BRACKET ······························ 2-2
2-3. D.C. FAN ········································································· 2-3
2-4. RD-55 BOARD ······························································· 2-3
2-5. HDD, CN-220 BOARD ··················································· 2-4
2-6. POWER BLOCK ····························································· 2-5
2-7. RD BRACKET ································································ 2-5
2-8. FRONT PANEL SECTION ············································· 2-6
2-9. FUNCTION DOOR ························································ 2-7
2-10. DVD DRIVE ··································································· 2-8
2-11. FR-215 BOARD, FL-140 BOARD ································· 2-9
2-12. REAR PANEL ································································· 2-9
2-13. AV-92 BOARD ······························································ 2-10
2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-11
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ··························· 3-1
3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ··························· 3-3
3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ··························· 3-5
3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ································ 3-7
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) ································ 3-9
3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) ······························ 3-11
4. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ································ 4-1
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS ············································ 4-3
WAVEFORMS ································································ 4-4
• AV-92 (1/8) (POWER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-7
• AV-92 (2/8) (AUDIO IN)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ······························ 4-9
• AV-92 (3/8) (AUDIO OUT)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-11
• AV-92 (4/8) (TUNER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-13
• AV-92 (5/8) (SYSTEM CONTROL)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-15
• AV-92 (6/8) (VIDEO IN)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-17
• AV-92 (7/8) (VIDEO OUT)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-19
• AV-92 (8/8) (STB CONTROL)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-21
• CN-199 (RELAY)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-23
• CN-220 (RELAY)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-25
• EPG-001 (1/6) (CONNECTOR, POWER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-27
• EPG-001 (2/6) (RGB ENCODER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-29
• EPG-001 (3/6) (ROTA IC)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-31
• EPG-001 (4/6) (GS)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-33
• EPG-001 (5/6) (FLASH, SDRAM)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-35
• EPG-001 (6/6) (G LINK,VIDEO SYNC SEPARATOR)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-37
• FL-140 (DV/LINE 2 IN/FL DRIVER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-39
 • FR-215 (LED DRIVE, FUNCTION KEY) 5. IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-41 5-1. IT CONTROL IC (IC603: N603H2MC-511FPUO (AV-84
• RD-55 (1/22) (CONNECTOR) BOARD)) ········································································ 5-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-43
• RD-55 (2/22) (VIDEO DECODER) 6. SERVICE MODE
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-45 6-1. Checking Item ································································· 6-1
• RD-55 (3/22) (AV GLUE) 6-2. Screen Transition in the Service Mode ···························· 6-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-47 6-3. Service Mode Menu Items and Description ···················· 6-3
• RD-55 (4/22) (AV ENCODER) 6-4. Device Check Menu (1/2) ··············································· 6-3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-49 6-5. Device Check Menu (2/2) ··············································· 6-3
• RD-55 (5/22) (MR PROCESS) 6-6. Path Check Menu (1/2) ···················································· 6-4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-51 6-7. Path Check Menu (2/2) ···················································· 6-4
• RD-55 (6/22) (AV DECODER) 6-8. Hard Disk Check Menu ··················································· 6-4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-53 6-9. Device AUTO Check Screen Transition ·························· 6-5
• RD-55 (7/22) (SDRAM) 6-10. Device Individual Check, Screen Transition ··················· 6-5
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-55 6-11. TV Guide Check Menu ··················································· 6-6
• RD-55 (8/22) (NAZCA) 6-12. Factory Test Mode Screen Transition ······························ 6-6
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-57
• RD-55 (9/22) (SDRAM) 7. ADJUSTMENT
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-59 7-1. EPG Videl Levl Adjustment (RD-046 Board) ················· 7-1
• RD-55 (10/22) (AUDY, DAC) 7-2. EPG Component Video Output Level Adjustment ·········· 7-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-61 7-3. EPG S-Video Output S-Y Check ····································· 7-1
• RD-55 (11/22) (JTAG) 7-4. EPG S-Video Output S-C Level Check ··························· 7-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-63 7-5. EPG Component Video Output Y Check ························· 7-2
• RD-55 (12/22) (SH) 7-6. EPG Component Video Output B-Y Chec ······················ 7-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-65 7-7. EPG Component Video Output R-Y Check ···················· 7-2
• RD-55 (13/22) (SDRAM,NAND FLASH)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-67 8. REPAIR PARTS LIST
• RD-55 (14/22) (SWA/UNSW BUFFER-1)
8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-69
8-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 8-1
• RD-55 (15/22) (SWA/UNSW BUFFER-2)
8-1-2. FRONT PANEL SECTION ············································· 8-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-71
8-1-3. DVD DRIVE ··································································· 8-3
• RD-55 (16/22) (FLASH ROM)
8-1-4. CHASSIS BLOCK ·························································· 8-4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-73
8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ·········································· 8-5
• RD-55 (17/22) (GPS3 (HOST GLUE))
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-75
• RD-55 (18/22) (PLL)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-77
• RD-55 (19/22) (POWER)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-79
• RD-55 (20/22) (DV PROCESS)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-81
• RD-55 (21/22) (DV INTERFACE)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-83
• RD-55 (22/22) (SRC)
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-85
4-3. PRONTED WIRING BOARDS
• EPG-001 (CONNECTOR, POWER, RGB ENCODER,
ROTA IC, GS, FLASH, SDRAM, G LINK,VIDEO
SYNC SEPARATOR)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-87
• RD-55 (AV GLUE, AV DECODER, GPS3 (HOST
GLUE))
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-91

—4—
 SERVICE NOTE

1. DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED (FORCED EJECTION)

1. Remove the upper case.
2. Remove the RD-55 board, RD bracket.
3. IInsert the stiff wire in the hole and eject the tray.

Tray The hole

Fig. 1

The stiff wire

Fig. 2

NOTES DURING THE FORCED EJECTION

1. If the forced ejection is executed while a blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) exists on the tray
• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) in the tray and then close the tray.
Note1: If you close the tray while it is empty, ejection of the tray becomes impossible.
Note2: If you close the tray with a CD disc inserted in it, the CD can be ejected. However, if you close the tray while it is empty, there can be a case that
ejection of the tray becomes impossible.
Note3: Even if you replace the DVD drive unit while the tray remains under the state as described above, the situation cannot be improved.

2. If the tray cannot be ejected while the disc is not inserted

• Execute the forced ejection.
• Insert a DVD-ROM (DVD test disc, DVD software available on the market, or the like) on the tray and try to close the tray.
(There are cases that it recovers the trouble.)

3. Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media (DVD±RW, ±R) can be damaged. (There can be a case that initialization is also impossible.)

—5—
MEMO

—6—

WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard,
do not expose the unit to rain or
moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
open the cabinet. Refer servicing
to qualified personnel only.
The AC power cord must be
changed only at a qualified
service shop only.
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with this
product will increase eye hazard. As
the laser beam used in this DVD
recorder is harmful to eyes, do not
attempt to disassemble the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel
only.
This symbol is intended
to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage”
within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
This symbol is intended
to alert the user to the
presence of important
operating and
maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
For customers in the U.S.A
Owner’s Record
The model and serial numbers are located at
the rear of the unit.
Record the serial number in the space
provided below. Refer to them
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer
regarding this product.
Model No. RDR-HX900
Serial No.______________
CAUTION
You are cautioned that any change or
modifications not expressly approved
in this manual could void your
authority to operate this equipment.
2 3
Ways to Use Your DVD Recorder
Control your cable box or satellite receiver – Set top box control
, Connect the supplied set top box controller
to have the recorder change the channel of
your cable box or satellite receiver during a
timer recording (page 14).
Easily search for programs with the TV Guide On Screen system – TV Guide
, The TV Guide On Screen system displays a
free television program listing. Search for
your favorite program alphabetically or by
category, such as movies or sports, and then
set the timer to record that program with
just the push of a button (page 46).
Quickly access recorded titles – Title List
, Display the Title List to see all of the titles
on the disc, including recording date,
channel, recording mode and thumbnail
image (page 37). The recorder will
automatically take program label
information from the TV Guide On Screen
data* and display it as the title name
(page 37).
* not available in some areas.
6 7
Note
This equipment has been tested and Precautions
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part This equipment has been tested and
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are found to comply with the limits set
designed to provide reasonable out in the EMC Directive using a
protection against harmful interference
connection cable shorter than 3
in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can meters.
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
On safety
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause Should any solid object or liquid fall
harmful interference to radio into the cabinet, unplug the recorder
communications. However, there is no
and have it checked by qualified
guarantee that interference will not personnel before operating it any
occur in a particular installation. If this
further.
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by About the hard disk drive
turning the equipment off and on, the The hard disk has a high storage
user is encouraged to try to correct the density, which enables long
interference by one or more of the recording durations and quick
following measures: access to the written data. However,
– Reorient or relocate the receiving it can easily be damaged by shock,
antenna.
vibration or dust, and should be kept
– Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver. away from magnets. To avoid losing
important data, observe the
– Connect the equipment into an outlet
following precautions.
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected. • Do not use the recorder in a place
– Consult the dealer or an experienced subject to extreme changes in
radio/TV technician for help. temperature (temperature gradient
less than 10 °C/hour).
VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are
• Do not apply a strong shock to the
registered trademarks of Gemstar
Development Corporation. The VCR recorder.
Plus+ system is manufactured under • Do not place the recorder in a
license from Gemstar Development location subject to mechanical
Corporation. vibrations or in an unstable
location.
In the United States, TV GUIDE and • Do not place the recorder on top of
other related marks are registered
a heat source, such as a VCR or
marks of Gemstar-TV Guide
AV amplifier (receiver).
International, Inc. and/or one of its
affiliates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a • Do not move the recorder with its
AC power cord connected.
registered mark of Transcontinental
Inc., and is used under license by • Do not move the recorder for one
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. minute after you have unplugged
The TV Guide On Screen system is
the AC power cord. After one
manufactured under license from
minute, move the recorder without
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. shock or vibration.
and/or one of its affiliates.
• Do not disconnect the AC power
The TV Guide On Screen system is
protected by one or more of the cord while the power is on.
following issued United States patents • Do not attempt to change the hard
6,498,895, 6,418,556, 6,331,877; disk. This may result in a
6,239,794; 6,154,203; 5,940,073; malfunction.
4,908,713; 4,751,578; 4,706,121.
Should the hard disk be damaged,
you cannot recover lost data. The
hard disk is only a temporary
storage space.
On placement
• Place the recorder in a location
with adequate ventilation to
103
8:05 LISTINGS SORT
ALPHABETICAL MOVIES
Move down to select a subcategory for Movies.
Move right for Sports, left for ALPHABETICAL.
All Fantasy
Promotional
Panel Action Horror
Adventure Musical
Animated Mystery
Biography Romance
Comedy Sci-Fi
Promotional
Panel Documentary Western
Drama War
Title List
TITLE LIST ORIGINAL
Sort 1 2ch
Wed 9/15 1:00PM( 1H00M)SP
Date
Title
Number
2 5ch
Fri 9/17 8:00PM( 1H00M)SLP
3 12ch
Sat 9/25 9:00AM( 0H30M)EP
4 3ch
Sat 9/25 8:00PM( 0H30M)SLP
SECTION 1
This section is extracted from instruction manual.
GENERAL (RDR-HX900 : 2-187-189-11 (1))
prevent heat build-up in the
recorder.
• Do not place the recorder on a soft
surface such as a rug that might
block the ventilation holes.
• Do not place the recorder in a
confined space such as a bookshelf
or similar unit.
• Do not place the recorder in a
location near heat sources, or in a
place subject to direct sunlight,
excessive dust, or mechanical
shock.
• Do not place the recorder in an
inclined position. It is designed to
be operated in a horizontal
position only.
• Keep the recorder and discs away
from equipment with strong
magnets, such as microwave
ovens, or large loudspeakers.
• Do not place heavy objects on the
recorder.
• To prevent fire or shock hazard, do
not place objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, on the
apparatus.
On power sources
• The recorder is not disconnected
from the AC power source as long
as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if the recorder itself has been
turned off.
• If you are not going to use the
recorder for a long time, be sure to
disconnect the recorder from the
wall outlet. To disconnect the AC
power cord, grasp the plug itself;
never pull the cord.
• Before disconnecting the AC
power cord, check that the
recorder’s hard disk is not
operating (recording or dubbing)
on the front panel display.
On recording
Make trial recordings before making
the actual recording.
On compensation for lost
recordings
Sony is not liable and will not
compensate for any lost recordings
or relevant losses, including when
recordings are not made due to
reasons including recorder failure,
or when the contents of a recording
are lost or damaged as a result of
recorder failure or repair undertaken
Play the beginning of a title while it is being recorded – Chasing Playback
, If you are using a DVD-RW (VR mode) or
the HDD, you can watch a program from
the beginning while it is being recorded
(page 60).
CH 103!
Watch one title while recording another – Simultaneous Rec and Play
, If you are using a DVD-RW (VR mode) or
the HDD, you can watch a previously
recorded program while recording another
PROMOTIONS
program on the same disc (page 60).
SPORTS
Copy a recorded title to and from the HDD – Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
, Create copies of your favorite titles for
safekeeping by dubbing them to a DVD, or
make a copy of your friend’s recordings by
dubbing them to the HDD (page 72).
My Movies 1.5/4.7GB
1:00PM - 2:00PM
2ch
8:00PM - 9:00PM
5ch
9:00AM - 9:30AM
12ch
8:00PM - 8:30PM
3ch
Automatically dub DV/Digital8 tapes – DV/Digital8 Dubbing (DV t HDD/DVD)
, Connect your digital video camera to the
DV IN jack and automatically dub the
entire contents or just selected scenes to a
DVD disc (page 77).
A list of recordable and playable discs is on page 8.
1-1
to the recorder. Sony will not
restore, recover, or replicate the
recorded contents under any
circumstances.
Copyrights
• Television programs, films, video
tapes, discs, and other materials
may be copyrighted. Unauthorized
recording of such material may be
contrary to the provisions of the
copyright laws. Also, use of this
recorder with cable television
transmission may require
authorization from the cable
television transmitter and/or
program owner.
• This product incorporates
copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents
and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering
or disassembly is prohibited.
Copy guard function
Since the recorder has a copy guard
function, programs received through
an external tuner (not supplied) may
contain copy protection signals
(copy guard function) and as such
may not be recordable, depending
on the type of signal.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Caution: This recorder is capable
of holding a still video image or
on-screen display image on your
television screen indefinitely. If
you leave the still video image or
on-screen display image displayed
on your TV for an extended period
of time you risk permanent damage
to your television screen. Plasma
display panels and projection
televisions are especially
susceptible to this.
If you have any questions or
problems concerning your recorder,
please consult your nearest Sony
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
1 Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
RDR-HX900
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near
water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation
openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat
sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the polarized or grounding-
type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into
your outlet, consult an
electrician for replacement of
the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from
being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the
apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/
accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table specified
by the manufacturer, or sold
with the apparatus. When a cart
is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury
from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused
for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified
service personnel. Servicing is
required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such
as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled
or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
Recording
The game isn’t over
yet, but I’ll start
watching it from the
beginning now.
Recording
I think I’ll watch
yesterday’s golf game
now, even though I
am recording a movie.
Dubbing
Control
Dubbing
 Quick Guide to Disc Types

Recordable and playable discs

Recording Features Editing Features
Icon
Disc used in Formatting Compatibility with other DVD
Type Auto Manual Record Change Delete
Logo this (new discs) players (finalizing) Rewrite A-B Erase Playlist
Chapter Chapter 16:9 sizes title name title
manual (page 45) (page 66) (page 68)
(page 91) (page 68) (page 51) (page 65) (page 66)

Hard disk
(Formatting
drive HDD – Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
unnecessary)
(internal)

Playable on DVD+RW
Automatically
DVD+RW +RW compatible players Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No
formatted
(automatically finalized)

Playable only on VR mode

VR Format in VR mode
-RWVR compatible players Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
mode (page 40)
(finalization unnecessary)
DVD-
RW
Playable on most DVD players
Video Format in Video mode
-RWVideo (finalization necessary) Yes Yes No Yes *2 Yes Yes No No
mode (page 40)
(page 40)

Playable on most DVD+R

Automatically
DVD+R +R compatible players (finalization No Yes No No Yes Yes *3 No No
formatted
necessary) (page 40)

Playable on most DVD players

Automatically
DVD-R -R (finalization necessary) No Yes No Yes *2 Yes Yes *3 No No
formatted
(page 40)

Discs that cannot be recorded on

Usable disc versions (as of May 2004)
• 4x-speed or slower DVD+RWs
• 2x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1, Ver.1.1
with CPRM*1)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+Rs
• 8x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0)
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” and “DVD-R,”
are trademarks. • 4x-speed compatible DVD-RWs (Ver. 1.2/4x)
*1 CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media) is • DVD-RWs (Ver. 1.0)
a coding technology that protects copyrights for • DVD+RWs that are not 2.4x-speed compatible
images. • Dual layer discs
*2
Only if the recording mode is SP, HSP, or HQ, and • 8 cm discs
“DVD Rec. Picture Size” is set to “16:9.”
*3 Erasing titles does not free up disc space.

8 ,continued 9

Note on playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/

Playable discs VIDEO CDs
Notes
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same
Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs/
DVD-RW. To change the disc’s format, reformat the
Icon VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software disc (page 40). Note that the disc’s contents will be
Disc used in producers. Since this recorder plays DVD erased after reformatting.
Type Characteristics
Logo this VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs according to the disc • You cannot shorten the time required for recording
manual contents the software producers designed, some even with high-speed discs. Also, you cannot record on
playback features may not be available. Also, see the disc if the disc is not 1x speed compatible.
the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs/ • It is recommended that you use discs with “For Video”
VIDEO CDs. printed on their packaging.
DVD VIDEO DVD Discs such as movies that can be purchased or rented
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD-Rs or DVD-
Region code (DVD VIDEO only) RWs (Video mode) that contain recordings made on
other DVD equipment.
Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear • In some cases, you may not be able to add new
VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in VIDEO CD/Super of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOs recordings to DVD+RWs that contain recordings made
VIDEO CD VCD (playback only) labeled with identical region on other DVD equipment. If you do add a new
VIDEO CD format
codes. This system is used to protect copyrights. recording, note that this recorder will rewrite the DVD
DVD VIDEOs labeled ALL will also play on this menu.
recorder. • If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in music CD format that can If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO, the recorder, the data may be erased.
CD CD • Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs, or
be purchased message “Playback prohibited by region code.”
CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be played on this recorder due
will appear on the TV screen. Depending on the
to the recording quality or physical condition of the
DVD VIDEO, no region code indication may be disc, or the characteristics of the recording device and
labeled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is authoring software. The disc will not play if it has not
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs created on a PC or similar prohibited by area restrictions.
DATA CD DATA CD been correctly finalized. For more information, see the
device in music format containing MP3 audio tracks
operating instructions for the recording device.
X Region code
RDR–XXXX

00V 00Hz
00W NO.

0-000-000-00

Discs that cannot be played z Hint

• All CD-ROMs (including PHOTO CDs) This DVD recorder can play 8 cm CDs and 8 cm DVDs
• CD-Rs/CD-RWs, other than those recorded in as well. Music discs encoded with copyright protection
music CD format, MP3 format, or Video CD technologies
format This product is designed to playback discs that
• Data part of CD-Extras conform to the Compact Disc (CD) standard.
• DVD-ROMs Recently, various music discs encoded with
• DVD Audio discs copyright protection technologies are being
• DVD-RAMs marketed by some record companies. Please be
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs aware that among those discs, there are some that
• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code do not conform to the CD standard and may not be
(page 11) playable by this product.
• A disc recorded in a color system other than
NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM

10 11

1-2
 Using the cable box/satellite A: Cable box or satellite receiver with a video/audio output
Hookups and Settings receiver control function With this hookup, you can record any channel on the cable box or satellite receiver. Be sure that the
satellite receiver or cable box is turned on.
The cable box/satellite receiver control function
Hooking Up the Recorder can be used with hookup A or B. It allows the
To watch cable or satellite programs, you need to match the channel on the recorder (L1 or L3) to the
input jack connected to the cable box or satellite receiver (LINE IN 1 or 3). Note that satellite receiver
recorder to control a cable box or satellite receiver

Hookups and Settings

Follow steps 1 to 7 to hook up and adjust the programs do not appear in the TV Guide On Screen system.
via the supplied set top box controller. The
settings of the recorder. recorder controls channels on the cable box or Place the set top box controller
Wall
satellite receiver for timer recording. You can also near the remote sensor on the
cable box/satellite receiver.
Notes use the recorder’s remote control to change
• Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise. channels on the cable box/satellite receiver
Set top box
• Refer to the instructions supplied with the components whenever the cable box/satellite receiver is turned controller
to be connected. on, even if the recorder is turned off. (page 12) Cable box/
• You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not To use the cable box/satellite receiver control satellite receiver
have a video input jack. function, you need to connect the set top box Antenna cable
COMPONENT
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord of each VIDEO OUT (supplied)
controller and set the code number and output AUDIO VIDEO
component before connecting. channel (page 24). After setting up the cable box/ OUT OUT S VIDEO
ANT IN
R L
TO TV
satellite receiver control, check that the recorder
can correctly control the cable box or satellite
Step 1: Unpacking receiver (page 28). to antenna input

TV
Check that you have the following items: Note to CATV system installer (in USA)
• Audio/video cord (pinplug u 3 y pinplug u 3) This reminder is provided to call the CATV
(1) system installer’s attention to Article 820- 40 of
• Power cord (1) the NEC that provides guidelines for proper
Audio/video Component video cord
• Antenna cable (1) grounding and, in particular, specifies that the
cord (supplied) (not supplied)
• Remote commander (remote) (1) cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of S-video cord (not
• Set top box controller (1) supplied)
• Size AA (R6) batteries (2) cable entry as practical.
to LINE IN
Notes 1 or 3

Step 2: Connecting the • If your antenna is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead
cable), use an external antenna connector (not
Note
Antenna Cable and Set Top Do not connect a hi-
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
supplied) to connect the antenna to the recorder. LINE IN S VIDEO Y

• If you have separate cables for VHF and UHF SET TOP BOX
R AUDIO L VIDEO definition tuner using the
Box Controller
1 PB
antennas, use a UHF/VHF band mixer (not supplied) to
CONTROL component video cords. This
connect the antenna to the recorder. 3 PR recorder only accepts
• If you have made hookup A or B and want to use the to standard definition interlace
Select one of the following antenna hookups. Do TV Guide On Screen system, the cable box must be COMPONENT signals.
to SET TOP BOX VIDEO IN
not connect the power cord until you reach “Step turned on, the set top box controller must be connected, CONTROL
5: Connecting the Power Cord” (page 21). and “Set Top Box Control” in Settings Setup must be VHF/UHF

set to “On” (page 86) to download the TV Guide On IN

COMPONENT

If you have Hookup Screen data.

SET TOP BOX
CONTROL
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
LINE IN
R AUDIO L VIDEO
S VIDEO Y
DIGITAL OUT
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

R AUDIO L
LINE OUT

VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL 1
1 PB PB
OUT

Cable box or satellite receiver with a A (page 13) • If you are using the TV Guide On Screen system and G-LINK

CONTROL S IN
3 PR
OPTICAL
2
PR
~ AC IN

video/audio output the recorder is receiving TV Guide On Screen data, you

may not be able to use the remote control to change DVD recorder
Cable box with an antenna output B (page 14) channels on the cable box when the recorder is off.
only Wait until the recorder has finished receiving TV : Signal flow
Cable without cable box, or antenna C (page 15) Guide On Screen data.
z Hints
only (no cable TV) • If your cable box or satellite receiver has an S-video jack or component output jacks, you can use an S-video cord (not
supplied) or component video cord (not supplied) instead of the audio/video cord. When you connect using a
component video cord, connect the audio cords to the LINE IN jacks.
• If you connect an S-video cord to the LINE IN 1 jack or a component video cord, set “Line1 Input” in Video Setup to
“S Video” or “Component” (page 89). If you connect an S-video cord to the LINE IN 3 jack, set “Line3 Input” in
Video Setup to “S Video” (page 89).
12 ,continued 13

B: Cable box with an antenna output only C: Cable without cable box, or antenna only (no cable TV)
With this hookup, you can record any channel on the satellite receiver or cable box. Be sure that the Use this hookup if you watch cable channels without a cable box. Also use this hookup if you are using
satellite receiver or cable box is turned on. a VHF/UHF antenna or separate VHF and UHF antennas.
To watch cable programs, you need to match the channel on the recorder (2ch, 3ch, or 4ch) to the antenna With this hookup, you can record any channel by selecting the channel on the recorder.
output channel on the cable box (2ch, 3ch, or 4ch).

Hookups and Settings

Wall
Wall

Set top box

controller
(supplied)
Cable box
Place the set top box controller
ANT IN near the remote sensor on the
TO TV
cable box/satellite receiver.
to VHF/UHF IN

Antenna cable VHF/UHF DVD recorder

to SET TOP
(supplied) SET TOP BOX BOX IN VHF/UHF

COMPONENT
CONTROL
CONTROL
IN
VIDEO OUT
SET TOP BOX COMPONENT VIDEO IN DIGITAL OUT LINE OUT
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
CONTROL LINE IN S VIDEO Y S VIDEO Y
R AUDIO L VIDEO R AUDIO L VIDEO

to VHF/UHF IN
COAXIAL 1
1 PB PB
OUT

G-LINK 2
3 PR PR
OUT CONTROL S IN
OPTICAL ~ AC IN

VHF/UHF DVD recorder

IN VHF/UHF

COMPONENT
IN
VIDEO OUT
SET TOP BOX COMPONENT VIDEO IN DIGITAL OUT LINE OUT
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
CONTROL LINE IN S VIDEO Y S VIDEO Y
R AUDIO L VIDEO R AUDIO L VIDEO

OUT
1 PB
COAXIAL 1
PB TV
OUT
G-LINK

CONTROL S IN
3 PR
OPTICAL
2
PR
~ AC IN
to VHF/UHF OUT

to antenna input
TV
to VHF/UHF OUT
to antenna Antenna cable (supplied)
input

: Signal flow

: Signal flow

14 15

1-3
 If your TV has a CONTROL S jack
A Connecting to a video input jack
Step 3: Connecting the Video Cords You can control the recorder by pointing the
remote at your TV. This feature is convenient
Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video cord
(supplied) to the yellow (video) jack. You will when you place the recorder and the TV away
Select one of the following patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, from each other.
projector, or AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to view pictures. Audio connections are enjoy standard quality images.
Note that you cannot use the PROGRESSIVE After connecting the recorder to other equipment
explained in “Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords” (page 19). in pattern A, B, or C above, connect the

Hookups and Settings

button with this connection.
CONTROL S IN jack to your TV’s CONTROL S
(OUT) jack using a control S cord (not supplied).
A B Yellow Yellow
See the instructions supplied with the TV to be
S-video cord White (L) White (L)
INPUT INPUT connected. Note that your TV’s input will not
(not supplied) Red (R) Red (R)
Audio/video S VIDEO automatically switch to this recorder when you
VIDEO
cord (supplied) play a disc.

L B Connecting to an S VIDEO input

AUDIO TV, projector, or AV jack
amplifier (receiver)
R Connect an S-video cord (not supplied). You will
enjoy high quality images.
TV, projector, or AV (yellow)
Note that you cannot use the PROGRESSIVE
amplifier (receiver) button with this connection.

to LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1 or 2 to LINE OUT (S VIDEO) 1 or 2

C Connecting to component video
VHF/UHF
DVD recorder
input jacks (Y, PB, PR)
COMPONENT
IN
VIDEO OUT
SET TOP BOX COMPONENT VIDEO IN DIGITAL OUT LINE OUT
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
CONTROL LINE IN S VIDEO Y S VIDEO Y
R AUDIO L VIDEO R AUDIO L VIDEO
COAXIAL 1
1 PB PB
OUT

G-LINK 2

CONTROL S IN
3 PR
OPTICAL
PR
~ AC IN
Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks
using a component video cord (not supplied) or
to COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT three video cords (not supplied) of the same kind
and length. You will enjoy accurate color
(red) (blue) (green)
reproduction and high quality images.
If your TV accepts progressive 480p format
signals, you must use this connection and then
to CONTROL S IN COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
C press PROGRESSIVE on the remote to send
progressive video signals. For details, see “Using
CONTROL S Y the PROGRESSIVE button” (page 18).
(green)
PB Green
(blue) Green
PR Blue Blue
TV or other equipment with a
(red) Red
CONTROL S jack Red
Component video
cord (not supplied) TV, projector, or AV
amplifier (receiver) When playing “wide screen” images
Some recorded images may not fit your TV
screen. To change the aspect ratio, see page 87.
: Signal flow
If you are connecting to a VCR
Connect your VCR to the LINE IN (VIDEO) jack
Note on the recorder (page 29).
Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.

16 ,continued 17

Using the PROGRESSIVE button Notes

• Consumers should note that not all high definition
By using the PROGRESSIVE button on the television sets are fully compatible with this product
remote, you can select the signal format in which and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture.
the recorder outputs video signals: Interlace or In the case of 480 progressive scan picture problems, it
Progressive. is recommended that the user switch the connection to
Step 4: Connecting the Audio Cords
Select one of the following patterns A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector,
or AV amplifier (receiver).
This will enable you to listen to sound.

Hookups and Settings

Connect the recorder using the COMPONENT the ‘standard definition’ output. If there are questions
VIDEO OUT jacks (pattern C above), and press regarding our TV set compatibility with this model
PROGRESSIVE repeatedly. “PROGRESSIVE” 480p DVD recorder, please contact our customer
service center.
(red)
Audio/video
(yellow) INPUT A
appears in the front panel display when the VIDEO
• TV Guide On Screen does not appear if you connect cord (supplied)
recorder outputs progressive signals. your TV using the video or S-video jacks and press the
(white) (white)
◆Progressive PROGRESSIVE button on the remote, even if your TV
accepts progressive signals. L
Select this when:
– your TV accepts progressive signals, and, (yellow)* (red) AUDIO
– the TV is connected to the COMPONENT R
VIDEO OUT jacks.
Note that the pictures will not be clear or no
LINE OUT TV, projector, or AV
picture will appear if you select progressive signal S VIDEO
amplifier (receiver)
R AUDIO L VIDEO
1
output when either of the above conditions is not
met. 2

◆Interlace to LINE OUT (R-AUDIO-L) 1 or 2

Set to this position when:
– your TV does not accept progressive signals, or, VHF/UHF

IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
SET TOP BOX COMPONENT VIDEO IN DIGITAL OUT LINE OUT

– your TV is connected to jacks other than the CONTROL

1
LINE IN
R AUDIO L VIDEO
S VIDEO Y

PB
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL 1
R AUDIO L VIDEO
S VIDEO Y

PB
OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (LINE OUT G-LINK

CONTROL S IN
3 PR
OPTICAL
2
PR
~ AC IN

(VIDEO) or S VIDEO).
to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL or DVD recorder
z Hint DIGITAL OUT
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
OPTICAL)
When you select progressive signal output, you can fine- COAXIAL

tune the signal according to the type of software you are

or
watching (page 88).
OPTICAL

Coaxial digital cord

Optical digital cord (not supplied) (not supplied)

[Speakers] to optical
digital input
to coaxial
digital input
[Speakers]
B
Rear (L) Rear (R)

Front (L) Front (R)

AV amplifier (receiver)
with a decoder
Center Subwoofer

: Signal flow
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 17).

z Hint
For correct speaker location, see the operating instructions supplied with the connected components.

Note
Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to the LINE IN (AUDIO L/R) jacks at the same time. This will cause
unwanted noise to come from your TV’s speakers.

18 ,continued 19

1-4
 A Connecting to audio L/R input B Connecting to a digital audio
jacks input jack
Step 5: Connecting the Step 6: Preparing the
This connection will use your TV’s or stereo If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby* 1 Power Cord Remote
amplifier’s (receiver’s) two speakers for sound. Digital or DTS*2 decoder and a digital input jack,
Connect using the audio/video cord (supplied). use this connection. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC IN You can control the recorder using the supplied

Hookups and Settings

Connect using a coaxial or optical digital cord (not terminal of the recorder. Then plug the recorder remote. Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by
supplied). and TV power cords into an AC outlet. After you matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the
Yellow Yellow
connect the power cord, you must wait for a markings inside the battery compartment. When
White (L) White (L)
Coaxial cord short while before operating the recorder. You using the remote, point it at the remote sensor
Red (R) Red (R)
can operate the recorder only after the front panel on the recorder.
Optical cord display lights up and the recorder enters standby
• Surround effect (page 56) mode.
TV: Dynamic, Wide, Night • Surround effect If you connect additional equipment to this
Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS (5.1ch) recorder (page 29), be sure to connect the power
cord only after all connections are complete.

~ AC IN

Stereo amplifier (receiver): Standard, Night

Note
Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to the LINE
IN (AUDIO L/R) jacks at the same time. This will cause
unwanted noise to come from your TV’s speakers.
*1
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
*2 “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Notes
• After you have completed the connection, make the
appropriate settings under “Audio Connection” in Easy
Setup (page 24). Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise
will come from your speakers.
• The surround sound effects of this recorder cannot be
used with this connection.
1 to AC IN
2 Notes
• If the supplied remote interferes your other Sony DVD
recorder or player, change the command mode number
to AC outlet
for this recorder (page 23).
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage
and corrosion. Do not touch the liquid with bare hands
should leakage occur. Observe the following:
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or
batteries of different manufacturers.
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended
period of time, remove the batteries.
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid inside
the battery compartment, and insert new batteries.
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked on the
front panel) to strong light, such as direct sunlight or
lighting apparatus. The recorder may not respond to the
remote.

20 ,continued 21

Code numbers of controllable TVs Manufacturer Code number Code numbers of controllable AV amplifiers
Controlling TVs with the remote If more than one code number is listed, try (receivers)
entering them one at a time until you find the one Sylvania 08, 12
You can adjust the remote control’s signal to If more than one code number is listed, try
control your TV. that works with your TV. Teknika 03, 08, 14 entering them one at a time until you find the one
If you connected the recorder to an AV amplifier Toshiba 07, 18 that works with your AV amplifier (receiver).
(receiver), you can also use the supplied remote to Manufacturer Code number Manufacturer Code number
Wards 03, 04, 12

Hookups and Settings

control the AV amplifier’s (receiver’s) volume
Sony 01 (default) Sony 78, 79, 80, 91
(page 23). Yorx 12
Akai 04 Denon 84, 85, 86
Zenith 14, 15
Notes AOC 04 Kenwood 92, 93
• Depending on the connected unit, you may not be able
Centurion 12 Onkyo 81, 82, 83
to control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) with Controlling the volume of your AV
some or all of the buttons below. Coronado 03 Pioneer 99
• If you enter a new code number, the code number amplifier (receiver) with the remote
Curtis-Mathes 12, 14 Sansui 87
previously entered will be erased.
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code Daewoo 04, 22 TV/DVD Technics 97, 98
number may be reset to the default setting. Set the switch
appropriate code number again. Daytron 03, 12 "/1 Yamaha 94, 95, 96
TV/DVD Fisher 11
switch 1 2 3
Number
General Electric 04, 06, 10 4 5 6 If you have a Sony DVD player or
"/1 buttons, SET
TV/VIDEO
Gold Star/LG 03, 04, 17 7 8

0
9
VOL +/– more than one Sony DVD recorder
1 2 3 Hitachi 02, 03, 04
Number 4 5 6
CH +/– If the supplied remote interferes with your other
buttons, SET
7 8 9
J.C.Penney 04, 10, 12 Sony DVD recorder or player, set the command
VOL +/– mode number for this recorder and the supplied
0 JVC 09
remote to one that differs from the other Sony
KMC 03
Magnavox 03, 04, 08, 12, 21
1 Slide the TV/DVD switch to DVD.
DVD recorder or player.
The default command mode setting for this
Marantz 04, 13
2 Hold down [/1, and enter the recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3.
manufacturer code (see the table below)
1 Slide the TV/DVD switch to TV. MGA/Mitsubishi 04, 12, 13, 17 for your AV amplifier (receiver) using the
2 Hold down [/1. NEC 04, 12 number buttons.

3 Enter your TV’s manufacturer code (see

Panasonic 06, 19 3 Release [/1. 1

4
2

5
3

“Code numbers of controllable TVs” Philco 02, 03, 04, 08 The VOL +/– buttons control the AV 7 8 9
amplifier’s volume.
below) using the number buttons. Philips 08, 21 0
If you want to control the TV’s volume, slide
4 Release [/1. Pioneer 06, 16 the TV/DVD switch to TV.
When the TV/DVD switch is set to TV, the Portland 03 SYSTEM
remote performs the following: MENU
Proscan 10 z Hint M/m,
If you want to control the TV’s volume even when the O RETURN ENTER
[/1 Turns your TV on or off Quasar 06, 18
TV/DVD switch is set to DVD, repeat the steps above
VOL +/– Adjusts the volume of your Radio Shack 05, 10, 14 and enter the code number 90 (default).
TV RCA 04, 10
CH +/– Selects the channel on your Sampo 12
TV
Samsung 03, 04, 12, 20
TV/VIDEO Switches your TV’s input
source Sanyo 11, 14 COMMAND
MODE switch
Number buttons and Selects the channel on your Scott 12
SET TV Sears 07, 10, 11
Sharp 03, 05, 18

22 ,continued 23

1-5
 1 Press SYSTEM MENU. 6 Enter your zip code number.
The System Menu appears. Step 7: Easy Setup "/1
Use M/m to select the number or letter (for
Canada) and </, to move the cursor.
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.
1 2 3
Follow the steps below to make the minimum CH +/–
Number 4 5 6
number of basic adjustments for using the buttons
EASY SETUP Area Setup 1/7
SETUP 7 8 9
recorder. If you do not complete Easy Setup, it

Hookups and Settings

0
Settings Tuner Preset Enter your zip code.
Video Area Setup
will appear each time you turn on your recorder.
Audio Clock Settings are made in the following order. - - - - -
Features Set Top Box Control
Options Language Note that television program listings do not appear
Easy Setup
in the TV Guide On Screen system as soon as you
complete Easy Setup. You must leave the recorder </M/m/,,
O RETURN ENTER
turned off for at least 24 hours to receive the TV
3 Select “Options,” and press ENTER.
Guide On Screen data. If your recorder is 7 Press ENTER.
connected to a cable box, be sure to leave the cable The Setup Display for selecting the language
box turned on. used in the on-screen display appears.

1
SETUP
Area Setup
Settings Format DVD : VR
Turn on the TV.
m EASY SETUP Language 2/7
Video
Audio
Features
Dimmer :
Auto Display :
Command Mode :
Normal
On
DVD3
2 Press [/1.
OSD Language Setup The recorder turns on. Select the screen Language.
Options Factory Setup

Easy Setup m 3 Switch the input selector on your TV so that

English
Français

Clock Setup the signal from the recorder appears on

your TV screen.
m
4 Select “Command Mode,” and press “Initial settings necessary to operate the DVD
ENTER. Cable Box/Sat. Control Setup recorder will be made. You can change them
later using Setup. Before you start, check that
8 Select a language, and press ENTER.
m The display for setting the clock appears.
you have made all necessary connections.” If the clock data has already been received, go
SETUP
Tuner and Channel Setup appears. to step 10.
Settings Format DVD : VR
• If this message does not appear, select “Easy
Video Dimmer : Normal m
Audio Auto Display : On Setup” from “SETUP” in the System Menu
Features
Options
Command Mode :
Factory Setup
DVD3
DVD1
DVD2
TV Type Setup to run Easy Setup. For details, see “Settings EASY SETUP Clock 3/7

DVD3 and Adjustments” on page 83.

Easy Setup m Set the time and date manually.

Audio Connection Setup

4 Press ENTER. Thu 1 / 1 / 2004 12 : 00 AM

The Setup Display for entering your area of

5 Select the Command mode (DVD1, DVD2, m residence appears. This will enable you to use
or DVD3), and press ENTER. Finished!
the TV Guide On Screen system (page 33).
Enter your area of residence even if you do not
9 Enter the current date and time.
Press M/m to set the month and press ,. Set
6 Slide the COMMAND MODE switch on the want to use the TV Guide On Screen system. the day, year, hour, and minutes in the same
remote so it matches the mode you way. The day of the clock is set automatically.
selected above. EASY SETUP Area Setup 1/7
10Press ENTER.
Select your country.
The Setup Display for cable box/satellite
To return to the previous step receiver control appears.
USA

Press O RETURN. Canada

EASY SETUP Set Top Box Control 4/7

Do you want to control your set top box

with this recorder?
(Changes to the current setting will erase all timer settings.)

5 Select a country, and press ENTER. Yes

No
The display for entering your zip code
appears.

24 ,continued 25

11Set the cable box/satellite receiver 15Select whether or not you have a cable “16:9”: For wide-screen TVs or standard TVs 21Press ENTER.
control, and press ENTER. connection. with a wide screen mode. The Setup Display for the DTS signal appears.
If you want to use the cable box/satellite For details, see “TV Type” on page 87.
receiver control (page 14), select “Yes.”
If you do not have a cable box, select “No,” EASY SETUP Tuner Preset 5/7
18Press ENTER. EASY SETUP Audio Connection 7/7

The Setup Display for selecting the type of

then go to step 15. Select the way in which you will receive channels. jack used to connect to your amplifier DTS

12Enter the brand code of your cable box/

Hookups and Settings

Antenna
(receiver) appears. On
Off
satellite receiver. Cable

See “Cable Box/Satellite Receiver Brand EASY SETUP Audio Connection 7/7
Code” (page 112).
Use M/m to select the number and </, to Is this recorder connected to an amplifier (receiver)?

move the cursor. If you use an antenna only (no cable TV),
Select the type of jack you are using.

Yes : LINE OUT(R-AUDIO-L)

22Select whether or not you wish to send a
select “Antenna.” Yes : DIGITAL OUT DTS signal to your amplifier (receiver),
No

EASY SETUP Set Top Box Control 4/7

If you use a cable connection without a cable and press ENTER.
box, select “Cable.” If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a DTS
Enter the brand code of your set top box.
16Press ENTER. decoder, select “On.” Otherwise, select “Off.”
- - - -
The Tuner Preset function automatically starts 19Select the type of jack (if any) you are 23Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.
searching for all of the receivable channels using to connect to an amplifier (receiver), Easy Setup is finished. All connections and
and presets them. and press ENTER. setup operations are complete.
If you did not connect an AV amplifier If you use the cable box/satellite receiver
(receiver), select “No,” then go to step 23. control, check that the control works correctly
13Press ENTER. EASY SETUP Tuner Preset 5/7
If you connected an AV amplifier (receiver) (see below).
Searching for receivable channels.
Ch45
using just an audio cord, select “Yes: LINE
Please wait.
OUT (R-AUDIO-L),” then go to step 23.
EASY SETUP Set Top Box Control 4/7 EASY SETUP
If you connected an AV amplifier (receiver)
Select input line or Set Top Box's output channel.
using either a digital optical or coaxial cord, Easy Setup is finished.
Line1 select “Yes: DIGITAL OUT.”
20Select the type of Dolby Digital signal you
Line2
Line3 Finish
Ch2
Ch3 To set the channels manually, see page 85. wish to send to your amplifier (receiver).
Ch4
After the Tuner Preset is finished, the Setup
Display for selecting the aspect ratio of the
EASY SETUP Audio Connection 7/7

14Select the cable box output channel. connected TV appears.

If you connect your cable box or satellite 17Select the setting that matches your TV Dolby Digital
To return to the previous step
receiver to the recorder’s audio/video input type. D-PCM Press O RETURN.
Dolby Digital
(page 13), select “Line1,” “Line2,” or
“Line3,” then go to step 17. z Hint
EASY SETUP TV Type 6/7 If you want to run Easy Setup again, select “Easy Setup”
If you connect the satellite receiver or cable in the Setup Display (page 95).
Select your TV screen type.
box to the recorder’s antenna input (page 14), If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby
select “Ch2,” ‘Ch3,” or “Ch4” and press 16 : 9
Digital decoder, select “Dolby Digital.” Notes
4 : 3 Letter Box
ENTER, then go to step 17. See the 4 : 3 Pan Scan Otherwise, select “D-PCM.” • To record TV programs using the timer, you must set
instructions supplied with your cable box to the clock accurately.
confirm the cable box’s antenna output • If you use an S-video cord to connect your cable box or
channel. satellite receiver, set “Line1 Input” or “Line3 Input” in
“4:3 Letter Box”: For standard TVs. Video Setup to “S Video” (page 89).
Displays “wide screen” pictures with bands
on the upper and lower sections of the screen.
“4:3 Pan Scan”: For standard TVs.
Automatically displays “wide screen”
pictures on the entire screen and cuts off the
sections that do not fit.

26 ,continued 27

1-6
 2 Attach it so that the set top box controller is
Checking the cable box/satellite
receiver control setting
directly above the remote control sensor on
your cable box/satellite receiver.
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device
1 Point the DVD recorder’s remote at the After disconnecting the recorder’s power cord from an AC outlet, connect a VCR or similar recording
recorder (not at the cable box/satellite device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder.
receiver). Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV/Digital8 output jack (i.LINK jack)

Hookups and Settings

(page 77).
2 Press CH +/– and check that the channel See also the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.
changes on the cable box/satellite receiver To record on this recorder, see “Recording From a VCR or Similar Device” (page 53).
window.
3 Press the number buttons and check that Connecting to the LINE IN 1 or 3 jacks
the channel changes on the cable box/ If the equipment has an S-video jack or component output jacks, you can use an S-video cord or
satellite receiver window. component video cord instead of an audio/video cord.
Tune your cable box to channel 02. Then VCR, etc.
using your DVD recorder’s remote, enter 09 LINE OUTPUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
to tune your cable box to channel 09. Did the AUDIO VIDEO S Video
cable box change to channel 09? If the cable R L Y PB PR
box did not tune to channel 09, follow the
instructions below for getting your recorder to
control your cable box.

If you cannot get the recorder to control your

cable box/satellite receiver
Check the settings at “Set Top Box Control” in
Settings Setup (page 86). If more than one code
number is listed for your cable box/satellite
Audio/video cord S-video cord
receiver, try entering them one at a time in step 12 (not supplied) (not supplied)
of Easy Setup until you find the one that works
with your cable box/satellite receiver.
Check the connection and position of the set top Component video
box controller (page 13). cord (not supplied)
If your cable box or satellite receiver still does not
operate with this recorder, contact your cable or to LINE IN 1 or 3 to COMPONENT
satellite company to see if they can provide you VIDEO IN
with a compatible cable box or satellite receiver. COMPONENT VIDEO IN
LINE IN S VIDEO Y
R AUDIO L VIDEO

To fix the set top box controller to your cable 1 PB

box/satellite receiver 3 PR

Once you have confirmed that the set top box

controller controls your cable box or satellite DVD recorder
receiver, fix it in place. VHF/UHF

COMPONENT

1
IN
VIDEO OUT

Remove the backing on the double-sided tape. SET TOP BOX

CONTROL
R AUDIO L
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
LINE IN
VIDEO
S VIDEO Y
DIGITAL OUT
PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL

COAXIAL 1
R AUDIO L
LINE OUT

VIDEO
S VIDEO Y

1 PB PB
OUT

G-LINK 2
3 PR PR
CONTROL S IN
OPTICAL ~ AC IN

: Signal flow

28 ,continued 29

• If you pass the recorder signals via the VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.
Notes
• When you connect using a component video cord, connect the audio cords to the LINE IN jacks. DVD recorder VCR TV
• Do not connect a hi-definition tuner or similar device using the component video cords. This recorder only accepts
Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and your TV in the order shown below. To watch videotapes, watch
standard definition interlace signals.
the tapes through a second Line input on your TV.
LINE IN 1
Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel

Hookups and Settings

VCR DVD recorder TV
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the equipment has
an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord. LINE IN 2
VCR, etc. • Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.
OUTPUT
S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO
L R

S-video Audio/video cord

cord (not (not supplied)
supplied)

to LINE 2 IN DVD recorder

: Signal flow
z Hint
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, use audio cables that distribute monaural sounds to left/
right channels (not supplied).

Notes
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other equipment’s output
jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. Noise (feedback) may result.
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.

30 31

1-7
 C SCHEDULE (page 49): Example 1: When you press TOOLS while the

Guide to Displays
Turns on the list menu, which allows you to
check, change, or cancel timer settings.
Title List menu is turned on.
Using the TV Guide On
D DV/D8 EDIT (page 77): TITLE LIST ORIGINAL My Movies 1.5/4.7GB
Screen System
Using the On-Screen Menus Activates the DV Edit function, which allows Sort Close
DateDisc Info.
1
2
2ch
5ch
1:00PM - 2:00PM Wed 9/15
8:00PM - 9:00PM Fri 9/17
you to record and edit the contents of a DV/ Title
Erase Titles3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM Sat 9/25
The TV Guide On Screen system automatically
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R Digital8 format tape.
Number
4 Titles
Dub Selected 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM Sat 9/25 displays a free television program list. This list
DVD VCD CD DATA CD
Playlist 5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM Fri 10/15
displays the program name, promotions and
E DUBBING (page 72): TOOLS 6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM Tue 10/19
related information for programs being broadcast
7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM Tue 10/26

Guide to Displays
This section introduces the System Menu, TOOLS Dubs titles from the HDD to a DVD and vice 8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM Thu 10/28 up to eight days in advance, and for a maximum of
menu, and sub-menu. By using these displays, you versa. Select the dubbing direction before 120 channels. TV Guide On Screen data for the
can perform most of the recorder’s operations. dubbing. Options for the disc or menu television program listing is carried by local
F SETUP (page 83): broadcast stations and is received through your
Turns on the Setup Display, which allows you Example 2: When you press TOOLS while a antenna or cable box.
to set up the recorder to suit your preferences. DVD-RW (VR mode) is playing.
8:05 LISTINGS SORT PROMOTIONS
ALPHABETICAL MOVIES SPORTS
1 2 3 Move down to select a subcategory for Movies.
4 5 6
Note Close
Stop
Move right for Sports, left for ALPHABETICAL.

7 8 9 The TV GUIDE option will not contain any listings until Disc Info.

0 the recorder receives the TV Guide On Screen data. Erase Title

All Fantasy
Protect Title Promotional
Panel Action Horror
TOOLS
Adventure Musical

TOOLS
Sub-menu Animated Mystery
SYSTEM Biography Romance
MENU The sub-menu appears when you select an item Options for the disc or picture Comedy Sci-Fi
Promotional
Documentary Western
</M/m/,, from a list menu (e.g. a title from the Title List
Panel

O RETURN ENTER
Drama War
menu), and press ENTER. The sub-menu displays
To return to the previous display
options applicable only to the selected item. The
displayed options differ depending on the Press O RETURN. These are just a few of the ways to use the TV
situation and disc type. Guide On Screen system.
Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER. – Search for a program by listing them according
to category, such as Movies or Sports, or in
System Menu Example: The Title List menu alphabetical order.
– Once you have found the program you are
The System Menu appears when you press
looking for, use the TV Guide On Screen system
SYSTEM MENU, and provides entries to all of TITLE LIST ORIGINAL My Movies 1.5/4.7GB
to set the timer for recording (page 46).
the recorder’s main functions, such as timer Sort 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM Wed 9/15
Close
Play – If you find a program that you want to watch in
recording and setup. Date 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM Fri 9/17
Play Beginning
Title
the future, set it as a Favorite. You can later tune
Select an option by pressing M/m and ENTER.
3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM Sat
Erase9/25
Number
4 3ch Dubbing
8:00PM - 8:30PM Sat 9/25
5 25ch
Protect Title
8:00PM - 8:30PM Fri 10/15
in to that program directly by pressing the blue
6 L2
Title Name
9:00PM - 9:30PM Tue 10/19
Set Thumbnail
button on the remote when the program begins
7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM A-B 10/26
TueErase
broadcasting.
SYSTEM MENU 8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM Thu 10/28

TITLE LIST
For more information, see “Navigating the TV
TV GUIDE Options for the selected item Guide On Screen system” (page 34).
SCHEDULE

DV/D8 EDIT

DUBBING TOOLS
SETUP
The TOOLS menu appears when you press
TOOLS, and displays options applicable to the
A TITLE LIST (page 37): entire disc (e.g. disc protection), recorder (e.g.
Turns on the Title List menu, which shows audio settings during recording), or multiple items
recorded titles on the disc. on a list menu (e.g. erasing multiple titles). The
displayed options differ depending on the
B TV GUIDE (page 46): situation and disc type.
Allows you to set a new timer recording Select the option by pressing M/m and ENTER.
setting using the TV Guide On Screen system.

32 ,continued 33

Troubleshooting guide Navigating the TV Guide On Screen
If you are having trouble displaying the television system
program list, please check the following.
– This recorder downloads the TV Guide On
Screen data several times a day when the
recorder is turned off. Turn off the recorder
Number 1 2
when you are not using it (for example, at night). buttons 1
4 2
5 3
It may take up to 24 hours for your recorder to 4
7 5
8 6
start receiving program listings. Blue 7 8
0 9
button 0
– When the recorder is connected to a cable box,
the cable box must be turned on, the set top box [TV GUIDE]
controller must be connected, and “Set Top Box
Control” in the Settings setup must be set to
“On” (page 86) to download the TV Guide On EXIT
Screen data.
– Your area of residence and zip code must be set
correctly (page 85). 1 Press [TV GUIDE].
– The time must be set correctly. If the time is not TV Guide On Screen appears.
set, set it manually (page 86).
– The television program list is blank when TV 2 Press </M/m/, to move the cursor
Guide On Screen data is being downloaded or a around the entire TV Guide On Screen
satellite or terrestrial digital tuner is in use. system, and press ENTER to make a
You may be asked to select a channel lineup the selection.
first time you press [TV GUIDE]. Select one of the Example: LISTINGS
available channel lineups. If the channel number
8:05 SCHEDULE
in the program listing does not match the TODAY
broadcast station, see “To match the channel
number with the broadcast station” (page 36).
Notes Promotional
Panel
• Only English is displayed in the TV Guide On Screen
system.
• The TV Guide On Screen system is not compatible
Promotional
with satellite and terrestrial digital broadcasts. Panel
8:00 10:00
• Your cable box’s channel may suddenly change even if
the recorder is turned off. This is because the set top
box control has changed the channel to receive the TV
Guide On Screen data.
A Picture in Guide: This shows the last
program you were watching. See “To lock
the Picture in Guide” (page 36) to prevent
the picture from changing when you move
the cursor.
B Main Menu Bar: Use </, to select one
of the following features and press ENTER.
“LISTINGS”: Shows the current programs
for the selected time slot.
“SORT”: Allows you to sort titles
alphabetically or by category (movies,
sports, children’s, educational, news,
variety, series).
“PROMOTIONS”: Shows just promotions. 2 Press M/m to select a program and press
Select a promotion and press the (info) ENTER.
button. The TV Guide On Screen system disappears
“SETUP”: Allows you to change the TV and the channel changes to the selected
program.
Guide On Screen system settings and
You can also use the number buttons (Direct
channel lineup.
Dialing) to select a program. When
3 “MESSAGES”: Displays messages and “LISTINGS” is selected, enter the channel
6
information such as the TV Guide ID number of the program you want to watch
9
Number. To delete unwanted messages, using the number buttons on the remote, then
Guide to Displays
Green
button
press the green button. press ENTER.
(Info) “SCHEDULE”: Displays either the
</M/m/,, RECORD list or the FAVORITES list. To find a program alphabetically or by
ENTER Press ENTER and use </, to switch category
PAGE +/–
between the lists. 1 Select “SORT” in the Main Menu Bar and
press ENTER.
C Time Slot: Indicates the currently selected
time slot. Use </, to select a different 2 Press </, to select the main category.
time slot. To sort alphabetically, select
“ALPHABETICAL.”
D Program Title: Gives the program title. The
program’s category is also indicated by 3 Press</M/m/, to select the sub-category
(or a letter if you are sorting alphabetically),
color: green (sports), purple (movies), blue
and press ENTER.
(children’s), teal (others).
4 Press M/m to select a program and press
E Info. Box: Shows information about the ENTER.
selected program and displays the
LISTINGS SORT
8:00PM 8:30PM
following icons. To set a program as a “Favorite”
Doctors and Lawyers
“ ”indicates that the program is set to be If you find a program that you want to watch in the
Local News Sports
Today's News recorded. future, set it as a Favorite by pressing the blue
The Urban Garden
Music Show Local News “ ”indicates that the program is set as a button. “ ” appears next to the program.
Chemicals and Chemistry
Favorite. To customize the “Favorite” setting, press the
World Soccer
Teams from across the globe face off in a “ ”indicates that the program is in stereo. green button. The settings change as follows:
yearly tournament to determine the best
: Registers the program as a “Favorite.”
soccer country in the world.
“ ”indicates that the program is closed
: Registers a regularly scheduled program as a
FAVORITES RECORD INFO.
captioned.
High Places “Favorite.”
The Law and You Press the (info) button repeatedly to : Registers the program as a weekly “Favorite.”
show extended information about the : Temporarily turns off the “Favorite” setting.
program.
To view the programs you have set a “Favorite,”
F Action Bar: Shows buttons that can be used select “SCHEDULE” in the Main Menu Bar and
press ENTER. Then press </, to select
on the remote with the current selection.
“FAVORITES.”
For example, when a program is selected,
press blue to add the program to the To watch a “Favorite” program
FAVORITES list, or green to add the When you are watching TV, press the blue button
program to the RECORD list. on the remote when the broadcasting time for that
G Channel Logo: Shows the broadcast station program arrives. If more than one program is
registered as a “Favorite” in the same time slot,
logo.
press the blue button repeatedly to switch between
the programs.
To select a program (Direct Tuning)
1 Select “LISTINGS” in the Main Menu Bar To set a program for timer recording
and press ENTER. See “Recording using the TV Guide On Screen
system (TV GUIDE)” (page 46).

34 ,continued 35

1-8
 To lock the Picture in Guide You cannot unlock the Picture in Guide during Standard Title List (Example: DVD-RW in VR
You can lock the Picture in Guide so that it does
not change when you move the cursor across other
recording.
• If you are watching programs through a set top box, the Using the Title List mode)
Picture in Guide may not change as fast as you move
titles. +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
the cursor. In this case, lock the Picture in Guide HDD
Select the logo of the channel that you want to (page 36). My Movies 1.5/4.7GB
TITLE LIST ORIGINAL
lock from LISTINGS and press the blue button. • When you turn on the recorder, the same channel that The titles of programs recorded on a disc are 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM Wed 9/15
Sort
Press the blue button again to unlock the channel. you were watching last will automatically appear, even displayed in the Title List. Date 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM Fri 9/17
Title
3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM Sat 9/25
if you should change the channel on your set top box Number
4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM Sat 9/25
To customize the channel line-up while the recorder’s power is off. Z OPEN/ 5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM Fri 10/15
• The screen saver will not appear with the TV Guide On CLOSE

Guide to Displays
6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM Tue 10/19
1 Select “SETUP” in the Main Menu Bar and Screen system. The TV Guide On Screen system will HDD
DVD
7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM Tue 10/26

press ENTER. simply turn off if no buttons are pressed for more than 1 2 3
8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM Thu 10/28

2 Press M/m to select “Change channel display” five minutes. 4 5 6

and press ENTER.

7 8

0
9
m
3 Press M/m to select a channel and perform one
TITLE LIST “Zoomed” Title List
of the following. TOOLS
◆To hide the channel CURSOR </M/m/,,
MODE ENTER
Press the green button.
ZOOM +/– TITLE LIST ORIGINAL My Movies 1.5/4.7GB

◆To change the channel number Sort 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM

2ch
Date Wed 9/15 1:00PM( 1H00M)SP
Enter the new channel number using the number Title
2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM
5ch
buttons. Number
Fri 9/17 8:00PM( 1H00M)SLP
3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM
◆To change the order of the channels 12ch
Sat 9/25 9:00AM( 0H30M)EP

Select channel you want to move and press < to 4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM

1
3ch
Sat 9/25 8:00PM( 0H30M)SLP
highlight the channel logo. Press the blue button to Press HDD or DVD.
move the channel up, or press the green button to If you select DVD, press Z OPEN/CLOSE
move the channel down. and place a DVD on the disc tray. Press Z
again to close the disc tray.
To match the channel number with the A Disc type:
broadcast station Displays a media type, HDD or DVD.
If the channel number in the program listing does Also displays the title type (Original or
not match the broadcast station, there may be more Playlist) for DVD-RWs (VR mode).
than one channel lineup for your area. To change B Sort buttons:
the channel lineup, select “Change channel Sorts the title order (see below).
lineup” from “SETUP” and press ENTER. Then
select a different channel lineup, if available. With the recording side facing down C Zooming indicator:
Shows the current zoom status.
To turn off the TV Guide On Screen system Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front D Disc name (DVD only) (page 40)
Press [TV GUIDE] or EXIT on the remote. panel display.
E Disc space (remainder/total)
z Hints 2 Press TITLE LIST.
F Title information:
• Press the PAGE +/– buttons to change the program list To show the list in greater detail (zoom), press
by page. ZOOM+. Displays the title number, title name, and
• Each time you turn on the power, the TV Guide On recording date.
Screen system automatically appears on your TV z (red): Indicates that the title is currently
screen. To turn off this function, select “SETUP” from being recorded.
the Main Menu Bar, and then select “Review options.” : Indicates that the title is currently being
Then select “Off” and press ENTER. dubbed.
: Indicates the protected title.
Notes “NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly
• Programs that contain copy protection signals do not recorded (not played back) (HDD only).
appear in the Picture in Guide.
• The Picture in Guide is locked during recording and the
lock indicator appears in the Picture in Guide window.

36 ,continued 37

G Scroll bar: 4 While watching the playback picture, press Example: DVD-RW (VR mode)
H PLAY, X PAUSE, or m/M to select
Appears when all of the titles do not fit on the
list. To view the hidden titles, press M/m. the scene you want to set for a thumbnail
Using the “Disc Info”
H Title’s thumbnail picture
picture, and press ENTER. Screen (disc settings) Disc Information
Close
The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail DiscName Movie

Disc Name
picture. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R Media DVD-RW Format VR
Protect Disc
Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2

To scroll the list display by page (Page mode) To turn off the Title List With the Disc Information display, you can check
Protected Not Protected Finalize

Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003 Erase All

Press CURSOR MODE while the list display is Press TITLE LIST. the disc type and remaining disc space. Also, you HQ : 0H30M HSP : 0H45M SP : 1H00M
turned on. The display enters Page mode. Each can perform operations such as formatting and
Remainder LP : 1H30M EP : 2H00M SLP : 3H00M Format

Guide to Displays
2. 3 / 4. 7GB
time you press M/m, the entire Title List changes z Hint finalizing (page 40).
to the next/previous page of titles. After recording, the first scene of the recording (the title)
To return to the Cursor mode, press CURSOR is automatically set as the thumbnail picture.
Z OPEN/
MODE again. CLOSE A “Disc Name” (DVD only)
DVD
Notes HDD
About the Title List for DVD-RWs (VR mode) B “Media”: Disc type
• The Title List may not appear for DVDs created on 1 2 3

You can switch the Title List to show Original or other DVD recorders. 4 5 6 C “Format”: Recording format type (HDD/
Playlist. • Letters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “*.” 7 8 9
DVD-RW only)
While the Title List menu is turned on, press • Title thumbnail pictures are displayed only on this 0

TOOLS and select either “Original” or “Playlist,” recorder. D “Title no.”: Total number of titles
and press ENTER. “PLAYLIST” appears on the • It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail pictures to
be displayed. TOOLS
E “Protected”: Indicates whether protection is
front panel display when “Playlist” is selected.
• After editing, the title thumbnail picture may change to set (DVD-RW in VR mode only)
For details, see “Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR
the first scene of the recording (title). </M/m/,,
mode)” (page 64).
• After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on the ENTER
F “Date”: Dates of when the oldest and the
source recording is canceled. most recent titles were recorded (DVD
To change the title order (Sort) only)
Press < while the Title List menu is turned on to
move the cursor to the Sort column. Press M/m to G “Continuous Rem. Time”/“Remainder”
select the item, and press ENTER. (approximate)
1 Press HDD or DVD. • The longest continuous recording time in
Order Sorted If you select a DVD, press Z OPEN/CLOSE each of the recording modes
New in order of when the titles were and place a DVD on the disc tray. Press Z • Disc space bar
(HDD only) recorded. The title that is recorded again to close the disc tray. • Remaining disc space/total disc space
most recently and not played back is
listed at the top. H Disc setting buttons (page 40)
• “Disc Name”
Date in order of when the titles were • “Protect Disc”
recorded. The title that is recorded
most recently is listed at the top.
• “Finalize”/“Unfinalize”
• “Erase All”
Title in alphabetical order. • “Format”
Number in order of recorded title number. With the recording side facing down Available settings differ depending on the
disc type.
To change a title thumbnail picture Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front
(Thumbnail) (HDD/DVD-RW (VR mode) only) panel display.
z Hint
You can select a favorite scene for the thumbnail
picture shown in the Title List menu. 2 Press TOOLS. For DVD+RWs and DVD-RWs (Video mode), you can
check free space and title location on the disc using the
The TOOLS menu appears.
1 Press TITLE LIST while a disc is in the Disc Map display (page 67).
recorder, and press ZOOM+. 3 Select “Disc Info.,” and press ENTER.
Items in the display differ depending on the Note
2 Select a title whose thumbnail picture you
disc type or recording format.
want to change, and press ENTER. On this model, 1 GB (read “gigabyte”) is equivalent to 1
billion bytes. The larger the number, the larger the disc
3 Select “Set Thumbnail” from the sub-menu, space.
and press ENTER.
The selected title starts to play in the
background.
38 ,continued 39

1-9
 Labeling, protecting, or formatting Finalizing a disc (preparing a disc
3 Select “Finalize,” and press ENTER.

a disc for playback on other equipment)

The display shows the approximate time
required for finalizing and asks for
Checking the Play
+RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
confirmation. Information and Playing
HDD
You can execute options effective for the entire Finalizing is necessary when you play discs
Finalize Time
disc using the Disc Information display. recorded with this recorder on other DVD About xx min is needed for finalizing this disc.
Cannot cancel finalizing during transaction. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
1 Press TOOLS while the disc is in the
equipment.
When you finalize a DVD+RW, DVD-RW
Do you want to finalize?
DVD VCD CD DATA CD
recorder.

Guide to Displays
(Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R, a DVD menu OK Cancel
You can check the playing time and remaining
The TOOLS menu appears. will be automatically created, which can be time of the current title, chapter, or track. Also,
2 Select “Disc Info.,” and press ENTER. displayed on other DVD equipment.
4 Select “OK,” and press ENTER. you can check the disc name recorded on the
Example: When the inserted disc is a DVD- Before finalizing, check the differences between DVD/CD.
the disc types in the table below. The recorder starts finalizing the disc.
RW (VR mode).

Disc Information Differences between the disc types

To unfinalize a DVD-RW (VR mode)
Close
DiscName +RW Discs are automatically finalized when If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW (VR
Media DVD-RW Format VR
Disc Name removed from the recorder. However, mode) that has been finalized with other DVD
Title no. Original 3 / Playlist 2
Protect Disc you may need to finalize the disc for equipment (a message appears), unfinalize the
Protected Not Protected Finalize certain DVD equipment, or if the
disc by selecting “Unfinalize” in step 3 above.
Date 9/15/2003 ~ 10/28/2003 Erase All
recording time is short. You can edit or
HQ : 0H30M HSP : 0H45M SP : 1H00M
record on the disc even after finalizing. DISPLAY
Remainder LP : 1H30M EP : 2H00M SLP : 3H00M Format
z Hint TIME/TEXT
2. 3 / 4. 7GB

-RWVR Finalizing is unnecessary when playing You can check whether the disc has been finalized or not.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.
a disc on VR format compatible
equipment.
If you cannot select “Finalize” in step 3 above, the disc
has already been finalized.
“Disc Name” (DVD only): Labels a DVD. Even if your other DVD equipment is
Enter the disc name in the “Input Disc Name” VR format compatible, you may need to Notes
display (page 43). finalize the disc, especially if the
“Protect Disc” (DVD-RW in VR mode only): recording time is short. You can edit or • Depending on the condition of the disc, recording, or
record on the disc even after finalizing. the DVD equipment, discs may not play even if the
Protects all titles on the disc. To cancel the
discs are finalized.
protection, select “Don’t Protect.” -RWVideo Finalizing is necessary when playing on • The recorder may not be able to finalize the disc if it
“Erase All” (HDD/DVD+RW/DVD-RW any equipment other than this recorder. was recorded on another recorder.
only): Erases all titles on the disc (except the After finalizing, you cannot edit or
protected titles). record on the disc. If you want to record Press DISPLAY repeatedly.
“Format” (HDD/DVD+RW/DVD-RW only): on it again, reformat the disc (page 40). Each time you press the button, the display
Erases all contents. For DVD-RWs, select a However, all recorded contents will be changes as follows:
recording format (VR or Video) according to erased.
your needs. Title/track information (Display 1)
+R Finalizing is necessary when playing on
any equipment other than this recorder. m
-R After finalizing, you cannot edit or Play mode/time information (Display 2)
z Hints record on the disc. m
• You can set protection for individual titles (page 65). (Display off)
• By reformatting, you can change the recording format
on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVD-RWs (Video
mode) that have been finalized.
1 Press TOOLS while the disc is in the The displays differ depending on the disc type or
recorder. playing status.
The TOOLS menu appears. ◆ Display 1
Note
You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD disc name. 2 Select “Disc Info.,” and press ENTER. Example: When playing a DVD VIDEO
The disc name may not appear when the disc is played on The Disc Information display appears.
other DVD equipment.

Title 1
Angle3(5) 1 : English DolbyDigital 2/0

40 ,continued 41

A Title number/name z Hints Example: When playing a CD

(Track number for CDs/VIDEO CDs without
PBC, scene number for VIDEO CDs with
• If “DTS” is set to “Off” in Audio Setup, the DTS track
selection option will not appear on the screen even if Track playing time and the current track/index How to Enter Characters
the disc contains DTS tracks (page 90). number
PBC, track number/name for DATA CDs)
• When “Auto Display” is set to “On” (default) in m You can label a title, disc, or program by entering
B Available functions for DVD VIDEOs Options Setup (page 94), playback information characters. You can enter up to 64 characters for a
automatically appears when the recorder is turned on, Remaining time of the current track
( angle/ audio/ subtitle, etc.) title or disc name, but the actual number of
etc. m characters displayed in the menus such as the Title
C The current selected function or audio
Playing time of the disc List will vary. When the display for entering
setting (appears only temporarily) Notes
m characters appears, follow the steps below.
Guide to Displays
D The current selected angle • The recorder can only display the first level of a CD’s
text, such as the disc name. Remaining time of the disc

Example: Dolby Digital 5.1 ch

• The letters or symbols that cannot be displayed are m
replaced with “*.”
CD text (when available)
Rear (L/R)
1 2 3
Number
Checking the playing/remaining buttons, SET 4 5 6

time Notes 7 8 9

0
• The recorder can only display the first level of a CD’s
You can view the playing or remaining time text, such as the disc name.
1 : English DolbyDigital 3/2.1 • The letters or symbols that cannot be displayed are
information displayed on the TV screen and the
front panel display. replaced with “*.”
• Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be displayed
Front (L/R) + Center LFE (Low Frequency correctly. </M/m/,,
Effect) Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly. ENTER
The displays differ depending on the disc type or
◆ Display 2 playing status.
Example: When playing a DVD-RW (VR mode)
◆Front panel display
Example: When playing a DVD 1 Press </M/m/, to move the cursor to
Original
DVD-RW
Movies
the right of the screen and select “A”
VR SP T1 0:00:45 Playing time and number of the current title
(upper-case), “a” (lower-case), or
“Symbol,” and press ENTER.
A Disc type*2/format (page 8) The characters of the selected type are
displayed.
B Title type (Original or Playlist) (page 64) Remaining time of the current title

C Play mode 2 Press </M/m/, to select the character

you want to enter, and press ENTER.
D Recording mode (page 45) The selected character appears at the top of
Playing time and number of the current chapter
E Playing status bar*3 the display.

F Title number (chapter number*1) (page 61) Example: Input Title Name
(Track number for CDs/VIDEO CDs without
Remaining time of the current chapter
PBC, scene number for VIDEO CDs with Input Title Name
PBC, track number (album number*1) for K

DATA CDs) "A"

1 . , - 1 6 M N O 6 "a"
G CD text (album name) appears when text is Example: When dubbing a DVD 2 A B C 2 Back 7 P Q R S 7 Symbol

recorded on a CD. 3 D E F 3 Clear All 8 T U V 8

4 G H I 4 Space 9 W X Y Z 9 Cancel
Remaining time of dubbing in progress
H Playing time (remaining time* ) 1 5 J K L 5 0 0 Finish
CH

*1 Displayed when you press TIME/TEXT repeatedly.

2
* Displays Super VCDs as “SVCD”, DATA CDs as The type of characters will change according
“CD”. to the language you select in Easy Setup.
3 Does not appear with VIDEO CDs, or DATA CDs. Some languages allow you to enter an accent
*
mark.

42 ,continued 43

1-10
 To enter a letter with an accent mark, select an
Recording mode Recording time (hour)
accent followed by the letter.
Example: Select “ ` ” and then “a” to enter “à.” Recording HDD DVD
HQ (High quality) 33 1
To insert a space, select “Space.”
Before Recording HSP R 51 1.5
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter the
SP (Standard mode) 67 2
remaining characters. Before you start recording…
LP r 103 3
• This recorder can record on various discs. Select
Input row
the disc type according to your needs (page 8). EP r 137 4
Input Title Name • Check that the disc has enough available space SLP (Long duration) 204 6
Kids
for the recording (page 39). For HDD,
DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you can free up

Recording
1 . , - 1 6 M N O 6
"A"
"a"
“HQ+” recording mode
disc space by erasing titles (page 67).
2 A B C 2 Back 7 P Q R S 7 Symbol “HQ+” records pictures in higher quality than HQ
3 D E F 3 Clear All 8 T U V 8 • Adjust the recording picture quality and picture
on the HDD. Set “HQ Setting” in Features Setup
4 G H I 4 Space 9 W X Y Z 9 Cancel size if necessary (page 51).
5 J K L 5 0 0 Finish
to “HQ+” (page 93). Maximum recording time is
z Hint
21 hours. “HQ” appears in the display.
Timer recordings will be made regardless whether or not
To erase a character, move the cursor to the the recorder is turned on. You can turn off the recorder Note
right of the character at the input row. Select without affecting the recording even after recording Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with the
“Back” and press ENTER. starts. recording time.
– Recording a program with poor reception, or a program
To insert a character, move the cursor to the Recording mode or video source of low picture quality
right of the point where you want to insert the – Recording on a disc that has already been edited
character. Select the character and press Like the SP or LP recording mode of VCRs, this – Recording only a still picture or just sound
ENTER. recorder has six different recording modes.
Select a recording mode according to the time and Recording a stereo/SAP program
To erase all of the characters, select “Clear picture quality you need. For example, if picture
quality is your top priority, select the High Quality The recorder can receive and record stereo/SAP
All” and press ENTER.
mode (HQ). If recording time is your priority, programs.
4 Select “Finish,” and press ENTER. Super Long Play mode (SLP) can be a possible
To cancel the setting, select “Cancel.” choice. Note that recording times in the following Stereo programs
table are approximate and the actual times may When a stereo program is received, the
differ. Note also that the maximum continuous “STEREO” indicator lights up on the front panel
To use the number buttons recording time for a single title is eight hours display. If there is noise in the stereo program, set
You can also use the number buttons to enter (HDD), or six hours (DVD). Contents beyond this “Auto Stereo” in Audio Setup to “Off” (page 89).
characters. time will not be recorded. The sound will be recorded in monaural but with
Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the less noise.
1 In step 2 above, press the number buttons
repeatedly to select a character. recording modes.
SAP (Second Audio Program)
Example:
I want to record with the When a SAP (Second Audio Program) is received,
Press the number 3 button once to enter “D.”
best possible picture the “SAP” indicator lights up on the front panel
Press the number 3 button three times to enter quality, so I’ll select HQ. display. To record only SAP sound, set “Tuner
“F.”
Audio” in Audio Setup to “SAP” (page 89).
2 Press SET and select the next character.
3 Select “Finish” and press ENTER.

44 ,continued 45

Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front To adjust the recording quality
Unrecordable pictures
Timer Recording (TV GUIDE/ panel display.
Unused DVDs are formatted automatically.
See step 3 of “Checking/Changing/Canceling
Timer Settings”(page 49).
Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded
on this recorder. Manual/VCR Plus+) 2 Press [TV GUIDE].
When the recorder receives a copy guard signal, Rec Mode Adjust
There are three methods to set the timer – setting 8:05 SCHEDULE LISTINGS SORT If there is not enough available disc space for the
the recorder continues to record but only a blank,
the timer using the TV Guide On Screen system, TODAY 8:00PM 8:30PM
recording, the recorder automatically adjusts the
gray colored screen will be recorded. Doctors and Lawyers
using VCR Plus+ and setting the timer manually. Local News Sports recording mode to enable the entire program to be
Copy control Recordable discs Today's News
recorded. Set “Rec Mode Adjust” in Features
The Urban Garden
signals Notes Music Show Local News Setup to “On” (page 93).
Promotional
Panel Chemicals and Chemistry
Copy-Free +RW -RWVR • When the recorder is connected to a cable box and you
HDD World Soccer
Auto Title Erase (HDD only)
want to record using the TV Guide On Screen system,

Recording
-RWVideo +R -R do the following: Turn on the cable box, connect the set If there is not enough space for a timer recording,
top box controller, and set “Set Top Box Control” in the Promotional
Panel
8:00 10:00 FAVORITES RECORD INFO. the recorder automatically erases old titles
Copy-Once HDD Settings setup to “On.” High Places
recorded on the HDD.
-RWVR (Ver.1.1 with CPRM*) • Do not operate your cable box or satellite receiver just The Law and You
Set “Auto Title Erase” in Features Setup to “On”
before or during a timer recording. This may prevent
Copy-Never None (a blank screen is
recorded) the accurate recording of a program. 3 Press </M/m/, to select a program. (page 93). The oldest, played title is erased. The
To search for a program alphabetically or by protected titles are not erased.
* The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM category, select “SORT” in the Main Menu
compatible equipment. Recording using the TV Guide On If the timer settings overlap
Bar. See “Using the TV Guide On Screen
Screen system (TV GUIDE) system” for more information about If one or more timer settings overlap, appears
Note navigating the TV Guide On Screen system next to the program and the recording is
You can use the TV Guide On Screen system to set suspended. The timer recording resumes its
Copy-Once programs can not be dubbed (page 73). the timer to record a program up to eight days in (page 33).
original status when the overlap condition no
advance. 4 Press the green button. longer exists. To change the timer settings, see
Z OPEN/ appears next to the program. Each time you “Checking/Changing/Canceling Timer Settings”
CLOSE press the blue button, the timer recording (page 49).
HDD changes as follows.
DVD
1 2 3 : the program is recorded once. Notes
4 5 6
: the program is recorded on a regular basis.
7 8 9
• Check to see that there is enough available space for the
: the program is recorded weekly. recording (DVD+RW/DVD-RW only) (page 67). Note
0
: the timer recording is temporarily put on that recordings made with the TV Guide On Screen
hold without canceling the setting. system require one extra minute of recording time.
[TV GUIDE] Green

Blue button
button
5 Press [TV GUIDE].
• The Rec Mode Adjust function only works with a timer
recording. It does not function with Quick Timer
</M/m/,, The TIMER REC indicator lights up on the (page 51).
ENTER front panel display and the recorder is ready to • You cannot adjust the recording quality or recording
start recording. When recording from a cable destination once the recording starts.
box, be sure to turn it on.
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off the
recorder before the timer recording starts.
x REC STOP

1 Press HDD or DVD. To confirm, change, or cancel a timer

If you select DVD, press Z OPEN/CLOSE recording
and place a DVD on the disc tray. Press Z See “Checking/Changing/Canceling Timer
again to close the disc tray. Settings” (page 49).

To stop recording during timer recording

Open the remote’s cover and press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.

With the recording side facing down

46 ,continued 47

1-11
 “PlusCode”: Press the number buttons. To
Setting the timer manually or using correct the number, press M/m and enter the
the VCR Plus+ system (Manual/VCR number again.
Plus+) 3 Press ENTER.
To make another timer setting, select
You can set the timer for a total of 30 programs.
“RECORD” and repeat from step 3.
4 Press [TV GUIDE].
The TIMER REC indicator lights up on the
front panel display and the recorder is ready to
Number 1 2 3
Notes
• Check to see that there is enough available space for the Checking/Changing/
recording (DVD+RW/DVD-RW only) (page 67).
• To record a cable or satellite program without using
Canceling Timer Settings
cable box/satellite box control, turn on the cable box or
satellite receiver and select the program you want to You can check, change or cancel timer settings
record. Leave the cable box or satellite receiver turned using the SCHEDULE list, even while a recording
on until the recorder finishes recording. is in progress.
• The Rec Mode Adjust function only works with a timer
recording. It does not function with Quick Timer

start recording. When recording from a cable (page 50).

buttons, SET 4 5 6
• You cannot adjust the recording quality or recording
7 8 9 box or satellite tuner, be sure to turn it on.
destination once the recording starts.

Recording
0
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn off the Number 1 2 3

[TIMER] buttons 4 5 6
recorder before the timer recording starts.
[TV GUIDE]
7 8 9

Green 0

Blue button button SCHEDULE

To confirm, change, or cancel a timer [TV GUIDE]
M/m, ENTER Green button
recording Blue
button
See “Checking/Changing/Canceling Timer
Settings” (page 49). </M/m/,,
EXIT ENTER
To stop recording during timer recording
1 Press [TIMER]. Open the remote’s cover and press x REC STOP. 1 With the TV Guide On Screen system
8:05 MESSAGES SCHEDULE LISTINGS
Note that it may take a few seconds for the turned off, press SCHEDULE.
recorder to stop recording. The SCHEDULE list appears.
CANCEL Rec Mode Adjust 2 Press M/m to select the program you want
FAVORITES RECORD
If there is not enough available disc space for the to change, then press ENTER.
Date: 7 / 7 / 04
Promotional
Panel Start Time: 0 : 00 pm
recording, the recorder automatically adjusts the
8:05 MESSAGES SCHEDULE LISTINGS
End Time: 0 : 00 pm recording mode to enable the entire program to be Enter the number of minutes that the show
Channel: 30
Quality: EP recorded. Set “Rec Mode Adjust” in Features should begin early and end late. Press the OK
key when all the information is correct. Press
Destination: HDD
Promotional Setup to “On” (page 93). the Green key to cancel.
CANCEL
Panel
PlusCode: ========= FAVORITES RECORD

Auto Title Erase (HDD only) Promotional Start early by: 00 minutes
Panel End late by: 00 minutes
If there is not enough space for a timer recording,
2 Press M/m to select an item. the recorder automatically erases old titles
Quality:
Destination:
EP
HDD
“Date”: Press the number buttons to enter recorded on the HDD.
month, day, and year. Set “Auto Title Erase” in Features Setup to “On”
Promotional
Panel

“Start Time”/”End Time”: Press the number
buttons to enter the time. To change am/pm,
select “am” or “pm,” and press the blue
button.
“Channel”: If you are using the set top box
control, press the number buttons to enter the
channel. If not, select LINE 1, 2, or 3 using the
blue button, whichever your box is connected
to, and select the channel you want to record
on the set top box.
“Quality”: Press the blue button to change the
recording mode.
“Destination”: Press the blue button to switch
between HDD and DVD.
(page 93). The oldest, played title is erased. The
protected titles are not erased.
3 Press M/m to select the item you want to
If the timer settings overlap adjust.
If one or more timer settings overlap, appears “Start early by”: Press the number buttons to
next to the program and the recording is start the recording by up to 99 minutes in
suspended. The timer recording resumes its advance.
original status when the overlap condition no “End late by”: Press the number buttons to
longer exists. To change the timer settings, see extend the recording by up to 99 minutes.
“Checking/Changing/Canceling Timer Settings” “Quality”: Press the blue button to change the
(page 49). recording mode.
“Destination”: Press the blue button to switch
between HDD and DVD.
4 Press [TV GUIDE].

48 ,continued 49

To change the recording frequency To stop recording

Adjusting the recording picture
Press SCHEDULE and select the program you
want to change. Then press the green button
Recording Without the Press x REC STOP located beneath the remote
control cover. Note that it may take a few seconds quality and size
repeatedly to change the recording frequency. Timer for recording to stop.
You can adjust the recording picture quality and
Programs set to be recorded “Daily” will only be
recorded from Monday through Friday. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R To pause recording picture size.
Press X REC PAUSE located beneath the remote
To cancel the timer setting control cover. To restart recording, press the
Press SCHEDULE and select the program you DVD button again.
want to cancel. Then press the blue button. 1 2 3

HDD TV/VIDEO To watch another TV program while recording 4 5 6

To turn off the SCHEDULE list 1 2 3

CH +/– Set your TV to the TV input using the TV/VIDEO 7 8 9
Recording
4 5 6 0
Press EXIT. button.
7 8 9

z Hint
0
If two or more timer settings overlap
If you do not want to watch TV while recording, you can TOOLS
The timer recording set last has priority over the
other settings and is recorded. All other turn off the TV. When using a cable box, make sure to
leave it on. </M/m/,,
overlapped settings are suspended, even if the ENTER
setting only partially overlaps the setting with
priority. appears next to programs that are Notes
suspended. • After pressing z REC, it may take a short while to start
recording.
X REC • You cannot change the recording mode while
Example: You set the timer in order of A, and then PAUSE recording or during recording pause.
B. z REC DISPLAY
x REC • If there is a power failure, the program you are
REC MODE STOP recording may be erased.
7:00 • You cannot watch a TV program while recording 1 Before recording starts, press TOOLS and
A will be suspended another TV program. select “Rec Settings.” Then press ENTER.
9:00 11:00 Rec. Settings
B Using the Quick Timer function
1 Press HDD or DVD to select a media.
You can set the recorder to record in 30 minute
Select the item you want to change.

will be recorded When you selected DVD, insert a recordable Rec Mode : SP
increments.
DVD. HDD Rec. Picture Size : 4:3

Press z REC repeatedly to set the duration.

2 Press CH +/– to select the channel or input
Each press advances the time in 30 minute
DVD Rec. Picture Size :
Rec NR :
4:3
Off

If the end and start time of two timer settings source you want to record. Rec Video Equalizer
increments. The maximum duration is six hours.
are the same 3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the
0:30 1:00 5:30 6:00
(normal 2 Select the item you want to adjust, and
The end of program A or the beginning of program recording mode. recording) press ENTER.
B will be cut. Each time you press the button, the display The adjustment display appears.
changes on the TV screen as follows: The time counter decreases minute by minute to
7:00 9:00 10:00
HQ HSP SP LP EP SLP 0:00, then the recorder stops recording (power Example: Rec NR
A does not turn off). Even if you turn off the recorder
during recording, the recorder continues to record Rec NR
B For more details about the recording mode, until the time counter runs out. Off 1 2 3
see page 45.
To cancel the Quick Timer
4 Press z REC.
Press z REC repeatedly until the counter appears
Recording starts. “Rec Mode”: Selects the recording mode for
in the front panel display. The recorder returns to the desired recording time and picture quality.
Recording continues until you stop the
normal recording mode. For more information, see “Recording mode”
recording or the disc is full.
(page 45).

50 ,continued 51

1-12
 “HDD Rec. Picture Size”/“DVD Rec. Picture
Size”: Sets the picture size of the program to
be recorded.
• 4:3 (default): Sets the picture size to 4:3.
• 16:9: Sets the picture size to 16:9 (wide
mode).
• Auto (HDD only): Automatically selects the
actual picture size.
“DVD Rec. Picture Size” works with DVD-
Rs and DVD-RWs (Video mode) when the
recording mode is set to HQ, HSP, or SP. For
all other recording modes, the screen size is
• You cannot use these settings for video signals from
the DV IN jack and COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks.
Recording From a VCR or
Checking the disc status while Similar Device
recording
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R
You can check the recording information such as
recording time or disc type. You can record from a connected VCR or similar
device. To connect a VCR or similar device, see
Press DISPLAY twice during recording. “Connecting a VCR or Similar Device” (page 29).
The recording information appears. Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the
equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack).
4 Press TOOLS and select “Line Audio
Input.” Then press ENTER.
“Main/Sub”: Records two different sound
tracks when recording to the HDD or to a
DVD-RW (VR mode).
-R
“Stereo” (default): Records stereo sound only.
Select this when recording to discs other than
the HDD or DVD-RWs (VR mode).
5 Press X REC PAUSE to set this recorder to
record pause.
6

Recording
fixed at “4:3.”
Insert the source tape into the connected
For DVD-RWs (VR mode), the actual picture
DVD-RW
DVD
equipment and set to playback pause.
size is recorded regardless of the setting. For VIDEO SP 1:23:45
HDD
example, if a 16:9 size picture is received, the 1 2 3 7 At the same time, press X REC PAUSE on
disc records the picture as 16:9 even if “Rec this recorder and the pause or play button
Screen Size” is set to “4:3.” A Disc type/format 4 5 6

7 8 9
on the connected equipment.
For DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the screen size is B Recording status 0
Recording starts.
fixed at “4:3.” To stop recording, press x REC STOP on this
C Recording mode
recorder.
“Rec NR” (noise reduction): Reduces noise D Recording time TOOLS
contained in the video signal.
M/m, ENTER
Press DISPLAY to turn off the display. If you connect a digital video camera with a DV
“Rec Video Equalizer”: Adjusts the picture in
IN jack
greater detail. Creating chapters in a title See “DV/Digital8 Dubbing (DV t HDD/DVD)”
Press M/m to select the item you want to X REC
PAUSE (page 77) for an explanation of how to record from
adjust, then press ENTER. The recorder will automatically divide a recording
the DV IN jack.
• Contrast: Changes the contrast. (a title) into chapters by inserting chapter marks at x REC
• Brightness: Changes the overall brightness. 6 or 15 minute intervals during recording. Select REC MODE STOP
z Hint
• Color: Makes the colors deeper or lighter. the interval, “6Min” (default) or “15Min” in INPUT You can adjust the settings for the recording picture
• Hue: changes the color balance. “Auto Chapter” of Features Setup (page 91). SELECT before recording. See “Adjusting the recording picture
3 Adjust the setting using </M/m/,, and z Hint
quality and size” (page 51).

press ENTER.
The default setting is underlined.
“Rec NR”: (weak) Off 1 ~ 3 (strong)
“Rec Video Equalizer”:
• Contrast: (weak) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (strong)
• Brightness: (dark) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (bright)
• Color: (light) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (deep)
• Hue: (red) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (green)
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other items.
You can create chapters manually when playing DVD- 1 Press HDD or DVD. Notes
RWs (VR mode). For details, see page 68. If you select DVD, insert a recordable DVD.
• When recording a video game image, the screen may
2 Press INPUT SELECT to select an input not be clear.
• Any program that contains a Copy-Never copy guard
source according to the connection you
signal cannot be recorded. The recorder continues to
made. record, but a blank screen will be recorded.
The front panel display changes as follows:
Channel *
number L1 L2 L3 DV

Notes * Does not appear when “Set Top Box Control” is

• If one program contains two picture sizes, the selected set to “On.”
size is recorded. However, if the 16:9 signal cannot be
recorded as 16:9, it is recorded as 4:3.
3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the
• When playing a 16:9 size picture recorded as 4:3, the recording mode.
image is fixed to 4:3 letter box regardless of the setting The recording mode changes as follows:
in “TV Type” of Video Setup (page 87).
• Remnants of images may appear on your screen when HQ HSP SP LP EP SLP
using “Rec NR.”

52 53

2 Press TITLE LIST. The point where you stopped playing is cleared
For details about the Title List, see “Using the when:
Playback Title List” (page 37). – you open the disc tray (except for HDD).
Example: DVD-RW (VR mode) – you play another title (except for HDD).
Playing – you switch the Title List menu to Original or
Playlist (DVD-RW in VR mode only).
TITLE LIST ORIGINAL My Movies 1.5/4.7GB

+RW +R -R
– you edit the title after stopping playback.
HDD -RWVR -RWVideo Sort 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM Wed 9/15
Date 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM Fri 9/17 – you change the settings on the recorder.
DVD VCD CD DATA CD Title
3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM Sat 9/25
Number
4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM Sat 9/25
– you turn off the recorder (VIDEO CD/CD/
5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM Fri 10/15 DATA CD only).
Z OPEN/
6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM Tue 10/19
– you make a recording (except for HDD/DVD-
"/1 7 8ch 9:00PM - 9:30PM Tue 10/26
CLOSE 8 125ch 10:00AM - 10:30AM Thu 10/28
RWs in VR mode).
DVD
HDD
To play restricted DVDs (Parental Control)
Number
1

4
2

5
3

6
3 Select the title, and press ENTER. If you play a restricted DVD, the message “Do

Playback
buttons 7 8 9 The sub-menu appears. you want temporarily change parental control to
0
4 Select “Play,” and press ENTER. *?” appears on your TV screen.
Playback starts from the selected title on the 1 Select “OK” and press ENTER.
TITLE LIST
TOOLS disc. The display for entering your password
appears.
O RETURN </M/m/,, 2 Enter your four digit password using the
TOP MENU ENTER To use the DVD’s Menu number buttons.
MENU When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a finalized
DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD+R, or 3 Press ENTER to select “OK.”
H PLAY x STOP DVD-R, you can display the disc’s menu by The recorder starts playback.
X PAUSE pressing TOP MENU or MENU.
To register or change the password, see “Parental
To play VIDEO CDs with PBC functions Control (DVD VIDEO only)” (page 92).
1 Press HDD or DVD. PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play
VIDEO CDs interactively using the menu on your To lock the disc tray (Child Lock)
• If you select DVD, press Z OPEN/CLOSE You can lock the disc tray to prevent children from
TV screen.
and place a DVD or CD on the disc tray. ejecting the disc.
When you start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC
Then press the button again to close the disc When the recorder is in standby mode, press
functions, the menu appears.
tray. O RETURN, ENTER, and then {/1 on the
Select an item using the number buttons and press
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD, remote.
ENTER. Then follow the instructions in the menu
CD, or DATA CD, press H. Playback “LOCKED” appears in the front panel display.
(press H PLAY when “Press SELECT” appears).
starts. The Z OPEN/CLOSE button does not work while
The PBC function of Super VCDs does not work
with this recorder. Super VCDs are played in the Child Lock is set.
continuous play mode only.
To unlock the disc tray, press O RETURN,
To stop playback ENTER, and then {/1 on the remote again when
Press x STOP. the recorder is in standby mode.

To resume playback from the point where you z Hints

With the playback side facing down
stopped the disc (Resume Play)
When you press H PLAY again after you stop
the disc, the recorder resumes playback from the
point where you pressed x STOP.
To start from the beginning, press TOOLS, select
“Play Beginning” and press ENTER. Playback
starts from the beginning of the title/track/scene.
• You can also use the H PLAY button in step 3
(page 54) to start playback.
• Even if a timer recording starts during playback,
neither the recording nor playback will stop. See
page 60.
• Even if you select “Factory Setup” in Options Setup
(page 94), the Child Lock remains set.

54 ,continued 55

1-13
 Playback options Buttons Operations Discs

SUR (surround) Selects one of the TVS effects when pressed

repeatedly. DVD
Z OPEN/CLOSE TVS* (TV Virtual Surround) lets you enjoy virtual
surround sound effects created from the front left and
right speakers. The selected setting is displayed in the * TVS was developed
1 2 3 front panel display for a few seconds. by Sony to produce
4 5 6 “TVS OFF”: No surround effect home surround sound
7 8 9
“TVS DYNAMIC”: Creates one set of virtual rear with just a stereo TV.
speakers. This only works with
0
“TVS WIDE”: Creates five sets of virtual rear multichannel Dolby
AUDIO speakers. Digital soundtracks.
SUBTITLE “TVS NIGHT”: Creates five sets of virtual rear
speakers. Effective at low volume.
“TVS STANDARD”: Creates three sets of virtual rear

Playback
speakers. Effective when you use two separate front
speakers.

INSTANT REPLAY/
PROGRESSIVE Switches the type of video output signal to interlace or
progressive format (page 18). HDD +RW -RWVR
INSTANT ADVANCE m / M
-RWVideo +R -R
./> PREV/NEXT
DVD VCD
H PLAY X PAUSE
INSTANT Replays the scene/briefly fast forwards the scene.
REPLAY/ HDD +RW -RWVR
INSTANT -RWVideo +R -R
SUR ADVANCE
ANGLE DVD
PROGRESSIVE
. PREV/ Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/ All discs
> NEXT chapter/scene/track.

Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed All discs

(fast reverse/fast during playback.
Buttons Operations Discs forward) Search speed changes as follows: * FR3 and FF3 are only
available for the HDD
Z OPEN/CLOSE Stops play and opens the disc tray. All discs fast reverse fast forward and DVDs.
FR1 T t FF1
AUDIO Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc FR2 T T t t FF2
when pressed repeatedly. FR3* T T T t t t FF3*
HDD -RWVR DVD
DVD Selects the language. VCD CD DATA CD When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast
HDD -RWVR Selects the main or sub sound. reverse continues at the selected speed until you
release the button.
VCD CD DATA CD Selects stereo or monaural
audio tracks. Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one
HDD +RW -RWVR
(slow, freeze frame) second in pause mode.
SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly. DVD Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in -RWVideo +R -R
pause mode. DVD VCD
*
ANGLE Selects an angle when pressed repeatedly.
If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are * Playback direction
recorded on the disc, “ ” appears in the front panel DVD
only
display.
X PAUSE Pauses playback. All discs

To resume normal playback, press H PLAY.

56 ,continued 57

Notes Adjusting the picture quality

4 Press </, to adjust the setting, and
Adjusting the sound quality
press ENTER.
• To enjoy the TVS function, set “Digital Out” to “On”
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R The default settings are underlined. HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
and “Dolby Digital” to “D-PCM” in Audio Setup.
• When the playback signal does not contain a signal for “Y NR”: (weak) Off 1 2 3 (strong)
DVD VCD DVD VCD CD
the rear speakers, the surround effects will be difficult “C NR”: (weak) Off 1 2 3 (strong)
“BNR”: (weak) Off 1 2 3 (strong)
to hear.
• When you select one of the surround modes, turn off
1 Press TOOLS during playback. “DVE”*: (weak) Off 1 2 3 (strong) 1 Press TOOLS during playback.
the surround settings of the connected TV or amplifier The TOOLS menu appears. “PB Video Equalizer”: The TOOLS menu appears.
(receiver).
• Make sure that your listening position is between and
2 Select “Video Settings,” and press • Contrast: (weak) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (strong) 2 Select “Audio Settings,” and press
ENTER. • Brightness: (dark) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (bright) ENTER.
at an equal distance from your speakers, and that the • Color: (light) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (deep)
speakers are located in similar surroundings.
• The TVS function cannot be used with discs recorded
Video Settings • Hue: (red) –3 ~ 0 ~ 3 (green) 3 Select an item, and press ENTER.
on this recorder. Angles and subtitles also cannot be Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust any other items. “Surround (TVS)” (DVD VIDEO only):
Select the item you want to change.
changed. * “1” softens the outlines of the images. “2” Selects one of the surround modes. For more
Y NR : 2 enhances the outlines and “3” enhances them more information, see “Playback options”
Playback

Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD
• When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise will
be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To avoid
possible damage to the audio system, the consumer
should take proper precautions when the analog stereo
jacks of the recorder are connected to an amplification
system. To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an
external 5.1-channel decoder system must be
connected to the digital jack of the recorder.
• Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO button
when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD (page 56).
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track
DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL
OUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack.
When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set
“DTS” to “On” in Audio Setup (page 90).
C NR : 2 than “2.”
(page 56).
BNR : 2
DVE : Off
PB Video Equalizer
“Audio Filter” (all discs): Selects the digital
Notes filter to reduce noise above 22.05 kHz (Fs* is
44.1 kHz), 24 kHz (Fs is 48 kHz), or 48 kHz
3 Select an item, and press ENTER.
• If the outlines of the images on your screen become
blurred, set “BNR” to “Off.” (Fs is above 96 kHz).
The adjustment display appears. • Depending on the disc or the scene being played, the • Sharp (default): Provides a wide frequency
“Y NR” (luminance noise reduction): above BNR, Y NR, or C NR effects may be hard to range and spatial feeling.
discern. And, these functions may not work with some
Reduces noise contained in the luminance • Slow: Provides smooth and warm sound.
screen sizes.
element of the video signal. * Sampling frequency of audio source. This
“C NR” (chroma noise reduction): Reduces • When playing a disc recorded in SLP recording mode, function only adjusts the output signals from the
noise contained in the color element of the the BNR setting may have little effect. LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks.
• When using the DVE function, noise found in the disc
video signal.
“BNR” (block noise reduction): Reduces
may become more apparent. In this case, it is 4 Press </M/m/, to select the option,
recommended that you use the BNR function with the and press ENTER.
“block noise” or mosaic like patterns in the DVE function. If the condition still does not improve,
picture. set the DVE level to “1” or “Off.”
“DVE” (digital video enhancer): Sharpens the
outlines of the images. Note
“PB Video Equalizer” (Playback video There may be little effect by changing the Audio Filter
equalizer): Adjusts the picture in greater depending on the disc or playback environment.
detail.
Select an item and press ENTER.
• Contrast: changes the contrast.
• Brightness: changes the overall brightness.
• Color: makes the colors deeper or lighter.
• Hue: changes the color balance.

58 59

1-14
 • The DVD’s picture on your TV screen freezes for a few 3 Select the title you want to play, and press
Chasing Playback/ seconds when you fast forward/fast reverse or instant
replay/advance the recording.
ENTER.
Searching for a Title/
4 Select “Play” from the sub-menu, and press
Simultaneous Rec and Play ENTER. Chapter/Track, etc.
Playing a previous recording while Playback starts from the selected title.
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
You can view the beginning of a program while it making another (Simultaneous Rec
DVD VCD CD DATA CD
is being recorded. You can also play a title or and Play) Note
previously recorded program while recording. The DVD’s playback picture on your TV screen freezes
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene or
for a few seconds when you fast forward/fast reverse or
DVD VCD CD DATA CD track. As titles and tracks are assigned individual
instant replay/advance during Simultaneous Rec and
DVD Play. numbers on the disc, select the title or track by
HDD “Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to view entering its number. You can also search for a
1 2 3
a previously recorded program while recording scene using the time code.
4 5 6

7 8 9
programs. Playback continues even if a timer
0
recording starts. Use this function as follows:

Playback
• While recording to the HDD:
TITLE LIST Play another title on the HDD.
TOOLS Play a previously recorded program on a DVD Number 1 2 3

by pressing DVD. buttons, SET 4 5 6

M/m, • While recording to a DVD: 7 8 9

ENTER Play a previously recorded program on the HDD CLEAR 0

by pressing HDD.
• While recording to a DVD-RW (VR mode)*1:
TOOLS
Play another title on the same DVD-RW (VR
mode) disc.*2 M/m,
1
* Simultaneous Rec and Play function does not work
Playing from the beginning of the when you record:
ENTER

program you are recording – on a 1x-speed DVD-RW.

– in the HQ or HSP recording mode.
(Chasing Playback) *2 Picture noise may appear depending upon the

HDD -RWVR
“Chasing Playback” allows you to view the
recorded part of a program while the recording is
being made. You do not need to wait until the
recording finishes.
1 Press TOOLS while recording.
The TOOLS menu appears.
2 Select “Chasing Playback,” and press
ENTER.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
program you are recording.
When you fast forward to the point that you
are recording, Chasing Playback returns to
normal playback.
condition of the recording, or when playing a title
recorded in the HQ or HSP recording mode. 1 Press TOOLS during playback.
The TOOLS menu appears.
You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
Super VCD, CD, or DATA CD while recording on
2 Select a search method, and press ENTER.
“Title Search” (for DVDs)
the HDD.
“Chapter Search” (for HDD/DVDs)
“Track Search” (for CDs/DATA CDs)
Example: Play another title on the HDD while
recording to the HDD.
“Search” (for VIDEO CDs)
“Album Search” (for DATA CDs)
1
While recording, press TITLE LIST to
display the HDD Title List.
“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs): Searches
for a starting point by entering the time code.
2 Select the title you want to play, and press
ENTER. The display for entering the number appears.
Example: Title Search
3 Select “Play” from the sub-menu, and press
ENTER.
Title : -- (21)
Playback starts from the selected title.

Example: Play a DVD while recording to the

Notes HDD. The number in parentheses indicates the total
• For DVD-RWs (VR mode), this function does not 1 While recording, press DVD and insert the number of titles, tracks, etc.
work when recording: DVD into the recorder.
– on a 1x-speed DVD-RW.
– in the HQ or HSP recording mode. 2 Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD Title
List.
60 ,continued 61

3 Press the number buttons to select the
number of the title, chapter, track, time
code, etc., you want.
For example: Time Search
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20
seconds, enter “21020.”
If you make a mistake, press CLEAR to
cancel the number, then select another
number.
4 Press SET.
The recorder starts playback from the selected
number.
Playback order of MP3 audio tracks
Notes
Playing MP3 Audio Tracks Albums containing MP3 audio tracks play in the
following order. • Depending on the software you use to create the DATA
CD, the playback order may differ from the above
A t B t C t D t F t G. Albums that
DATA CD illustration.
do not contain tracks (such as album E) are • Proceeding to the next or another album may take some
You can play MP3 audio tracks on DATA CDs skipped. time.
(CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs). Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4 Tree 5 • The recorder may not be able to play some DATA CDs
created in the Packet Write format.
ROOT • The recorder will play any data with the extension
“.MP3,” even if they are not in MP3 format. Playing
this data may generate a loud noise which could
1 2 3 damage your speaker system.
4 5 6 • The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in
7 8 9 MP3PRO format.
0 • The playback order above may not be applicable if
there are more than a total of 999 albums and tracks in

Note
“Title Search” is not applicable to the HDD.
H PLAY
1 Insert a DATA CD on the disc tray.
2 Press H PLAY.
Playback starts from the first MP3 audio track
on the disc. Note that the playback order may
be different from the edited order. See
Album
“Playback order of MP3 audio tracks.”
Playback
the DATA CD.
• The recorder can recognize up to 499 albums (the
recorder will count just albums, including albums that
do not contain MP3 audio tracks). The recorder will not
play any albums beyond the first 499 albums. Of the
first 499 albums, the recorder will play no more than a
combined total of 999 albums and tracks.
• The recorder can play MP3 audio tracks recorded in the
following sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz.
• ID3 tags cannot be displayed.
• Only alphabet and numbers can be used for album or
track names. Anything else is displayed as an asterisk.
MP3 audio track

About MP3 audio tracks

MP3 is audio compression technology that
satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations.
You can play back DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-
Rs/CD-RWs) recorded in MP3 (MPEG1 Audio
Layer 3) format. However, the discs must be
recorded according to ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2
or Joliet format for the recorder to recognize the
tracks. You can also play discs recorded in Multi
Session.
See the instructions supplied with the CD-R/CD-
RW drives and the recording software (not
supplied) for details on the recording format.
Note on Multi Session discs
If MP3 audio tracks are recorded in the first
session, the recorder will also play MP3 audio
tracks in other sessions. If audio tracks in Music
CD format are recorded in the first session, only
the first session will be played back.
When you insert a DATA CD and press
H PLAY, the numbered tracks are played
sequentially, from 1 through 7. Any sub-
albums/tracks contained within a currently
selected album take priority over the next album in
the same tree. (Example: C contains D so 4 is
played before 5.)
z Hints
• You can view the disc information while playing MP3
audio tracks (page 42).
• If you add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front of the
track names when you store the tracks in a disc, the
tracks will be played in that order.
• Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
playback, it is recommended that you create albums
with no more than two trees.

62 63

1-15

Editing
Before Editing
This recorder offers various edit options for
various disc types. Before you edit, check the disc
type in the front panel display, and select the
option available for your disc (page 8).
Note
You may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc
or a timer recording starts while editing.
Edit options for the HDD and
DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs (Video mode)/
DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs
HDD +RW -RWVideo +R
You can perform simple edits. Since Video mode
titles are actual recordings on the disc, you cannot
undo any edits you make. The edit functions
available for Video mode titles are:
– Setting protection against erasure (page 65).
– Labeling a title (page 65).
– Erasing a title (page 65).
– Erasing multiple titles (page 66).
– Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (HDD
and DVD+RWs only) (page 66).
– Erasing titles to open up disc space (Disc Map)
(DVD-RWs in Video mode and DVD+RWs
only) (page 67).
Notes
• Once the DVD is finalized, you cannot edit or record on
the disc (except for DVD+RWs and DVD-RWs (VR
mode)).
• You cannot create a Playlist (see below).
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s
control information is full, erase unnecessary titles.
64
“Protect Title”: Protects the title. Select “On”
when the Protection display appears. “ ”
appears next to the protected title. To cancel
the protection, select “Off.”
“Title Name”: Allows you to enter or re-enter
a title name (page 43).
“Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s
thumbnail picture that appears in the Title List
(page 38).
“A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the title (see
below).
z Hints
• You can erase multiple titles at one time (page 66), or
erase all of the titles on the disc at once (page 40).
• You can label or re-label DVDs (page 40).
Note
You cannot protect Playlist titles.
Erasing a section of a title
(A-B Erase)
HDD +RW -RWVR
You can select a section (scene) in a title and erase
it. Note that erasing scenes in a title cannot be
undone.
1 After step 2 of “Editing a Title,” select
“A-B Erase” and press ENTER.
The display for setting point A appears.
A-B Erase (Set point A) 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM
Playback point
• When the title is protected, the display asks
for confirmation. To continue, select
“Change,” and when the protection display
appears, select “Off.”
66
The advanced edit functions available for Playlist
Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR mode)
titles are:
– Labeling a title (page 65).
Editing a Title
-RWVR – Erasing a title (page 65).
You can enjoy advanced edit functions. First you
– Erasing multiple titles (page 66).
– Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (page 66).
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
have two options for a DVD-RW (VR mode): – Rearranging the title order (page 70). This section explains the basic edit functions. Note
editing either the original recording (called the – Dividing a title into multiple titles (page 70). that editing is irreversible. To edit a DVD-RW
“original”), or the playback information created – Combining multiple titles into one title (VR mode) without changing the original
from the original (called a “Playlist”). Since each (page 71). recordings, create a Playlist title (page 68).
is different in nature and offers different merits,
read the following and select the one that better z Hint Note
suits your needs. You can display the disc’s Playlist titles in the Title List
(Playlist), or the original titles in the Title List (Original). When editing a DVD+R, DVD-R, or DVD-RW (Video
mode), finish all editing before finalizing the disc. You
To edit original titles To switch the two Title Lists, press TOOLS while a Title
List is displayed, and select “Original” or “Playlist.” cannot edit a finalized disc.
Edits made to the original titles are final. If you
plan to retain an unaltered original recording,
create and edit a Playlist (see below). The edit Notes
Editing
functions available for original titles are: • The Playlist title calls up data from the original titles for
– Labeling a title (page 65). playback. When an original title is used for a Playlist
1 2 3
– Setting protection against erasure (page 65). title, the original title cannot be erased.
4 5 6
– Erasing a title (page 65). • You cannot protect Playlist titles.
-R 7 8 9
– Erasing multiple titles (page 66). • If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s
0
control information is full, erase unnecessary titles.
– Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) (page 66).
TITLE LIST
To create and edit Playlist titles TOOLS
A Playlist is a group of Playlist titles created from
the original title for editing purposes. When you </M/m/,,
create a Playlist, only the control information ENTER
m/M
necessary for playback, such as the playback
order, is stored on the disc. Since the original titles . >
are left unaltered, Playlist titles can be re-edited.
Example: You have recorded the final few CHAPTER
MARK CHAPTER
matches of a soccer tournament on a DVD-RW ERASE
(VR mode). You want to create a digest with the
goal scenes and other highlights, but you also want
to keep the original recording.
1 Press TITLE LIST.
When editing a DVD-RW in VR mode, press
TOOLS and select “Original” or “Playlist”
from the TOOLS menu to switch the Title
Lists, if necessary.
2 Select a title, and press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
In this case, you can compile highlight scenes as a
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.
You can make the following edits to the title.
Playlist title. You can even rearrange the scene “Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select “OK”
order within the Playlist title (“Creating and when asked for confirmation. When the title is
Editing a Playlist” on page 68). protected, the display asks for confirmation.
To erase, select “Change,” and when the
Protection display appears, select “Off.”
,continued 65
2 Select point A by pressing m/M, and 3 Select a title, and press ENTER. 2 Press TOOLS and select “Disc Map,” and
press ENTER. A check mark appears in the check box next to press ENTER.
The display for setting point B appears. the selected title. To clear the check mark, The Disc Map appears. To check the open
press ENTER again. To clear all of check space, select the space by pressing </,.
A-B Erase (Set point B) 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM
marks, select “Reset All.”
Disc Map
Erase Titles
Select the titles to erase. OK
Empty Title
1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 9/15
Cancel HQ: 0H30M HSP: 0H45M SP: 1H00M
2.3GB
LP : 1H30M EP: 2H00M SLP: 3H00M
2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM 9/17
3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM 9/25
4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM 9/25
Reset All
A A 0:12:34
B 0:23:45
5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM 10/15
3
Erase Cancel
Select point B by pressing m/M, and • When the title is protected, the display asks
for confirmation. To continue, select Selected open space
press ENTER.
“Change,” and when the protection display
The display asks for confirmation. To reset
appears, select “Off.” To cancel, select • When b or B appears on either side of the
either point A or B, select “Change A” or
“Close.” screen, you can scroll sideways by pressing
“Change B,” and go to step 2 or 3.
4 4 Repeat step 3 to select all of the titles you </,.
Editing
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The scene is erased, and the display asks want to erase. 3 Select a title by pressing </,, and
whether to erase another scene. To continue, 5 When you finish selecting titles, select press ENTER.
select “Yes,” and repeat from step 2. To finish, “OK,” and press ENTER. The display for selecting titles to be erased
select “No.” appears. To cancel the selection, press
The list of the titles to be erased appears for
confirmation. To change the selection, select ENTER again.
“Change,” and repeat from step 3.
z Hint Disc Map
A chapter mark is inserted after the scene was erased. The 6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters on The titles are erased.
2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM
either side of the mark. Fri 9/17 8:00PM( 1H00M) SP 0.6GB
Notes
Erasing titles to open up disc space
• Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the (Disc Map)
Erase Cancel
point where you erase a section of a title.
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be erased. +RW -RWVideo
Selected title
• For DVD+RWs, the erased section may be slightly
different from the points you selected. When recording on a DVD+RW or DVD-RW
• When the title is protected, the display asks
(Video mode), the recorder searches for the largest
for confirmation. To continue, select
Erasing multiple titles (Erase Titles) open space and records there. Before you start,
“Change,” and when the protection display
check the disc status by using Disc Map, and erase
appears, select “Off.” To cancel, select
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R titles to create a space large enough for the
“Close.”
recording.
A 0:12:34
B – :– –:– –
You can select and erase two or more titles at one
1 Insert a disc and press TITLE LIST.
4 Repeat step 3 when erasing more titles.
time using the TOOLS menu.
5 Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.
1 Press TITLE LIST to turn on the Title List The display asks for confirmation. To change
menu, and press TOOLS. the selection, select “Change.”
The TOOLS menu appears.
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
2 Select “Erase Titles,” and press ENTER. The selected titles are erased, freeing up disc
The display for selecting titles to be erased space.
appears.
,continued 67
1-16
 Creating chapters manually
3 Select the title you want to include in the 8 Select the IN point by pressing m/M,
Creating and Editing a Playlist title, and press ENTER. and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box next to The display for setting the end point (OUT)
HDD -RWVR Playlist the selected title. To clear the check mark, appears, and the title continues to play in the
press ENTER again. To select all of the titles, background.
You can manually insert a chapter mark at any
select “Select All.”
point you like during playback or recording. -RWVR
Capture (Set OUT point) 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM
Create Playlist
Press CHAPTER MARK at the point where you Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit without Select the titles you want to capture. OK

want to divide the title into chapters. changing the actual recordings. A Playlist title can Original
1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 9/15
Cancel

Each time you press the button, “Marking...” contain up to 50 scenes. 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM 9/17 Select All

appears on the screen and the scenes to the left and For details, see “Edit options for DVD-RWs (VR 3 12ch 9:00AM - 9:30AM 9/25
Reset All
4 3ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM 9/25
right of the mark become separate chapters. mode)” (page 64). 5 25ch 8:00PM - 8:30PM 10/15 IN IN 0:10:26
OUT 0:23:45
6 L2 9:00PM - 9:30PM 10/19

Note
9 Select the OUT point by pressing m/M,
Marking...
Once you create a Playlist title from original titles, you
will be unable to erase or edit the original titles. 4 Repeat step 3 to add more titles. and press ENTER.
To go to the next page of titles, press m. To The display asks for confirmation. To reset the
IN or OUT point, select “Change IN” or

Editing
clear all of the check marks, select “Reset
All.” “Change OUT” and repeat step 8 or 9. To view
the selected scene, select “Preview.”
5 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
10Select “OK,” and ENTER.
1 2 3
To erase chapter marks
4 5 6 The list of selected titles appears. To add
You can combine two chapters by erasing the The selected section is captured as a scene,
7 8 9 another title, select “Add Title.”
chapter mark during playback. 0
and the display asks whether you want to
Press ./> to search for a chapter number, and Create Playlist - Selected Titles
continue. To continue, select “More,” and
while displaying the chapter containing the TITLE LIST Select a title to start capturing. Scene List
1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 9/15 Cancel
repeat the steps above. To capture a scene
chapter mark you want to erase, press CHAPTER TOOLS 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM 9/17 from another title, select “New Title.”
ERASE. Add Title

The current chapter combines with the previous </M/m/,, 11When you finish capturing scenes, select
chapter. ENTER “No more” and press ENTER.
m/M
6 Select one of the titles, and press ENTER. The Scene List menu appears with all of the
Notes The sub-menu appears. selected scenes.
H PLAY
• If a message appears and indicates that no more chapter “Capture”: Adds a section of the title to the Total duration of
marks can be added, you may not be able to record or the selected scene
edit. 1 Press TITLE LIST to turn on the Title List
Playlist title as one scene.
“Capture All”: Adds the entire title to the
Total number of scenes

• When dubbing, any chapter marks you enter will be menu, and press TOOLS. Playlist title as one scene. After capturing the Scene List Total 0:33:28 Scenes 2
erased. The TOOLS menu appears. title, select “Scene List” and go to step 12. 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM OK

2 Select “Create Playlist,” and press ENTER. “Check Scenes”: Allows you to check the
1
0:10:26 - 0:23:45
5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM
Quit

The display for selecting titles appears. captured scene. 2

0:25:00 - 0:45:08
Add

7 Select “Capture,” and press ENTER. Preview

The display for setting the start point (IN)

appears. The title starts to play in the
background. 12Select the scene you want to edit, and
press ENTER.
Capture (Set IN point) 2 5ch 8:00PM - 9:00PM The sub-menu appears.
“Move”: Changes the scene order.
“Erase”: Erases the scene. The selection is
canceled.
“Preview”: Displays thumbnail pictures of the
scenes.
IN 0:10:26
OUT - : - - : - - “Change IN”: Allows you to change the IN
point, and repeat from step 8.

68 ,continued 69

“Change OUT”: Allows you to change the
OUT point, and repeat from step 9.
To add more scenes, select “Add” and go to
step 6. To preview all of the captured scenes in
the listed order, select “Preview.”
13When you finish editing the Scene List,
select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The display for entering the title name
appears. To enter a new name, select “Enter”
(see page 43).
14Select “OK” to use the default name, and
press ENTER.
To play the Playlist title
Press TOOLS while the Title List menu is turned
on. Then, select “Playlist” and press ENTER.
When the Title List (Playlist) menu appears, select
4 Select “Move Title,” and press ENTER.
Combining multiple Playlist titles
Move
1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM Wed 9/15
(Combine Titles)
Cancel
Where do you want to move this title?
2 5ch 8:00AM - 9:00AM Fri 9/17
-RWVR
1 Press TITLE LIST to turn on the Title List
(Playlist) menu.
5 Select a new location for the title by If the Title List (Original) menu appears, press
TOOLS and select “Playlist.”
pressing M/m and press ENTER.
The title moves to the new location. 2 Press TOOLS to select “Combine Titles,”
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide Title)
and press ENTER.
The display for selecting titles appears.
-RWVR
3 Select a title, and press ENTER.
A number indicating the order in which you
1 Press TITLE LIST to turn on the Title List selected the title appears. To cancel the
selection, press ENTER again.
Editing
(Playlist) menu.
If the Title List (Original) menu appears, press Combine

a title and press H PLAY. TOOLS and select “Playlist.” Select the titles to combine. OK
1 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 9/15

z Hint
2 Select a title, and press ENTER. 2
3
5ch
2ch
8:00PM - 9:00PM
1:00PM - 2:00PM
9/17
9/28
Cancel

The sub-menu appears. 4 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 10/ 5

When a Playlist title is created, the IN and OUT points Reset All

will become chapter marks, and each scene will become
a chapter.
Note
The picture may pause when the edited scene is played.
Moving a Playlist title (Move Title)
3 Select “Divide Title,” and press ENTER.
The display for setting the dividing point
appears. The title starts to play in the
background. 4 Repeat step 3 to select all of the titles you
want to combine.
Divide 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM To cancel all of the selections, select “Reset
All.”

-RWVR
5 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The list of titles to be combined appears. To
You can change the Playlist title order within the change the selection, select “Change” and go
Title List (Playlist). 0:12:34 to step 3.

1 Press TITLE LIST to turn on the Title List

4 Select the dividing point by pressing
Combine
Combine the titles in the following order.
(Playlist) menu.
If the Title List (Original) menu appears, press m/M, and press ENTER. 1 1 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 9/15
2 2 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 9/28

TOOLS and select “Playlist.” The display asks for confirmation. To change 3 3 2ch 1:00PM - 2:00PM 10/ 5
the dividing point, select “Change.”
2 Select “Number” in the “Sort” column,
5 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
and press ENTER.
The display for entering the title name OK Change Cancel
The titles are sorted in order of title number.
appears. To use the same title name as before,
3 Select a title, and press ENTER. select “No.” 6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
6 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER to enter a The display for selecting a title name from
among the selected titles appears. To enter a
new name.
new name, select “Enter Text,” and follow the
Follow the explanations on page 43. After you
explanations on page 43.
enter a new name, the title is divided in two.
7 Select a name, and press ENTER.
The titles are combined.

70 71

1-17
 z Hints Note that speeds shown in the table are an ◆About “VBR”
• You can dub a Playlist title on a DVD-RW (VR mode) approximate of the maximum dubbing speed. VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is an effective method of
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) as an original title on the HDD. allocating a suitable bit amount per second. Fine
• When dubbed from a DVD to the HDD, the picture size Speed*1 x2.4-speed x2-speed x4-speed
detail pictures or dynamically moving pictures are
and the sound types originally recorded are retained.
Before Dubbing Rec
High- High-
High-
speed
assigned a larger amount, while static pictures are
assigned less, for optimum picture quality.
speed speed
Notes mode
DVD+RW DVD-RW
DVD+R/
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R • Variable bit rate (adopted • Fixed bit rate
• The recorder may not function as described depending DVD-R for this recorder)
on the disc status. Follow the instructions that appear on HQ x2.4 x2 x4 Average distribution rate Average distribution rate
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying a the screen.
recorded title on the internal hard disk drive • When a message appears and indicates that the control HSP x3.6 x3 x6
(HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.” You can information is full, erase unnecessary titles (page 65). SP x4.8 x4 x8
select to dub one title at a time (Title Dubbing – • You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs or a DVD
see “Dubbing a Single Title (Title Dub)” on recorded on other DVD equipment to the HDD. LP x7.2 x6 x12
page 74), or multiple titles all at once (Multiple • Thumbnails that you have set for the originally
EP x9.6 x8 x16
Title Dubbing – see “Dubbing Multiple Titles recorded title (page 38) will not be retained in the
Wasted bits More bits
(Dub Selected Titles)” on page 75). dubbed title. SLP x1 x12 x24*2 are required
Before you start, read the following precautions, *1 Maximum recording speed of this recorder.
which are common to both dubbing methods. About “Dub Mode” *2
When dubbing to DVD+Rs, the dubbing speed is z Hint
x1-speed. When you dub an edited title using the Rec Mode
z Hint With this recorder, the recording mode for Conversion Dubbing method, pauses between scenes are
This section deals with dubbing to and from the internal dubbing is displayed as “Dub Mode.” Two smoothed out.
Notes

Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

HDD. If you want to record from a digital video camera
connected to the DV IN jack, see “DV/Digital8 Dubbing
(DV t HDD/DVD)” on page 77. To record from
equipment connected to the LINE IN jacks, see
“Recording From a VCR or Similar Device” (page 53).
Before you start…
• Select the disc type according to your needs
(page 8). This recorder can record on various
discs.
• Timer recordings do not start during dubbing.
Before you start, check the SCHEDULE list
(page 49) to see if there is a timer recording due
to start during dubbing.
• Chapter marks in the original recording do not
remain in the dubbed title. Chapter marks are
entered according to the “Auto Chapter” setting
in Features Setup (page 91).
• For a title whose aspect ratio (16:9 or 4:3) is
mixed:
– When dubbed from the HDD to DVD-RW
(Video mode) or DVD-R, the picture size is
determined by the setting in “DVD Rec.
Picture Size” (page 51).
– When dubbed from HDD to DVD+RW or
DVD+R, the picture size is always 4:3.
– When dubbed from HDD to DVD-RW (VR
mode), the originally recorded picture size is
retained.
dubbing methods are available: High-speed
Dubbing and Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing. • High-speed Dubbing is not available for the following
Note
titles:
Read the following and select according to the The picture quality will not improve even if a title is
– Titles recorded in HQ+.
required time, disc space, and picture quality. converted to a recording mode of better picture quality.
– Titles that contain both stereo or monaural audio
tracks (except DVD-RWs (VR mode)).
Dubbing at high-speed (High-speed Dubbing) – Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3 and 16:9 Dubbing restriction
HDD , +RW / -RWVR / -RWVideo / +R / etc.) (except DVD-RWs (VR mode)). Some DVD VIDEOs or TV programs contain
– Titles recorded in SLP (DVD+RW/DVD+R only).
-R copy protection signals such as “Copy-Never” or
• When dubbed to a DVD-RW (Video mode)/
Allows you to dub what you have stored in the “Copy-Once.” You cannot record such contents on
DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-R, erased pictures may
HDD to a high-speed DVD (4x-speed this recorder (only a gray, blank screen will be
remain on the disc.
DVD+RWs/2x-speed DVD-RWs/8x-speed recorded). Be especially careful when dubbing on
DVD+Rs/8x-speed DVD-Rs, or slower versions a non-rewritable DVD such as a DVD-R.
Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing
of each disc type), without changing the recording
HDD n +RW / -RWVR / -RWVideo / +R / Copy Original Dubbing
,
mode. Dubbing speed is increased when the protection recording
-R
recording mode of the original title is of a longer signals
Allows you to dub from the HDD to a DVD or vice
recording mode (such as SLP).
Select “Fast” when selecting the “Dub Mode” in versa, in a dubbing mode that differs from the Copy-Free
HDD +RW -RWVR
“Dubbing a Single Title (Title Dub)” (page 74) or original recordings. For example, when you dub
-RWVideo +R
“Dubbing Multiple Titles (Dub Selected Titles)” an HQ title (data size is large) in SP mode, you can
reduce the data size, saving more titles using less -R
(page 75). The minimum required time is as
follows (approximate). space.
Select a mode different from the original recording +RW -RWVR HDD
Example: When a 120 minute-title is dubbed to a
high-speed DVD-R in LP mode, dubbing becomes in “Dub Mode” in the steps of “Dubbing a Single -RWVideo +R
Title (Title Dub)” (page 74) or “Dubbing Multiple
12 times faster, and takes a minimum of 10 -R
Titles (Dub Selected Titles)” (page 75).
minutes. (120 minutes y 12 = 10 minutes).
When an HQ or HQ+ title is converted to another Copy-Once recorded in gray.
mode, the recorder automatically assigns an HDD
appropriate bit rate, thus retaining the original -RWVR *
picture quality as much as possible (“Dynamic
Copy-Never recorded in gray.
VBR Dubbing”).
* Version 1.1 CPRM-compatible DVD-RW (VR mode)
only (page 8).

72 73

E Dubbing mode and the space that 7 Repeat step 6 to select all of the titles you
Dubbing a Single Title (Title remains after dubbing (approximate). Dubbing Multiple Titles want to dub.

Dub) 6 Select “Dub Mode.” (Dub Selected Titles)

To make adjustments for each of the titles,
select “Settings” (see “Adjusting the settings
7 Select a dubbing mode by pressing M/m. for each title” below). To cancel all of the
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R selections, select “Reset,” and go to step 6.
t Fast* t HQ t HSP t SP
SLP T EP T LP T 8 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.

DVD * Appears when High-speed Dubbing is available DVD Adjusting the settings for each title
HDD for the title (page 72). HDD

8
1 2 3 1 2 3

Select “Start,” and press ENTER. You can make detailed settings for each of the
4 5 6 4 5 6

7 8 9 7 8 9
selected titles during Multiple Title Dubbing.
0 0
1 In step 7 of “Dubbing Multiple Titles (Dub
TITLE LIST
To automatically adjust the dubbing mode TITLE LIST Selected Titles)” (page 75), select
(Auto Dub Mode) “Settings” and press ENTER.
TOOLS TOOLS
The recorder adjusts the dubbing mode in order to The following display for making the
M/m, ENTER fit a title on the disc. If there is insufficient disc M/m, ENTER adjustments appears. To re-select titles, select
space in the selected dubbing mode, the following “Change,” and go to step 6 of “Dubbing
display appears after step 8. Multiple Titles (Dub Selected Titles)” above.
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)

To have the recorder adjust the dubbing mode

Title Dub
so all of the selected titles fit in, select “Auto
There is not enough memory for the dubbing, mode.”
1 Insert the DVD that you are going to dub to Select "Auto Dub Mode" or adjust the mode. 1 Insert the DVD that you are going to dub to
or from. or from.
Auto Dub Mode Reset Cancel
2 Select the source by pressing HDD or DVD. 2 Select the source by pressing HDD or DVD.
Dub Selected Titles 2.1GB
Adjust the settings for the dubbing here.
4.6GB

Start

3 Press TITLE LIST to turn on the Title List Select “Auto Dub Mode” and press ENTER to
start dubbing. To manually select another dubbing
3 Press TITLE LIST to turn on the Title List 1 World Tour – Asia 1
Rec Mode: SP
6/11
Dub Mode: Fast 0.3GB Cancel

menu. menu. 2 World Tour – Asia 2 6/18

mode, select “Reset,” and go to step 7. Rec Mode: SP Dub Mode: Fast 0.3GB Auto mode

4 Select a title and press ENTER. 4 Press TOOLS. 3 World Tour – Asia 3
Rec Mode: SP
6/25
Dub Mode: Fast 0.3GB
Change

The sub-menu appears. To stop dubbing The TOOLS menu appears. 4 World Cup Final 6/20
Rec Mode: SP Dub Mode: Fast 1.2GB
Press TOOLS to turn on the TOOLS menu. Or,
5 Select “Dubbing” and press ENTER. while the Title List menu is displayed, press 5 Select “Dub Selected Titles,” and press
The display for selecting the dubbing mode ENTER to display the sub-menu. Select “Stop ENTER. A Total size of the selected titles.
appears. The display for selecting titles appears.
Dubbing,” and press ENTER. When asked for B Direction of dubbing.
confirmation, select “Yes,” and press ENTER. Dub Selected Titles 0.0GB 4.6GB
Select title(s) in the order you want to dub them. Start
C Available space on the disc to be
Title Dub 2.0GB 2.6GB z Hints 1 World Tour – Asia 1 6/11 Cancel dubbed (approximate).
2 World Tour – Asia 2 6/18
• If disc space is still insufficient for the selected dubbing
This title will be dubbed. Set the dub mode.
mode, erase unnecessary parts of the title, or free up
3 World Cup Final 6/20 Settings D Information about the title to be dubbed
4 World Tour – Asia 3 6/25
disc space by erasing titles on the disc (page 65).
Reset
(title name, original recording mode,
1 World Cup Final Rec Mode : SP
• You can turn off the recorder without affecting the dubbing mode, and data size after
Dub Mode
dubbing. Press "/1 during dubbing. dubbing).
SP 2.0GB Start Cancel
• You can start Title Dubbing by selecting “DUBBING”
from the System Menu. 6 Select titles in the order you want to dub, E Order of dubbing.

A Size of the title (approximate). and press ENTER.

The titles are numbered in the selected order.
B Direction of dubbing. To cancel the selection, press ENTER again.
C Available space on the disc to be
dubbed (approximate).
D Information about the title to be
dubbed.

74 ,continued 75

1-18
 2 Select the title which you want to adjust,
and press ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
“Dub Mode”: Selects the dubbing mode for
each title (see page 72).
“Change Order”: Moves the title to change the
dubbing order. Press M/m to select a new
location, and press ENTER.
“Cancel”: Cancels the title selection. The title
is excluded from dubbing.
3 Select an option, and press ENTER.
4 When you finish making adjustments,
select “Start,” and press ENTER.
To automatically adjust the dubbing mode
(Auto Dub Mode)
The recorder adjusts the dubbing mode so all of
the titles fit in. The same dubbing mode is set for
all of the titles. If disc space is insufficient for the
selected dubbing mode, the following display
appears after step 8 of “Dubbing Multiple Titles
(Dub Selected Titles)” (page 75).
Dub Selected Titles
There is not enough memory. Select
"Auto Dub Mode" or change the selection.
Auto Dub Mode Change Cancel
Select “Auto Dub Mode” and press ENTER. If
you have selected only one title, select “OK.”
To stop dubbing
Press TOOLS to turn on the TOOLS menu. Select
“Stop Dubbing” and press ENTER. When asked
for confirmation, select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
z Hints
• You can turn off the recorder without affecting the
dubbing. Press "/1 during dubbing.
• You can start Multiple Title Dubbing by selecting
“DUBBING” from the System Menu.
76
1 Press HDD or DVD.
If you select DVD, press Z OPEN/CLOSE
and place a DVD on the disc tray. Press Z
again to close the disc tray.
With the recording side facing down
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the front
panel display.
If you use an unused DVD, formatting starts
automatically.
2 Insert the source DV/Digital8 format tape
into your digital video camera.
For the recorder to record or edit, your digital
video camera must be set to video playback
mode.
3 Press INPUT SELECT on the remote
repeatedly to select “DV.”
The front panel display changes as follows:
Channel*
number
L1 L2 L3
* Does not appear when “Set Top Box Control” is
set to “On.”
4 Press REC MODE on the remote repeatedly
to select the recording mode.
The recording mode changes as follows:
HQ HSP SP LP EP
For details about the recording mode, see
page 45.
5 Press TOOLS on the remote to select “DV/
D8 Audio Input,” and press ENTER. Then,
select the setting for the audio input.
“Stereo1” (default): Records original sound
only. Normally select this when dubbing a DV
format tape.
“Mix”: Records both stereo 1 and 2.
“Stereo2”: Records additional audio only.
Select “Mix” or “Stereo2” only if you have
added a second audio channel when recording
with your digital video camera.
You are ready to start dubbing. Select one of
the dubbing methods on the following pages.
78
– the images on the tape contain copy protection
signals, which limit recording.
DV/Digital8 Dubbing (DV t HDD/DVD) • If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment,
finalize the disc (page 40).
Before DV/Digital8 Dubbing Hookups
DVD recorder
This section explains dubbing with a digital video
camera via the DV IN jack on the front panel. If
you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks, see
“Recording From a VCR or Similar Device” on
page 53. To DV IN
To record from the DV IN jack
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the
i.LINK standard. You can connect any other
equipment that has an i.LINK (DV) jack, and i.LINK cable
record digital signals. (not supplied)
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for
recording using the DV IN jack,” and then move
on to the section on dubbing. For more
information about i.LINK, see “About i.LINK”
(page 103). DV output
DV/Digital8 Dubbing (DV t HDD/DVD)
z Hint
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the Digital video camera
initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD-RW
(VR mode) or HDD.
Preparing for recording using the DV
: Signal flow
IN jack
You can connect a digital video camera to the DV
IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a Z OPEN/
CLOSE
DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is DVD
HDD
straightforward because the recorder will fast
1 2 3
forward and rewind the tape for you – you do not 4 5 6
need to operate your digital video camera. Do the 7 8 9
following to start using the “DV Edit” functions of 0
this recorder.
See the instruction manual supplied with the
digital video camera as well before connecting. TOOLS
M/m, ENTER
Notes
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not output
signals.
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:
– your digital video camera does not work with this
recorder. Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack
and follow the instructions of “Recording From a REC MODE
VCR or Similar Device” (page 53).
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do not INPUT
connect a MICRO MV format digital video camera SELECT
even if it has an i.LINK jack.
,continued 77
z Hints To stop during recording
• You can turn off the recorder during dubbing. The
recorder completes dubbing even after being turned Recording an Entire DV/ Open the remote’s cover and press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
off.
• You can adjust the settings for the recording picture
Digital8 Format Tape (One recorder to stop recording.
before recording. See “Adjusting the recording picture
quality and size” (page 51).
Touch Dubbing) z Hints
• If you set “Finalize Disc” to “Auto” in Features Setup
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R (page 93), the recorded disc (except DVD-RW(VR
Notes mode)) will automatically be finalized after recording
• You cannot connect more than one piece of digital You can record the entire contents of a DV/ is finished.
video equipment to the recorder. Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single press • You can play back a previously recorded title on the
• You cannot control the recorder using another device of the ONE TOUCH DUBBING button. The HDD while One Touch Dubbing is in progress.
or another recorder of the same model. recorder controls the digital video camera for the
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of the Notes
whole process, and completes the recording.
cassette memory onto the disc.
• When a blank space between the recordings on the tape
• If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape with a
continues for more than five minutes, One Touch
sound track that is recorded in multiple sampling ◆How chapters are created
Dubbing ends automatically.
frequencies (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or The dubbed contents on the disc become one title, • The recorder records a blank for five minutes before it
an unnatural sound will be output when playing back
the sampling frequency switch point on the disc.
and the title is divided into chapters. For the HDD
and a DVD-RW (VR mode), every shooting on the
stops dubbing. To stop the blank recording, press x
REC STOP.
• In order to use this recorder’s Auto Scene Chaptering
tape becomes a chapter on the disc (Auto Scene
function (pages 79, 80), be sure to correctly set the
clock on your digital video camera before shooting. Chaptering function). For other discs, the recorder
• The recorded picture may be momentarily affected if divides the title in either 6 or 15-minute intervals,
the picture size of the source image changes, or if there according to the setting in “Auto Chapter” in
is nothing recorded on the tape. Features Setup.
DV/Digital8 Dubbing (DV t HDD/DVD)
DV x REC STOP
ONE TOUCH
DUBBING
SLP
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for recording
using the DV IN jack” (page 77), and press
ONE TOUCH DUBBING on the remote.
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts
recording the tape contents.
When the recording is finished, the recorder
rewinds the tape in the digital video camera.
79
1-19

Program Edit
HDD +RW -RWVR -RWVideo +R -R
You can select scenes from a DV/Digital8 format
tape, and then automatically record selected
scenes to a disc of your choice.
To use this function, you will do the following:
Connect your digital video camera and
prepare for recording
m m/M
Select and edit the scenes you want to dub
Using the recorder’s remote control, fast forward
or rewind the tape to select the scenes. At this
point, the selected scenes are not copied to the
disc. The recorder only remembers the IN and
OUT points of the scenes that you selected for
dubbing. You can also reset, erase, or change the
order of the scenes.
4 Select the IN point by pressing m/M, 7 When you finish adding scenes, select the
and press ENTER. scene you want to edit, and press ENTER.
The display for setting the OUT point (end of The sub-menu appears.
the scene) appears. The scene starts to play in “Move”: Changes the scene order. Follow the
1 2 3
the background from the IN point. explanations on the screen to change the order
by pressing M/m and ENTER.
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 Select scene (Set OUT point)
“Erase”: Erases the scene. When asked for
confirmation, select “OK.”
“Preview”: Plays the selected scene.
SYSTEM “Change IN”: Changes the start of the scene.
MENU Repeat from step 4.
</M/m/,, Controlling...
“Change OUT”: Changes the end of the scene.
ENTER IN 0:00:30
OUT 0:00:52 Repeat from step 5.
5 Select the OUT point by pressing m/M,
8 When you finish editing the Scene List,
select “OK,” and press ENTER.
and press ENTER. The display for entering the title name
x REC The display asks if you want to add the
STOP appears. To enter a new name, select “Enter,”
selected scene to the Scene List menu. To and follow the explanations on page 43.
1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for
preview the scene, select “Preview.” To reset
either the IN or OUT point, select “Change Title Name
recording using the DV IN jack” (page 77), IN” or “Change OUT,” and repeat from step
Enter the title name.
and press SYSTEM MENU. 4.
2 Select “DV/D8 EDIT,” and press ENTER. DV10/11/02 1:30PM - 11/12/02 4:46PM

DV/Digital8 Dubbing (DV t HDD/DVD)

Scenes Selection
m The display asks if you want to start selecting
Do you want to capture the scene
scenes. OK Enter
Dub the selected scenes to a disc between IN 0:00:30 and OUT 0:00:52?

Scenes Selection OK Cancel

After you have selected the scenes, the recorder
will fast forward and rewind the tape Do you want to select a scene?
Preview Change IN Change OUT 9 Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
automatically and record the scenes to a disc of The default title name is fixed, and the display
asks if you want to start recording. To change
your choice. Start Cancel
6 Select “OK,” and press ENTER. the disc media, select “Media” and press M/m.
A new Scene List menu appears with the To change the dubbing mode, select “Dub
◆How chapters are created • If you have previously saved a program, the selected scene. Mode” and press M/m.
The dubbed contents on the disc become one title, display asks if you want to edit an existing
and the title is divided into chapters. For a DVD- program or to create a new program. To DV / D8 Dubbing 2.6GB
RW (VR mode) and the HDD, every shooting on resume editing the existing program, select
Total 0:00:22 Scenes 1 Change the dubbing mode if necessary.
the tape and each selected scene becomes a “Saved Data,” and go to step 6. SCENE LIST
Select "Start" to start dubbing.
chapter on the disc (Auto Scene Chaptering
3
OK
0:00:30-0:00:52

function). For other discs, the recorder divides the

Select “Start,” and press ENTER. 1
Duration 0:00:22
Quit
Media Dub Mode
Start
DVD SP 0.8GB
title in either 6 or 15-minute intervals, according The display for setting the IN point (start of Cancel
Add
to the setting in “Auto Chapter” in Features Setup. the scene) appears.
The scene starts to play in the background. Data capacity required for the dubbing.

Select scene (Set IN point)

A Thumbnail picture
B Time information
C Total duration of the program
D Total number of scenes
Controlling...
IN 0:00:30
OUT - : - - : - -

80 ,continued 81

10Select “Start,” and press ENTER. 2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts recording the tape contents The Setup Display appears.
as programmed. Settings and Adjustments
• If the recording does not fit due to the SETUP
dubbing mode you selected, the display asks
if you want to continue. To change the
Using the Setup Displays Settings Tuner Preset
Video Area Setup

dubbing mode, select “Reset” and repeat Audio Clock

By using the Setup Displays, you can make Features Set Top Box Control
from step 9. To have the recorder adjust the Options Language
various adjustments to items such as picture and
dubbing mode, select “Auto Dub Mode.”
sound, as well as select a language for the Easy Setup
• If there is not enough disc space even after
subtitles.
changing the dubbing mode, the display
The Setup Displays are used in the following way.
asks if you want to record halfway. To
continue, select “OK.”
3 Select “Settings,” “Video,” “Audio,”
Note “Features,” “Options,” or “Easy Setup,”
Playback settings stored in the disc take priority over the and press ENTER.
To stop during recording Setup Display settings, and not all of the functions The selected Setup Display appears.
Open the remote’s cover and press x REC STOP. described may work. Example: “Video” setup
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording. SETUP

Settings TV Type : 4 : 3 Letter Box

Notes 1 2 3 Video
Audio
Pause Mode :
Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level :
Auto
Off
4 5 6
• The disc may not be recorded as programmed if the 7 8 9
Features Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level : Off
Options Progressive Mode : Auto
tape’s time code is not sequential or there are blanks 0 Screen Saver : On
between the recordings on the tape. In this case, see Easy Setup Line1 Input : Video
Line3 Input : Video
“Recording From a VCR or Similar Device” (page 53).
• The start and end points of a program may be different
SYSTEM
from what you have set if the source DV/Digital8
4
Settings and Adjustments

MENU Select the item you want to set up, and

format tape is in any of the following conditions:
</M/m/,, press ENTER.
– Recording mode was changed during the recording. ENTER
– There is a blank space in the recorded portion of the Available options for the item appear.
tape. Example: “TV Type”
• If you set the beginning of the tape as the IN point and
the end point as the OUT point, the IN and OUT points
SETUP
may change slightly during dubbing.
• You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one second. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is Settings TV Type : 16 : 49: 3 Letter Box

in stop mode. Video

Audio
Pause Mode : 4 : 3Auto
Letter Box
Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level4: : 3Off Pan Scan
The System Menu appears. Features Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level : Off
Options Progressive Mode : Auto
Screen Saver : On
Easy Setup Line1 Input : Video
Line3 Input : Video
SYSTEM MENU

TITLE LIST

TV GUIDE

SCHEDULE

DV/D8 EDIT

DUBBING

SETUP

82 ,continued 83

1-20
 Some items display a dialog box that provides 3 Select “Antenna/Cable,” and press ENTER. 4 Select the channel you want to preset using
further detailed settings.
Example: The following dialog box appears
Antenna Reception and Settings - Tuner Preset Ch1
the number buttons and the SET button.
To disable a channel, select the channel using
when “Parental Control” in Features Setup is Language Settings Antenna / Cable :
Auto Preset
Cable
Antenna
Cable
CH +/–.
selected.
(Settings) Manual Set :
AFT :
Add
On Channel to be preset/disabled
Features - Parental Control
Settings - Tuner Preset Ch34
Enter your password. The Settings Setup helps you to make tuner, clock,
“Cable”: Presets cable TV channels. Antenna / Cable : Cable
and language settings for the recorder. Auto Preset
OK “Antenna”: Presets VHF and UHF channels. Manual Set : Add
Add
Cancel
Select “Settings” in the Setup Display. To use the 4 Select an option, and press ENTER.
AFT : On
Erase

display, see “Using the Setup Displays” (page 83). 5 Select “Auto Preset,” and press ENTER.
All receivable channels are preset in 5 Select “Manual Set,” and press ENTER.
In this case, see “Parental Control” in SETUP
numerical sequence. “Add”: Presets the channel.
“Recording and Parental Control Settings Settings Tuner Preset
“Erase”: Disables the channel.
(Features)” (page 92). Settings - Tuner Preset - Auto Preset
Video
Audio
Area Setup
Clock 6 Select “Add” to preset the channel, and press
5 Select an option, and press ENTER. Features
Options
Set Top Box Control
Language
Searching for receivable channels.
Please Wait.
Ch 23 ENTER.
The currently selected option is displayed
Easy Setup
7 Select “AFT” and press ENTER.
next to the setup item.
Example: when “16:9” is set. Settings - Tuner Preset Ch34

Antenna / Cable : Cable

Manual Set Auto Preset

SETUP Tuner Preset Presets or disables channels manually. Manual Set :

AFT :
Add
On
On

Settings TV Type : 16 : 9 If some channels could not be set using the Auto Off

Video Pause Mode : Auto

Notes Preset or Easy Setup function, you can set them
Audio Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level : Off
manually.

Settings and Adjustments

Features Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level : Off
Options Progressive Mode : Auto
• You cannot presets channels for the connected cable “On”: Turns on the Auto Fine Tuning
Screen Saver : On box or satellite receiver. function. Normally, select this.
Easy Setup Line1 Input :
Line3 Input :
Video
Video
• You cannot select “Tuner Preset” when you set “Set 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup “Off”: Allows you to adjust the picture
Top Box Control” to “On.” Displays” (page 83) to select “Settings” in the manually.
Setup Display.
Auto Preset 8 Select “On” to turn on AFT, and press
Automatically presets the receivable channels. 2 Select “Tuner Preset,” and press ENTER. ENTER.
To turn off the display The recorder can receive VHF channels 2 to 13, To preset or disable another channel, repeat
Settings - Tuner Preset Ch1
Press SYSTEM MENU repeatedly. UHF channels 14 to 69, and unscrambled CATV from step 3.
channels 1 to 125. First, we recommend that you Antenna / Cable :
Auto Preset
Cable
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not
preset the receivable channels in your area using Manual Set : Add work effectively, select “Off” in step 7 and
AFT : On
automatic presetting methods. press ENTER. When the fine tuning bar
appears, press </, to obtain a clearer
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup
picture, and press ENTER.
Displays” (page 83) to select “Settings” in the 3 Select “Antenna/Cable,” and press ENTER.
Setup Display. Fine Tuning Ch34
Settings - Tuner Preset Ch1
2 Select “Tuner Preset,” and press ENTER. Antenna / Cable : Cable
Antenna
Auto Preset Cable
Manual Set : Add
Settings - Tuner Preset Ch1

Antenna / Cable : Cable

AFT : On 9 To preset or disable another channel, repeat
Auto Preset steps 4 to 8.
Manual Set : Add
AFT : On “Cable”: Presets cable TV channels.
“Antenna”: Presets VHF and UHF channels. Area Setup
Sets up your area and zip code number. You need
to set this correctly to use the TV Guide On Screen
system.

84 ,continued 85

1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup

Displays” (page 83) to select “Settings” in the
Setup Display.
2 Select “Area Setup,” and press ENTER.
Settings - Area Setup
USA / Canada :
Zip Code
3 Select “USA/Canada,” and press ENTER.
4 Select your country, and press ENTER.
5 Select “Zip Code,” and press ENTER.
Area Setup - Zip code
Enter your zip code.
- - - -
6 Enter your zip code number using the </M/
m/, buttons, and press ENTER.
Note Lock to Select this only when your cable
If the clock data is received automatically, “Clock” two digits box or satellite receiver only Video Settings (Video)
cannot be selected from “Settings” in the Setup Display. accepts a two digit channel
number.
Video settings will adjust items related to the
Set Top Box Control ◆Mode for SET button image, such as size and color.
Select “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” if your cable box or Choose the settings according to the type of TV,
USA
You can control your cable box/satellite receiver tuner, or decoder connected to the DVD recorder.
-----
satellite receiver requires pressing an ENTER
using the supplied set top box controller. See
button or a SET button etc., after entering the
“Step 7: Easy Setup” for details.
channel number. If “Mode 1” does not work, try 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
Set Top Box Control “Mode 2.” If your cable box or satellite receiver in stop mode.
does not respond to either setting, contact the
On Turns on the cable box/satellite
manufacturer of the cable box or satellite receiver. 2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.
receiver control function. See
Off No code is sent when SET is
3 Select “Video,” and press ENTER.
“Using the cable box/satellite The Video Setup appears with the following
receiver control function” pressed. Normally select this.
options. The default settings are underlined.
(page 12).
Mode 1 Sends the channel number you
- OK
Off Turns off the cable box/satellite entered.
Cancel SETUP
receiver control function. Select
this if you do not want to use the Mode 2 Sends the channel number you Settings TV Type : 4 : 3 Letter Box
Video Pause Mode : Auto
entered.
supplied set top box controller. Audio
Features
Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level :
Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level :
Off
Off
Options Progressive Mode : Auto

7 Select “OK,” and press ENTER. When “Set Top Box Control” is set to “On,” you
Language Easy Setup
Screen Saver :
Line1 Input :
On
Video
Line3 Input : Video
can make the following settings. Note that when
OSD (On-Screen Display)
Clock you change “Set Top Box Control” to “On” or
Settings and Adjustments

Manual Clock Set
Sets the clock manually.
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Using the Setup
Displays” (page 83) to select “Settings” in the
Setup Display.
2 Select “Clock,” and press ENTER.
Settings - Clock - Present Time
Set the time and date manually.
Thu 1 / 1 / 2004
3 Press M/m to set the month, and press ,.
Set the day, year, hour, and minutes in
sequence. Press </, to select the item to be
set, then press M/m to set the numbers. The
day of the week is set automatically.
4 Press ENTER to start the clock.
z Hint
To change the numbers in step 3, press < to return to the
item to be changed, and select the numbers by pressing
M/m.
“Off,” all of the timer recording settings will be Switches the display language on the screen.
canceled.
DVD Menu (DVD VIDEO only) TV Type
◆Brand Code Switches the language for the DVD menu. Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3
See “Cable Box/Satellite Receiver Brand Code” standard or wide).
(page 112) for the brand code for your cable box Audio (DVD VIDEO only)
or satellite receiver, and enter the code using the Switches the language of the sound track. 16:9 Select this when connecting to a
number buttons and ENTER. When you select “Original,” the language given wide-screen TV or TV with a
◆Connection wide mode function.
priority in the disc is selected.
Selects the connection you used for your cable box
or satellite receiver. When the cable box or Subtitle (DVD VIDEO only) 4:3 Letter Select this when connecting to a
satellite receiver is connected to the recorder’s Box 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide
Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on
picture with bands on the upper
LINE IN jacks, select the connection from the disc. and lower portions of the screen.
12 : 00 AM “Line1,” “Line2,” or “Line3.” When the cable box When you select “Audio Follow,” the subtitle
or satellite receiver is connected to the recorder’s language changes according to the language you 4:3 Pan Select this when connecting to a
VHF/UHF IN jack, select the output channel, selected for the sound track. Scan 4:3 screen TV. Automatically
“Ch2,” “Ch3,” or “Ch4.” displays a wide picture on the
z Hint entire screen and cuts off the
◆Ch. digit lock
Allows you to select whether to fix the digits for
If you select “Others” in “DVD Menu,” “Subtitle,” or portions that do not fit.
your cable box or satellite receiver.
“Audio,” select and enter a language code from
“Language Code List” (page 111) using the number
buttons.
Off Select this when your cable box or
satellite receiver only accepts a
Note
three or more digit channel
number. Normally select this. If you select a language in “DVD Menu,” “Subtitle,” or
“Audio” that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of
the recorded languages will be automatically selected.

86 ,continued 87

1-21
 16:9 Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level Screen Saver
Selects the black level (setup level) for the NTSC
video signals input from the COMPONENT
The screen saver image appears when you do not
use the recorder for more than 10 minutes while an
Audio Settings (Audio)
VIDEO IN jacks (page 13). This setting is on-screen display, such as the System Menu, is
available when “Line1 Input” is set to displayed on your TV screen. The screen saver The Audio Setup allows you to adjust the sound
4:3 Letter Box “Component” (page 89). image helps prevent your display device from according to the playback and connection
becoming damaged (ghosting). conditions.
On Raises the standard black level.
Select this when the picture
appears too bright.
On Turns on the screen saver 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
function. in stop mode.
4:3 Pan Scan
Off Sets the black level of the input
signals to the standard level.
Off Turns off the function. 2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.
Normally, select this. Line1 Input 3 Select “Audio,” and press ENTER.
Selects a method of inputting video signals for the The Audio Setup appears with the following
Progressive Mode LINE IN 1 jack on the rear panel of the recorder. options. The default settings are underlined.
Note DVD software can be divided into two types: film
Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be selected based software and video based software. Video Video Inputs video signals. SETUP
automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan” or vice versa. based software is derived from TV, such as
Settings Auto Stereo : On
dramas and sit-coms, and displays images at 30 S Video Inputs S video signals. Video Tuner Audio : Main
Pause Mode (DVDs only) frames/60 fields per second. Film based software Audio Audio ATT : Off
Features Audio DRC : Standard
Selects the picture quality in pause mode. is derived from film and displays images at 24 Component Inputs component-video signals. Options Downmix : Dolby Surround

frames per second. Some DVD software contains Easy Setup

Digital Out :
Dolby Digital :
On
D-PCM
Auto The picture, including subjects both Video and Film. Line3 Input DTS : Off

that move dynamically, is output In order for these images to appear natural on your Selects the method of inputting video signals for
with no jitter. Normally select this screen when output in PROGRESSIVE mode, the the LINE IN 3 jack on the rear panel of the
position.
progressive video signal needs to be converted to recorder. The pictures will not be clear if this

Settings and Adjustments

Frame The picture, including subjects match the type of DVD software that you are setting does not match the type of video input Auto Stereo
that do not move dynamically, is watching. signal. This function is effective only when “Tuner
output in high resolution. You can fine-tune the progressive 480p video Audio” is set to “Main.”
signals that are output when you press Video Inputs video signals.
Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level PROGRESSIVE (“PROGRESSIVE” lights up). On Receives stereo programs.
Selects the black level (setup level) for the video Note that you must connect to a progressive S Video Inputs S-video signals. Normally select this.
signals output from the COMPONENT VIDEO format TV using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
OUT jacks (page 17). jacks (page 17). Off Select this to reduce noise.
This setting is not effective when the The sound changes to
Auto Automatically detects the monaural.
PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up on the front
panel and the recorder outputs progressive signals. software type (Film-based or
Video-based) and selects the Tuner Audio
appropriate conversion mode. Selects the sound to be recorded.
On Raises the standard black level. Normally select this position.
Select this when the picture
appears too dark. Video Fixes the conversion mode to the Main Records only the main
mode for Video-based software. sound.
Off Sets the black level of the output
signal to the standard level. SAP Records only the SAP
Normally, select this. (Second Audio Program)
sound.

Note
If no SAP sound is received, the main sound is recorded
regardless of the setting.

88 ,continued 89

Audio ATT (attenuation) If you connect a component that does not accept
If the playback sound is distorted, set this item to
“On.” The recorder reduces the audio output level.
Dolby
Surround
Normally select this
position.
the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no
sound) will come out from the speakers, and may
Recording and Parental
This function affects the output of the following Multi-channel audio signals
are output to two channels
affect your ears or cause speaker damage. Control Settings (Features)
jacks:
for enjoying surround • Dolby Digital (HDD/DVDs only)
– LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks The Features Setup allows you to adjust recording
sounds.
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal. and parental control settings.
On Select this when the Normal Multi-channel audio signals
playback sound from the are downmixed to two D-PCM Select this when the recorder
speakers is distorted. channels for use with your is connected to an audio 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
stereo. component lacking a built-in in stop mode.
Off Normally select this Dolby Digital decoder. You
position.
Digital Out
can select whether the 2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.
signals conform to Dolby
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVDs
Selects if audio signals are output via the Surround (Pro Logic) or not 3 Select “Features,” and press ENTER.
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks. by making adjustments to The Features Setup appears with the
only) the “Downmix” item in following options. The default settings are
Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned On Normally select this Audio Setup (page 90). underlined.
down when playing a DVD that conforms to position. When you select
“Audio DRC.” This affects the output from the “On,” see “To set the digital Dolby Select this when the recorder
following jacks: output signal” for further Digital is connected to an audio SETUP

– LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks settings. component with a built-in Settings Auto Chapter : 6 Min

– DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack Dolby Digital decoder. Video Parental Control
Audio One Touch Dubbing

only when “Dolby Digital” is set to “D-PCM.” Off The influence of the digital Features HQ Setting : HQ

circuit upon the analog • DTS (DVD VIDEO only) Options Auto Title Erase : Off
Rec Mode Adjust : Off
circuit is minimal. Selects whether or not to output DTS signals. Easy Setup
Standard Normally select this
position. ◆To set the digital output signal On Select this when the recorder
Settings and Adjustments

The following setup items switch the method of is connected to an audio

TV Mode Makes low sounds clear
even if you turn the volume outputting audio signals when you connect a component with a built-in
down. component such as an amplifier (receiver) with a DTS decoder. Auto Chapter
digital input jack. Automatically divides a recording (a title) into
Wide Gives you the feeling of For connection details, see “Connecting the Audio Off Select this when the recorder
chapters by inserting chapter markings at a
Range being at a live performance. Cords” (page 19). is connected to an audio
component without a built-in
specified interval. The markings are inserted while
Select “Dolby Digital” and “DTS” after setting the recording is being made.
DTS decoder.
Downmix (DVDs only) “Digital Out” to “On.”
Switches the method for mixing down to two Off No chapter mark is inserted.
channels when you play a DVD which has rear
SETUP
sound elements (channels) or is recorded in Dolby 6Min Inserts chapter marks at
Settings Auto Stereo : On
Digital format. For details on the rear signal Video Tuner Audio : Main
approximately 6-minute
components, see “Checking the Play Information Audio Audio ATT : Off intervals.
Features Audio DRC : Standard
and Playing Time” (page 41). This function Options Downmix : Dolby Surround
15Min Inserts chapter marks at
affects the output of the following jacks: Digital Out : On
Easy Setup Dolby Digital : D-PCM approximately 15-minute
– LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R) 1/2 jacks DTS : Off
intervals.
– DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack
when “Dolby Digital” is set to “D-PCM.”
Notes
• Depending upon the size of the recording being made,
the actual interval may vary from the interval selected
in “Auto Chapter.” The selected interval should only be
used as an approximation to create chapters.
• This function is not available when dubbing DV/
Digital8 format tapes to HDD and DVD-RWs (VR
mode). Chapter marks are automatically entered where
the recordings start on the tape (pages 79, 80).

90 ,continued 91

1-22
 Parental Control (DVD VIDEO only) 4 Select a geographic area as the playback ◆Area code One Touch Dubbing
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited limitation level, and press ENTER. Displays the following options for the One Touch
Standard Code number
according to a predetermined level, such as the age The area is selected. Dub function.
of the users. Scenes may be blocked or replaced • When you select “Others,” press the number Argentina 2044
◆Finalize Disc (for all recordable discs except
with different scenes. buttons to select and enter an area code in Australia 2047 DVD-RW in VR mode)
the table (see below). Then select “OK” and
1 After step 3 above, select “Parental Control,”
press ENTER. Austria 2046 Selects whether or not to finalize the disc
and press ENTER. automatically following One Touch Dubbing
• If you have not entered a password, the 5 Select “Level,” and press ENTER. Belgium 2057 (page 79).
display for registering a new password The selection items for “Level” are displayed. Brazil 2070
appears. Auto Automatically finalizes the
Canada 2079
Features - Parental Control disc following One Touch
Features - Parental Control Level : Off
Off Chile 2090 Dubbing.
Standard : Others
8
Enter a new password. Password 7 China 2092 Manual Allows you to finalize the
6

OK
5
Denmark 2115 disc manually.
4
Cancel
Finland 2165
HQ Setting (HDD only)
The lower the value, the stricter the limitation. France 2174 Selects the HQ mode used for recording on the
Discs rated higher than the selected level will Germany 2109 HDD (page 45).
• When you have already registered a be restricted.
India 2248
password, the display for entering the HQ+ Records in higher quality
6 Select the level, and press ENTER.
Indonesia 2238 (approximate 15 Mbps).
password appears. The Parental Control setting is complete.
Italy 2254 HQ Records in the standard HQ
Features - Parental Control
To cancel the Parental Control setting for the Japan 2276 mode.
Enter your password. disc, set “Level” to “Off” in step 6.
To change the password, select “Password” in Korea 2304
Auto Title Erase (HDD only)

Settings and Adjustments

OK
step 3, and press ENTER. When the display Malaysia 2363
Cancel
for registering a password appears, enter a On Automatically erases old
Mexico 2362
new four-digit password using the number titles recorded on the HDD
buttons, then select “OK” and press ENTER. Netherlands 2376 (page 47).
2 Enter your four-digit password using the New Zealand 2390
Notes Off Turns off the function.
number buttons, then select “OK” and press Norway 2379
ENTER. • If you forget your password, you will have to reset it by
selecting “Parental Control” under “Factory Setup” in Pakistan 2427 Rec Mode Adjust
Features - Parental Control
Options Setup (page 94). Philippines 2424
• When you play discs which do not have the Parental On Automatically adjusts the
Level : Off
Standard : USA Control function, playback cannot be limited on this Portugal 2436 recording mode to enable the
Password recorder. entire program to be
Russia 2489
• Depending on the disc, you may be asked to change the recorded (page 47).
Parental Control level while playing the disc. In this Singapore 2501
3 Select “Standard,” and press , or ENTER. case, enter your password, then change the level.
Spain 2149
Off Turns off the function.
The selection items for “Standard” are
displayed. Sweden 2499
Switzerland 2086
Features - Parental Control
Level : Off
Thailand 2528
Standard : Others
USA
Password Others
United Kingdom 2184

92 93

Auto Display
Disc and Remote Control On Automatically displays
Easy Setup
Settings/Factory Settings information on the screen (Resetting the Recorder)
when the recorder is turned
(Options) on, etc.
Select this to run the Easy Setup program.
Off Displays information only
The Options Setup allows you to set up other
operational settings.
when DISPLAY is pressed. 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is
in stop mode.
Command Mode
1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is Changes the Command Mode of the recorder if 2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER.
in stop mode. other DVD equipment is assigned the same
Command Mode. Be sure to match the Command
3 Select “Easy Setup,” and press ENTER.
2 Select “SETUP,” and press ENTER. Mode switch on the remote to the setting made
3 Select “Options,” and press ENTER. here. For details, see “If you have a Sony DVD SETUP

The Options Setup appears with the following player or more than one Sony DVD recorder” on Settings Easy Setup

options. The default settings are underlined. page 23. Video

Audio
Features

DVD1 Select this if the default Options

SETUP Command Mode conflicts Easy Setup

Settings Format DVD : VR with other DVD equipment.

Video Dimmer : Normal
Audio Auto Display : On
DVD2 Select this if the default
Features
Options
Command Mode :
Factory Setup
DVD3
Command Mode conflicts 4 Press ENTER.
with other DVD equipment.
Easy Setup
5 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
DVD3 The default Command Mode
6
Settings and Adjustments

of the recorder.
Follow the instructions for Easy Setup
(page 24) from step 5.
Format DVD (DVD-RW only) Factory Setup
The recorder automatically starts formatting in Allows you to select the setup settings by group,
VR mode or Video mode, whichever is selected and return them to their default settings. Note that
below, when a new, unformatted DVD-RW is all of your previous settings will be lost.
inserted. 1 After step 3 above, select “Factory Setup,”
and press , or ENTER.
VR Automatically formats the The display for selecting a group of settings
disc in VR mode. appears.

Video Automatically formats the 2 Select the group of settings you want to return
disc in Video mode. to default from “Settings,” “Video,” “Audio,”
“Features,” “Options,” “Parental Control,”
Dimmer and “All,” and press , or ENTER.
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display. 3 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The selected settings return to their default
Normal Bright lighting. settings.

Power Low lighting. Turns off the

4 Press ENTER when “Finish” appears.
Save lighting when the power is
off.

94 95

1-23

Additional Information
Troubleshooting
If you experience any of the following difficulties
while using the recorder, use this troubleshooting
guide to help remedy the problem before
requesting repairs. Should any problem persist,
consult your nearest Sony dealer.
Power
The power does not turn on.
, Check that the AC power cord is connected
securely.
Picture
There is no picture.
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.
, The connecting cords are damaged.
, Check the connection to your TV (page 12).
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such as to
“VCR”) so that the signal from the recorder
appears on the TV screen.
Picture noise appears.
, If the picture output signal from your recorder
passes through your VCR to get to your TV, or if
you are connected to a combination TV/VIDEO
player, the copy-protection signal applied to
some DVD programs could affect picture
quality. If you still experience this problem even
when you connect your recorder directly to your
TV, try connecting your recorder to your TV’s
S VIDEO input.
, You have set the recorder to progressive format
(the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up) even
though your TV cannot accept the progressive
signal. In this case, press PROGRESSIVE until
the progressive indicator turns off.
, Even if your TV is compatible with progressive
format (480p) signals, the image may be affected
when you set the recorder to progressive format.
In this case, press PROGRESSIVE so that the
PROGRESSIVE indicator turns off and the
recorder is set to normal (interlace) format.
, Noise may sometimes appear in pictures
recorded on the HDD, which is due to the
characteristics of HDD, and is not a malfunction.
96
The sound volume may improve if you set
“Audio DRC” in Audio Setup to “TV Mode”
(page 90).
, Set “Audio ATT” in Audio Setup to “Off”
(page 90).
An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or
played.
, Second Audio Program (SAP) is not available
for all programs. The program you are recording
does not have a second audio program.
, You have set “Tuner Audio” in Audio Settings to
“Main” (page 89). Select “SAP” to record
alternate audio programs.
, When recording from connected equipment, set
“Line Audio Input” in TOOLS menu to “Main/
Sub” (page 53).
, If you have connected an AV amplifier to the
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack
and want to change the audio track for a DVD-
RW (VR mode) during playback, set “Dolby
Digital” in Audio Setup to “D-PCM” (page 90).
Playback
The recorder does not play any type of disc
(except HDD).
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc with the
labeled side facing up.
, The disc is not correctly inserted.
, Moisture has condensed inside the recorder.
Remove the disc and leave the recorder turned on
for about half an hour until the moisture
evaporates.
, If the disc was recorded on another recorder, the
recorder cannot play the disc if it was not
finalized (page 40).
The disc does not start playback from the
beginning.
, Resume play was activated (page 54).
, You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu or
DVD menu automatically appears on the TV
screen when it is first inserted. Use the menu to
start playback.
The recorder starts playing the disc
automatically.
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback
function.
98
TV program reception does not fill the screen.
, Set the channel manually in “Tuner Preset” in
Settings Setup (page 84).
, Select the correct source using the INPUT
SELECT button, or select a channel of any TV
program using the CH +/– buttons.
TV program pictures are distorted.
, Reorient the TV antenna.
, Adjust the picture (see the TV’s instruction
manual).
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart.
, Place the TV and any bunched antenna cables
farther apart.
, The RF cable is connected to the VHF/UHF
OUT jack on the recorder. Connect the cable to
the VHF/UHF IN jack.
The channel on the cable box/satellite receiver
has been changed.
, The set top box controller is connected and “Set
Top Box Control” is set to “On.” Check the “Set
Top Box Control” settings in Settings Setup
(page 86).
TV channels cannot be changed.
, The channel is disabled (page 85).
, A timer recording started, which changed the
channels.
The picture from equipment connected to the
recorder’s input jack does not appear on the
screen.
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE IN 1
jack, select “L1” in the front panel display by
pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT.
If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN
jacks, select “L2” in the front panel display by
pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT.
If the equipment is connected to the LINE IN 3
jack, select “L3” in the front panel display by
pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT.
If the equipment is connected to the DV IN jack,
(this is usually for a digital video camera
connection), select “DV” in the front panel
display by pressing CH +/– or INPUT SELECT.
, When the equipment is connected to the
COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks using a
component video cord, set “Line1 Input” in
Video Setup to “Component” (page 89).
Playback stops automatically.
, If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the recorder
stops playback at the auto pause signal.
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or Slow-
motion Play cannot be performed.
, Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to
do some of the operations above. See the
instruction manual supplied with the disc.
The language for the sound track cannot be
changed.
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD
being played.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the
language for the sound track.
, Try changing the language using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
The subtitle language cannot be changed or
turned off.
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the
DVD VIDEO.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the
subtitles.
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles
recorded on this recorder.
The angles cannot be changed.
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD
VIDEO being played.
, You are trying to change the angles when “ ”
does not appear on the TV screen (page 56).
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles.
, Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO’s
menu.
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles
recorded on this recorder.
The MP3 audio track does not play.
, The MP3 audio track is not recorded in a format
that the recorder can play (page 62).
Recording/Timer recording/Editing
The channel cannot be changed from the
channel you are recording.
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”
1-24
, When an S video cable is connected to the
recorder’s LINE IN 1 or LINE IN 3 jack, set
“Line1 Input” or “Line3 Input” in Video Setup to
“S Video” (page 89).
The playback picture or TV program from the
equipment connected through the recorder is
distorted.
, If the playback picture output from a DVD
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your recorder
before reaching your TV, the copy-protection
signal applied to some programs could affect
picture quality. Disconnect the playback
equipment in question and connect it directly to
your TV.
The picture does not fill the screen.
, Set “TV Type” in Video Setup in accordance
with the aspect ratio of your TV (page 87).
The picture does not fill the screen, even
though the aspect ratio is set in “TV Type” in
Video Setup.
, The aspect ratio of the title is fixed.
TV Guide On Screen
TV Guide On Screen does not appear.
, 1Even if you complete Easy Setup, TV program
listings do not appear until the recorder receives
the TV Guide On Screen data. 2Turn off the
recorder, but do not unplug it. 3Wait for 24
hours. It may take several days for the recorder to
receive the TV Guide On Screen data for all
channels.
, The area and/or zip code is incorrect. Correctly
set your area of residence and zip code in “Area
Setup” of the Settings Setup (page 85).
, When the recorder is connected to a cable box,
the cable box must be turned on and “Set Top
Box Control” in Settings Setup must be set to
“On” (page 86) to download the TV Guide On
Screen data.
, The cable box/satellite receiver brand code is
incorrect (page 112).
, The TV Guide On Screen data may not be
available in some areas.
, TV Guide On Screen does not appear if you
connect your TV using the video or S-video jacks
and press the PROGRESSIVE button on the
remote, even if your TV accepts progressive
signals.
Recording does not start immediately after you
press z REC.
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD”,
“FORMAT,” or “INFOWRITE” disappears
from the front panel display.
Nothing was recorded even though you set the
timer setting correctly.
, There was a power failure during recording.
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due to a
power failure that lasted for more than one hour.
Reset the clock (page 86).
, The channel was hidden after the timer recording
was set. (See “To customize the channel line-up”
on page 36.)
, Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC
outlet, and connect it again.
, The program contains copy protection signals
that restrict copying.
, The timer setting overlapped another setting that
was set later.
, There is no DVD inside the recorder.
, There is not enough HDD or DVD disc space for
the recording.
, The set top box was turned off.
, The set top box controller was incorrectly
connected (page 13).
, The settings in “Set Top Box Control” in Settings
Setup have been changed (page 86).
, A separate recording was in the process of being
made without the use of the timer (page 50).
, The recorder was in the process of dubbing
(HDDyDVD).
, The recorder was in the process of DV/Digital8
Dubbing.
Recording does not stop immediately after you
press x REC STOP.
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input
disc data before recording can stop.
Recording does not stop after you press x
STOP.
, Open the remote’s cover and press x REC
STOP.
Timer recording is not complete or did not start
from the beginning.
, There was a power failure during recording.
Should the power failure continue for more than
one hour, reset the clock (page 86).
, The “Time Lock” function on your cable box is
activated. Set this function to off.
The channel number in the program listing
does not match the broadcast station.
, There may be more than one channel lineup for
your area. To change the channel lineup, select
“Change channel lineup” from “SETUP” in the
Main Menu Bar of TV Guide On Screen
(page 36).
Program listings for some channels is
missing.
, It may take several days for the recorded to
receive all of the TV Guide On Screen data.
, Channels, such as satellite channels, are not
displayed by the TV Guide On Screen system.
, All of the TV Guide On Screen data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
The program listing is not up to date.
, The recorder was in use during the time that the
TV Guide On Screen data was scheduled to be
downloaded.
, All of the TV Guide On Screen data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
Sound
Additional Information
There is no sound.
, Re-connect all connections securely.
, The connecting cord is damaged.
, The input source setting on the amplifier or the
connection to the amplifier is incorrect.
, The recorder is in reverse play, fast-forward,
slow motion, or pause mode.
, If the audio signal does not come through the
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
jacks, check the Audio Setup settings (page 89).
Sound distortion occurs.
, Set “Audio ATT” in Audio Setup to “On”
(page 90).
Sound is noisy.
, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,
noise will come from the LINE OUT (AUDIO
L/R) 1/2 jacks (page 58).
The sound volume is low.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.
,continued 97
, There is not enough HDD or DVD disc space for
the recording.
Contents previously recorded were erased.
, Data that has been recorded on a DVD with a PC
will be erased from the disc when the disc is
inserted.
, “Auto Title Erase” in Features Setup is set to
“On” (page 93).
Display
The clock has stopped.
, Set the clock again (page 86).
, The clock stopped due to a power failure that
lasted for more than one hour. Reset the clock
(page 86).
The clock is wrong.
, Set the clock again (page 86). If you cannot
select “Clock” from “Settings” in the Setup
Display, wait until the clock data is received and
the clock is automatically adjusted.
The TIMER REC indicator is flashing.
, The disc does not have enough space.
, Insert a recordable disc inside the recorder.
Additional Information
The recording mode indication is incorrect.
, When the recording or dubbing is less than three
minutes, the recording mode indication may be
displayed incorrectly. The actual recording itself
is correctly made in the selected recording mode.
The clock does not appear in the front panel
display.
, “Dimmer” in Options Setup is set to “Power
Save” (page 94).
Remote control
The remote does not function.
, Batteries are weak.
, The remote is too far from the recorder.
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned to the
default setting when you replaced the batteries.
Reset the code (page 21).
, Turn on the recorder.
, The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on
the recorder.
, Different command modes are set for the
recorder and remote. Set the same command
mode (page 23).
,continued 99
 , Set the TV/DVD switch to DVD (page 22).
Other Sony equipment responds to the remote.
, The same command mode is set for both the
equipment and recorder. Set a different
command mode for the recorder (page 23).
Others
The recorder does not operate properly.
, Restart the recorder. Press down "/1 on the
recorder for more than ten seconds until
“WELCOME” appears in the front panel display.
, When static electricity, etc., causes the recorder
to operate abnormally, turn off the recorder and
wait until the clock appears in the front panel
display. Then, unplug the recorder and after
leaving it off for a while, plug it in again.
Dubbing or DV/Digital8 Dubbing does not start.
, A timer recording is in progress.
Five numbers or letters are displayed on the
front panel display.
, The self-diagnosis function was activated (see
the table on page 101).
The disc tray does not open after you press Z
“HDD ERROR” appears in the front panel
display. Self-diagnosis Function
, The hard disk error occurred. Press down @/1 on
the recorder for ten seconds to restart the
(When letters/numbers
recorder. If this does not resolve the problem, appear in the display)
format the recorder’s HDD by pressing down the
HDD button on the recorder for more than ten
When the self-diagnosis function is activated to
seconds until “WELCOME” appears in the front
prevent the recorder from malfunctioning, a five-
panel display. Note that all the contents recorded
character service number (e.g., C 13 50) with a
on the HDD will be erased.
combination of a letter and four numbers appears
on the front panel display. In this case, check the
“FAN ERROR” appears in the front panel following table.
display.
, Check that the vent on the rear of the recorder is
First three Cause and/or
not blocked. Then, turn off the recorder, wait
characters of the corrective action
until the clock appears in the front panel display,
service number
and disconnect the AC power cord. Leave the
recorder off for a while, then re-connect the C 13 There is a problem with
power cord, and press "/1 on the recorder. the HDD.
, Contact your nearest
Sony dealer or local
Mechanical sound is heard when the recorder authorized Sony
is off. service facility.
, While the recorder is adjusting the clock or The DVD is dirty.
downloading the TV Guide On Screen data, , Clean the disc with a
operational noises (such as the internal fan) may soft cloth.
be heard, even when the power is off. This is not
C 31 The DVD/CD is not
a malfunction. inserted correctly.
, Re-insert the disc
Notes About This Recorder
On operation
• If the recorder is brought directly from a cold to
a warm location, or is placed in a very damp
room, moisture may condense on the lenses
inside the recorder. Should this occur, the
recorder may not operate properly. In this case,
remove the disc and leave the recorder turned on
for about half an hour until the moisture
evaporates.
• When you move the recorder, take out any discs.
If you don’t, the disc may be damaged.
On adjusting volume
• Do not turn up the volume while listening to a
section with very low level inputs or no audio
signals. If you do, the speakers may be damaged
when a peak level section is played.
On cleaning
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft
cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent
solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad,
scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or
benzine.
About repairing the hard disk drive

OPEN/CLOSE.
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to
open after you have recorded or edited a DVD.
This is because the recorder is adding disc data to
the disc.
The disc tray does not open and “TRAY
LOCKED” appears on the front panel display.
, Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized
Sony service facility.
“RECOVERY” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder’s recovery function was activated
when the recorder was turned on because the
power was turned off or failed during recording.
Leave the recorder on until “RECOVERY”
disappears from the front panel display.
Additional Information
The disc tray does not open and you cannot correctly. • It may be necessary to access data stored on the
remove the disc after you press Z OPEN/ E XX To prevent a malfunction, hard disk for testing purposes; there is no
CLOSE. (xx is a number) the recorder has intention to copy or store the data, titles or any
, Turn off the recorder, Once the clock appears in performed the self- other information.
the front panel display, disconnect the AC power diagnosis function. • If replacement or initialization (format) is
, Contact your nearest
cord. Connect it again while pressing down A on required, the hard disk will be formatted at our
Sony dealer or local discretion. In this case, please note that all of the
the recorder, and release the button when the disc
authorized Sony
tray opens. Then, keep [/1 on the recorder service facility and
contents recorded there will be erased (including
pressed for about ten seconds until any data found to violate copyright law).
give the five-
“WELCOME” appears in the front panel display. character service
number. On cleaning discs
Example: E 61 10 Do not use a commercially available cleaning
“LOCKED” appears in the front panel display.
disc. It may cause a malfunction.
, The disc tray is locked. Cancel the Child Lock
(page 55).
Notes about the discs
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its
edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may cause
it to malfunction.

100 ,continued 101

• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat Outputs

sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car
parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may
rise considerably inside the car.
• After playing, store the disc in its case.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the
disc from the center out.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,
commercially available cleaners, or anti-static
spray intended for vinyl LPs.
• Do not use the following discs.
– A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g.,
card, heart).
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker
adhesive on it.
Specifications
System
Laser: Semiconductor laser
Channel coverage:
NTSC
VHF: 2 to 13/UHF: 14 to 69/CATV: A-8 to
A-1, A to W, W+1 to W+84
Video reception: Frequency synthesizer
system
Audio reception: Split carrier system
Antenna: 75-ohm antenna terminal for VHF/
UHF
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer indication:
12-hour cycle (digital)/Power back-up
duration: 1 hour
Video recording format: MPEG Video
Audio recording format/applicable bit rate:
Dolby Digital, 2 ch/256 kbps
When you play PCM sound tracks with a 96 kHz
sampling frequency, the output signals from the
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jack
are converted to 48 kHz sampling frequency.
Inputs
(Jack name: Jack type/output level/output
impedance)
LINE OUT 1/2
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y:1.0 Vp-p, C:
0.286 Vp-p
DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL):
Optical output jack/–18 dBm (wave length:
660 nm)
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL):
Phono jack/0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB, PR:
interlace*=0.648 Vp-p, progressive or
interlace**=0.7 Vp-p
* “Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level” is “On”
** “Y/Pb/Pr Out Black Level” is “Off”
SET TOP BOX CONTROL:
Mini jack
General
Power requirements: 120 V AC, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 54 W
Dimensions (approx.): 430 u 89 u 346 mm
(17 u 3 5/8 u 13 5/8 in.) (width/height/depth)
About i.LINK
The DV IN jack on this recorder is an i.LINK-
compliant DV IN jack. This section describes the
i.LINK standard and its features.
What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling
digital video, digital audio and other data in two
directions between equipment having the i.LINK
jack, and for controlling other equipment.
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected
by a single i.LINK cable. Possible applications are
operations and data transactions with various
digital AV equipment. When two or more i.LINK-
compatible equipment are connected to this
recorder in a daisy chain, operations and data
transactions are possible with not only the
equipment that this recorder is connected to but
also with other devices via the directly connected
equipment.
Note, however, that the method of operation
sometimes varies according to the characteristics
and specifications of the equipment to be
connected, and that operations and data
transactions are sometimes not possible on some
connected equipment.
Additional Information

(Jack name: Jack type/input level/input incl. projecting parts

Hard disk drive capacity: 160 GB Note
impedance) Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected
LINE IN 1/2/3 Mass (approx.): 5.9 kg (13.01 lb)
to this recorder by the i.LINK cable (DV connecting
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than 22 Operating temperature: 5 ºC to 35 ºC cable). When connecting this recorder to i.LINK-
kilohms (41 ºF to 95 ºF) compatible equipment having two or more i.LINK jacks
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p Operating humidity: 25 % to 80 % (DV jacks), see the instruction manual of the equipment
Supplied accessories: to be connected.
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y:1.0 Vp-p, C:
0.286 Vp-p Audio/video cord (1)
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100 Power cord (1) About the name “i.LINK”
COMPONENT VIDEO IN (Y, PB, PR): Antenna cable (1) i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB/PR: Set top box controller (1) transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a
interlace*=0.648 Vp-p, interlace**=0.7 Remote commander (remote) (1) trademark approved by many corporations.
Vp-p Size AA(R6) batteries (2) IEEE 1394 is an international standard
* “Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level” is “On” standardized by the Institute of Electrical and
** “Y/Pb/Pr In Black Level” is “Off” Specifications and design are subject to change Electronics Engineers.
CONTROL S IN: Mini jack without notice.

102 ,continued 103

1-25
 i.LINK baud rate
Guide to Parts and Controls
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to
the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are For more information, see the pages in parentheses.
defined:
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)
Front panel
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps) Buttons on the recorder have the same function as the buttons on the remote if they have the same or
similar names.
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in
the instruction manual of each equipment. It is
also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some
equipment.
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it
is not indicated such as this unit is “S100.”
When units are connected to equipment having a
different maximum baud rate, the baud rate
sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.

* What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of
data that can be sent or received in one second. For A @/1 (on/standby) button (24) J </M/m/,/ENTER button (32)
example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100
megabits of data can be sent in one second. B Front panel display (42, 108) K SYSTEM MENU button (32)
C Disc tray (46) TOOLS button (32)
i.LINK functions on this recorder L O RETURN button (32)
D TIMER REC indicator (46)
For details on how to dub when this recorder is
E (remote sensor) (21) M ./> (previous/next) buttons (56)
connected to other video equipment having DV
jacks, see page 77. F A (open/close) button (46) N CHANNEL +/– buttons (50)

Additional Information
The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC-
G H (play) button (54) O REC MODE button (45)
SD signals. It cannot output signals. The DV jack
will not accept MICRO MV signals from X (pause) button (54) P INPUT SELECT button (53, 77)
equipment such as a MICRO MV digital video x (stop) button (54) Q DVD button/indicator (37)
camera with an i.LINK jack. H TV GUIDE button (34, 46) HDD button/indicator (37)
For further precautions, see the notes on page 77.
For details on precautions when connecting this I z REC button (50) R LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/AUDIO L/
recorder, also see the instruction manuals for the X REC PAUSE button (50) R) jacks (30)
equipment to be connected. x REC STOP button (50) S DV IN jack (77)

Required i.LINK cable

Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during
DV dubbing).

i.LINK and are trademarks.

104 ,continued 105

Y INSTANT REPLAY/ INSTANT

Remote ADVANCE buttons (56)
Buttons on the remote have the same function as A TV/DVD switch (22) Z MENU button (54)
the buttons on the recorder if they have the same
B Z OPEN/CLOSE button (46) wj m / M (search) buttons (56)
or similar names. Buttons with an orange dot next
to them can be used with your TV when the TV/ C HDD button (37) wk H PLAY button (54)
DVD switch is set to TV. DVD button (37) The button has a tactile dot.*
D Number buttons (22, 48, 61) X PAUSE button (54)
SET/z button (22, 48, 61) x STOP button (54)
The number 5 button has a tactile dot.* wl CHAPTER MARK/ERASE buttons (68)
E CLEAR button (61) e; DISPLAY button (41, 52)
1 2 3
F AUDIO button (56)* TIME/TEXT button (42)
SUBTITLE button (56) ea COMMAND MODE switch (DVD 1,2,3)
4 5 6
G [TV GUIDE] button (34, 47) (23)
7 8 9 * Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the
SCHEDULE button (49)
recorder.
0 Blue button (34)
Green button (34)
(info) button (34)
[TIMER] button (48)
H SYSTEM MENU button (32)
TITLE LIST button (37, 54, 65)
TOOLS button (32)
I CURSOR MODE button (37)
J O RETURN/EXIT button (32, 34)
K TOP MENU button (54)
Additional Information

L . PREV (previous)/> NEXT

buttons (56)
M z REC button (50)
X REC PAUSE button (50)
x REC STOP button (50)
N REC MODE button (45)
O INPUT SELECT button (53, 77)
P ANGLE button (56)
SUR (surround) button (56)
Q PROGRESSIVE button (18)
R ONE TOUCH DUBBING button (79)
S [/1 (on/standby) button (24)
T TV/VIDEO button (22)
U CH (channel) +/– buttons (22)
The + button has a tactile dot.*
V VOL (volume) +/– buttons (22)
W </M/m/,/ENTER button (32)
X ZOOM/PAGE +/– buttons (34, 37)

106 ,continued 107

1-26
 Front panel display DVD-RW (page 8)
Glossary A DVD-RW is a recordable and rewritable disc
that is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. The DVD-
Chapter (page 61) RW has two different modes: VR mode and Video
Sections of a picture or a music feature that are mode. DVDs created in Video mode have the
HDD DVD DVD RW PLAYLIST STEREO
V CD VR SAP smaller than titles. A title is composed of several same format as a DVD VIDEO, while discs
CH chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may created in VR (Video Recording) mode allow the
PROGRESSIVE be recorded. contents to be programmed or edited.

Copy protection signals (page 46) DVD+R (page 8)

Copy restriction set by copyright owners, etc. A DVD+R (read “plus R”) is a recordable disc that
These signals are included in some software or TV is the same size as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can
A HDD/DVD indicators G SAP (Second Audio Program) indicator be recorded only once to a DVD+R, and will have
programs and restrict recording on this recorder.
Displays the selected media and the (45) the same format as a DVD VIDEO.
playing/recording/dubbing status. H Displays the following (42): Dolby Digital (page 90)
B Disc type*/recording format • Playing time/remaining time Digital audio compression technology developed DVD-R (page 8)
* Displays DATA CDs as “CD.” • Current title/chapter/track/index number by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms A DVD-R is a recordable disc that is the same size
• Recording time/recording mode as a DVD VIDEO. Contents can be recorded only
C (angle) indicator (56) to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel
• Clock is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel once to a DVD-R, and will have the same format
D PLAYLIST indicator (38) • Channel in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same as a DVD VIDEO.
E Audio signal indicators (41) I PROGRESSIVE indicator (18) discrete channels of high quality digital audio
found in “Dolby Digital” theater surround sound DVD VIDEO (page 8)
F STEREO indicator (45) systems. Good channel separation is realized A disc that contains up to eight hours of moving
because all of the channel data is recorded pictures on a disc the same diameter as a CD.
z Hint
discretely, and little deterioration occurs because The data capacity of a single-layer and single-
You can turn off the front panel display when the recorder is turned off by setting “Dimmer” to “Power Save” in Options
Setup (page 94).
all channel data processing is digital. sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7
times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-
DTS (page 90) layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-
Rear panel

Digital audio compression technology by Digital
Theater Systems, Inc. This technology conforms
to multi-channel surround sound. The rear channel
is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel
VHF/UHF
in this format. DTS provides the same discrete
COMPONENT
IN
Additional Information
layer and double-sided DVD is 9.4 GB, and
double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17 GB.
The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, which
is a worldwide standard of digital compression
technology. The picture data is compressed to

SET TOP BOX COMPONENT VIDEO IN DIGITAL OUT

PCM/DTS/DOLBY DIGITAL
LINE OUT
VIDEO OUT
channels of high quality digital audio. about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD
CONTROL LINE IN S VIDEO Y S VIDEO Y

1
R AUDIO L VIDEO
COAXIAL 1
R AUDIO L VIDEO
Good channel separation is realized because all of also uses a variable rate coding technology that
OUT PB PB

G-LINK 2
the channel data is recorded discretely, and little changes the data to be allocated according to the
3 PR PR
~ AC IN
CONTROL S IN
OPTICAL

deterioration occurs because all channel data status of the picture. Audio information is
processing is digital. recorded in a multi-channel format, such as Dolby
Digital, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio
presence.
DVD+RW (page 8)
Furthermore, various advanced functions such as
A VHF/UHF IN/OUT jacks (14) G LINE OUT (AUDIO L/R/VIDEO) 1/2 A DVD+RW (read “plus RW”) is a recordable and the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental
B SET TOP BOX CONTROL jack (13, 14) jacks (16, 20) rewritable disc. DVD+RWs use a recording Control functions are provided on the DVD.
format that is comparable to the DVD VIDEO
C LINE IN (AUDIO L/R/VIDEO) 1/3 jacks H LINE OUT (S VIDEO) 1/2 jacks (16)
format.
(13, 29) I COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y, PB, PR)
D LINE IN (S VIDEO) 1/3 jacks (13, 29) jacks (16)

E COMPONENT VIDEO IN (Y, PB, PR) jack J AC IN terminal (21)

(13, 29) K CONTROL S IN jack (16)
F DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) L G-LINK jack (for service use only)
jacks (20)

108 ,continued 109

Hard disk drive (page 8)

A hard disk drive is a whole mechanical system Language Code List
that consists of disks and drive. Disks are flat,
circular, rigid plates coated with a thin magnetic For details, see page 87.
media. Magnetic heads record data on the rapidly The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
spinning disks, and this enables the speedy and
efficient reading and writing of data. Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language
1027 Afar 1183 Irish 1347 Maori 1507 Samoan
Interlace format (page 18) 1028 Abkhazian 1186 Scots Gaelic 1349 Macedonian 1508 Shona
Interlace format shows every other line of an 1032 Afrikaans 1194 Galician 1350 Malayalam 1509 Somali
image as a single “field” and is the standard 1039 Amharic 1196 Guarani 1352 Mongolian 1511 Albanian
method for displaying images on television. The 1044 Arabic 1203 Gujarati 1353 Moldavian 1512 Serbian
even number field shows the even numbered lines 1045 Assamese 1209 Hausa 1356 Marathi 1513 Siswati
1051 Aymara 1217 Hindi 1357 Malay 1514 Sesotho
of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the 1052 Azerbaijani 1226 Croatian 1358 Maltese 1515 Sundanese
odd numbered lines of an image. 1053 Bashkir 1229 Hungarian 1363 Burmese 1516 Swedish
1057 Byelorussian 1233 Armenian 1365 Nauru 1517 Swahili
Original (page 64) 1059 Bulgarian 1235 Interlingua 1369 Nepali 1521 Tamil
Titles actually recorded on a DVD-RW (VR 1060 Bihari 1239 Interlingue 1376 Dutch 1525 Telugu
1061 Bislama 1245 Inupiak 1379 Norwegian 1527 Tajik
mode). Erasing original titles frees up disc space.
1066 Bengali; 1248 Indonesian 1393 Occitan 1528 Thai
Bangla 1253 Icelandic 1403 (Afan)Oromo 1529 Tigrinya
Playlist (page 64) 1067 Tibetan 1254 Italian 1408 Oriya 1531 Turkmen
Playback information created from the actual 1070 Breton 1257 Hebrew 1417 Punjabi 1532 Tagalog
recordings on a DVD-RW (VR mode). A Playlist 1079 Catalan 1261 Japanese 1428 Polish 1534 Setswana
leaves the original titles as they are, and contains 1093 Corsican 1269 Yiddish 1435 Pashto; 1535 Tonga
1097 Czech 1283 Javanese Pushto 1538 Turkish
only the information needed to control playback.
1103 Welsh 1287 Georgian 1436 Portuguese 1539 Tsonga
A Playlist title takes up very little disc space. 1105 Danish 1297 Kazakh 1463 Quechua 1540 Tatar
1109 German 1298 Greenlandic 1481 Rhaeto- 1543 Twi
Progressive format (page 18) 1130 Bhutani 1299 Cambodian Romance 1557 Ukrainian
Additional Information

Compared to the Interlace format that alternately 1142 Greek 1300 Kannada 1482 Kirundi 1564 Urdu
shows every other line of an image (field) to create 1144 English 1301 Korean 1483 Romanian 1572 Uzbek
1145 Esperanto 1305 Kashmiri 1489 Russian 1581 Vietnamese
one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire
1149 Spanish 1307 Kurdish 1491 Kinyarwanda 1587 Volapük
image at once as a single frame. This means that 1150 Estonian 1311 Kirghiz 1495 Sanskrit 1613 Wolof
while the Interlace format can show 30 frames/60 1151 Basque 1313 Latin 1498 Sindhi 1632 Xhosa
fields in one second, the Progressive format can 1157 Persian 1326 Lingala 1501 Sangho 1665 Yoruba
show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture 1165 Finnish 1327 Laothian 1502 Serbo- 1684 Chinese
quality increases and still images, text, and 1166 Fiji 1332 Lithuanian Croatian 1697 Zulu
horizontal lines appear sharper. 1171 Faroese 1334 Latvian; 1503 Singhalese
1174 French Lettish 1505 Slovak
1181 Frisian 1345 Malagasy 1506 Slovenian 1703 Not specified
Title (page 61)
The longest section of a picture or music feature
on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the
entire album in audio software.

Track (page 61)

Sections of a music feature on a CD (the length of
a song).

110 111

1-27
 Cable box brand Code number Cable box brand Code number Cable box brand Code number
Cable Box/Satellite Cable Healthcare 0769, 0058 GE 0232, 0233, 0144, 0021 Motorola 0476, 0276, 1476, 0810,
Receiver Brand Code Cable Star 0056 Gemini 0015, 0070, 0057, 0242,
1376, 1254, 0400, 1106
0014, 0797, 0013, 0400 Movie Time 0156, 0078, 0063, 0203
Cabletenna 0022, 0039
If more than one code number is listed, try General Instrument 0476, 0011, 0014, 0098, MS 0069, 0015, 1018, 0303
Cableview 0022
entering them one at a time until you find the one 0810, 0024, 0003, 0015,
MultiVision 0012
that works with your cable box/satellite receiver. Century 0153, 0618, 0008, 0315 0276
Myrio 1117
Citation 0017 GHZ 0078
Cable box brand Code number NET 0274
Citizen 0153, 0315, 0078, 0242 Gibraltar 0003
3M 0033 Next Level 0764, 1316, 1315, 1314
Clearmaster 0883 Global 1327
ABC 0003, 0011, 0017, 0008, Nexus 0770
ClearMax 0883, 1247 GMI 0069, 0057, 0015, 0797
0014, 0001, 0013, 0206, Northcoast 0671, 0314
0047, 0237, 0033 Colour Voice 0031, 0025 GoldStar 0144, 0040
Nova Vision 0277, 0008
Accuphase 0003, 0013, 0047, 0001, Comband 0233, 0232 Goodmind 0770, 0797
0011, 0017, 0014, 0206 Novabeam 0277
Comtec 0274 Gradiente 1136
Acorn 1102, 0237 Novaplex 0618, 0277, 0017, 0008
Comtronics 0060, 0040 Hamlin 0020, 0009, 0034, 0259,
Action 0237 0015, 0273, 0206 NSC 0156, 0070, 0203, 0063,
Comtronics Eagle 0040, 0060
0400, 0012, 0618, 0022,
Active 0237, 1102 Healthway Interactive 0058, 1020, 1015, 0769
Contec 0019 0637, 0010, 0044
Aim 0015 Hitachi 0011, 0154, 0009, 0008,
Coolmax 0883 Oak 0019, 0303, 0248, 0017
0003, 0033, 0014, 0255
Allegro 0315, 0153 Omega 0015
Curtis Mathes 0015, 0242 Houston Tracker 0011
Amark 0008, 0277, 0144, 0056 Omniview 0371
Dae Ryung Eagle 0008 Hwalin 0303
American 0060 Optimus 0021
Daeryung 0008, 0877, 0477, 0277, IBM 0670
Americast 0899 1877
Pace 0008, 0237, 0277, 0477,
IEEC 1018

Additional Information
Antronix 0207, 0022 Diamond 0035 0877, 1877
Interbuy 0274
Anvision 0211, 0111 Digeo 1476 Pacific Bell 0843
Jasco 0315, 0153, 0015
Apache 0770 Digi 0637 Panasonic 0107, 0021, 0144, 0008,
Jebsee 0014, 0400 0124, 0307, 0000, 0040
Arbatron 0014, 0011, 0003, 0476 Director 0476
Jerrold 0003, 0014, 0276, 0011, Panther 0637
Archer 0153, 0022, 0207, 0039, Dumont 0637 0012, 0020, 0024, 0015,
0797, 0237, 0260 Paragon 0000, 0525, 0008
Eagle Comtronics 0060, 0028 0047, 0098, 0476, 0031,
ASE 1080 0029, 0111, 0032, 0054, Penney 0637, 0000
Eastern 0002, 0274, 0418 0810, 0028
Auna 1269 Philips 0025, 0031, 0290, 0027,
Electricord 0078 Kuang Yu 0024 0030, 0153, 0060, 0242,
BBT 0267 0028, 0334, 0211, 0029,
Emerson 0797, 0303, 0015, 0014 Leon 0069, 0015
BCC 0276 0259, 0307, 0652, 0013,
Everquest 0040, 0015 LG 0040, 0144 0069, 0649, 0255, 0305,
Belcor 0056, 0022 0032, 0111, 0317
Focus 0400 Linsay 0440
Bell & Howell 0014 Pioneer 0144, 0023, 0533, 1877,
Fosgate 0276 Macom 0033
Bell Atlantic 0641 0877, 0260
Funai 0248, 0019 Maestro 0812
Bell South 0899 Popular Mechanics 0400
FutureVision 0649 Magnavox 0797, 0027, 0032, 0334,
Bestlink 0303 Prelude 0770
Garrard 0153 0069
Betavue 0022 Prism 0012, 0013, 0059
Gateway 0764 Millennium 0618, 0153
British Telecom 0003 Protelcon 0786
GC Electronics 0207, 0056, 0330, 0016, Memorex 0000
BVS 0641 0040, 0077, 0030 Pulsar 0000, 0040
Mitsubishi 0003

112 ,continued 113

Cable box brand Code number Cable box brand Code number Cable box brand Code number Satellite receiver Code number
brand
Quasar 0000 Stargate 0015, 0040, 0770, 0865, United Cable 0003, 0014, 0011, 0276
0797, 0305, 0014 AlphaStar 0772
Quest 0144, 0020 Universal 0191, 0078, 0207, 0056,
Starquest 0015 0022, 0039, 0153, 0077, Atlantic Telephone 1333
R Line 0040
0322, 0315
StarSight 0542, 0422 Bell ExpressVu 0775
RadioShack 0883, 0015, 0315, 0303,
US Electronics 0276, 0008, 0003, 0017
0797 Stealth 0274 Century 0856
V2 0883
Rampage 0255 Stellar One 0807 Chaparral 0216
Videoway 0250, 0000
Ranger 1247 Storm 1018, 0637 Crossdigital 1109
VideoWorks 0124
RCA 0021, 0060, 0797, 0047, Suena Madritel 1230 DirecTV 0749, 0566, 0392, 1749,
1256, 0843 Vidtech 0244 0099, 1109, 1076, 1442,
Supercable 0276
1856, 0247, 1142, 1639,
Realistic 0207, 0153 Viewmaster 0883, 0770
Supermax 0883 0724, 0639, 0819
Recoton 0153, 0400 Viewstar 0258, 0289, 0060, 0063,
Sylvania 0001 Dish Network System 0775, 1005, 1170
0211, 0027, 0111, 0030,
Regal 0259, 0020, 0273, 0279,
Tandy 0258 0121 Dishpro 0775, 1005
0276
Tatung 0097 Vision 0883 Echostar 0775, 1170, 1005
Regency 0002, 0020, 0682
Teac 1018 Visionetics 1264 Expressvu 0775
Rembrandt 0070, 0153, 0040, 0022,
0011 Technics 0029 Vortex View 0883 Galaxis 0863
RK 0304, 0479 Teknika 0146 WaveMaster 0565 GE 0566
Runco 0000 Teleavia 0040 Wiso 0078 General Instrument 0361, 0869, 0627
Samsung 0040, 0144, 0023, 0003, TeleCaption 0221 Zenith 0000, 0525, 0054, 0017, GOI 0775
0070, 0000 0039, 0153, 0060, 0315,
Teleview 0063, 0040 Gradiente 0856
0191, 0899
Sasktel 1737
Texscan 0001, 0096, 0010 Hitachi 0819, 0749
Zentek 0400
Scientific Atlanta 0008, 0277, 0017, 0006,
Additional Information

TFC 0310 Houston Tracker 0775

0237, 0025, 0477, 0207,
0877, 0003, 0012, 0000, Thomson 1256 HTS 0775
0021, 1877
Timeless 0418, 0274, 0040 Hughes Network Systems 0749, 1749, 1442, 1142
Seam 0510
Tocom 0012, 0013, 0029, 0019, Humax 1176, 1359, 1048, 0863,
Sears 0510 0059, 0017 0283
Sejin 1265 Torx 0003 Innova 0099
Sigma 0019 Toshiba 0000 Jerrold 0361, 0036, 0627
Signal 0040, 0015, 0011, 0035 Trans PX 0303, 0276, 0153, 0315 JVC 0775, 1170
Signature 0011 Trinity 1248 Magnavox 0722, 0724
SkyCable 0112 Tristar 0883 McIntosh 0869
Skygiant 1091 TS 0255, 0024, 1018, 0003, Memorex 0724
SL Marx 0040 0303
Mitsubishi 0749
Sony 1006, 1506, 1606 Tusa 0015
Motorola 0869
Spectradyne 0769, 0058 TV COMM 0035, 0019
NEC 1270
Spectravision 0058 TV Guide 1476
Netsat 0099
Sprucer 0021, 0307, 0010, 0144 TV86 0063, 0040
Next Level 0869
Standard Components 0203, 0096, 0155 Uniden 0022
Optimus 0724
Starcom 0003, 0015, 0047, 0014, Unika 0207, 0153, 0022
Panasonic 0247, 0701
0098, 0305

114 ,continued 115

1-28
 Satellite receiver Code number
brand
Paysat 0724
Philips 1076, 0099, 1142, 0724,
0722, 0749, 1442, 1749,
0856, 0775
Primestar 0361, 0627, 0869
Proscan 0392, 0566
QNS 1367
RadioShack 0869
RCA 0566, 0392, 0143, 0855
Samsung 1109, 1276
Sky 0856, 0099, 1856
Sony 0639, 1639
Star Choice 0869
Star Trak 0869, 0772
Thomson 0566, 0392
Tivo 1142, 1442
Toshiba 0790, 0749, 1749, 1285
UEC 1333, 1358
Uniden 0724, 0722
Video Cipher II Plus 0361
Zenith 0856, 1856

116

1-29
MEMO

1-30E
 RDR-HX900
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

Set

Upper case
(Page 2-2)

Front panel section

(Page 2-6)

FR-215 board
Function door
FL-140 board
(Page 2-7)
(Page 2-9)

Power block EPG-001 board D.C. fan

RD-55 board HDD, CN-220 board
(Page 2-5) EPG bracket (Page 2-3)
(Page 2-3) (Page 2-4)
(Page 2-2)

RD bracket
(Page 2-5)

DVD drive Rear panel

(Page 2-8) (Page 2-9)

AV-92 board
(Page 2-10)

2-1
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. UPPER CASE
2 Two tapping screws
4 Upper case

3 Three tapping screws

(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 10)

1 Two tapping screws

2-2. EPG-001 BOARD, EPG BRACKET

1 Flexible flat cable
(FRE-1) (CN606, 25P)
2 Flexible flat cable
6 Harness (FRE-2) (CN604, 13P)
(XX-XX) (CN607, 7P)

3 Flexible flat cable 7 Three tapping screws

(FRE-1) (CN605, 25P) (+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

8 EPG-001 board

5 Harness
(XX-XX) (CN608, 5P)
4 Flexible flat cable
(FRE-2) (CN602, 13P)
q; Tapping screw
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)
qa EPG bracket

9 Two tapping screws

(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 10)

2-2
2-3. D.C. FAN
3Remove the D.C. fan in the
direction of the arrow.

2 Two tapping screws

(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 10)
1 Connector (CN102, 3P)

2-4. RD-55 BOARD

1 Six tapping screws
9 RD-55 board (+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6) 5 Flexible flat cable
8 Flexible flat cable (FRD-3) (CN1101, 40P)
(FRH-2) (CN1102, 40P)
4 Flexible flat cable
7 Harness (FRE-1) (CN1903, 25P)
(RP-121) (CN1801, 15P)
6 Harness 3 Flexible flat cable
(XX-XX) (CN2201, 6P) (FRE-2) (CN1905, 13P)

2 Flexible flat cable

(FRA-7) (CN1904, 27P)

2-3
2-5. HDD, CN-220 BOARD

2 Four tapping screws

(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

4 HDD section 1 Flexible flat cable

(FRH-2) (CN1102, 40P)

3 Harness
(RH-67) (CN4, 4P)

6 Three non-halogen tapes

8 Flexible flat cable
(FRH-2) (CN1802, 40P)

qs Hard disk (160GB)

9 CN-220 board

7 Connector
(CN1801, 40P)
5 Harness
(XX-XX) (4P)

qg HDD bracket
qa Two HDD screws

qd Two dampers (SY)

qf Two dampers (SY)

q; Two HDD screws

2-4
2-6. POWER BLOCK
4 Five tapping screws
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 8)

7 Power block

1 Harness
(RP-121) (CN2, 15P)
3 Connector (CN3, 13P)

2 Harness
(RH-67) (CN4, 4P)

5 Tapping screw
(+P3 (B type)(3-CR) B3 × 8)

6 Two miniature card spacers

2-7. RD BRACKET
4 Three tapping screws
5 Separation plate
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)
1 Two XXXXX
7 Tapping screw 2 Three tapping screws
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6) (+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

3 XXXXX
8 Front spring

6 Tapping screw
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)
q; RD bracket

9 Tapping screw
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

2-5
2-8. FRONT PANEL SECTION

2 Tapping screw
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

3 Front spring (LR) (AL)

6 Seven claws

4 Tapping screw
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

5 Front spring (LR) (AL)

7 Front panel section

1 Cursor knob

2-6
2-9. FUNCTION DOOR

8 Front panel section

1 Escutheon

7 Eight claws
2 Power button

4 Ground plate (A)

3 Tapping screw
(B2.6 × 6B CR)
5 Shaft damper

To install the shaft damper, place the flat

surface face upward while the function door
is closed. Then install the shaft damper in the
described state. 6 Open button assy

Flat surface
Shaft damper

qd Ground plate (B)

qg Function door

qs Two tapping screws

qa Peel off the adhesion part, (B2.6 × 6B CR)
remove the function door shaft (a)
qf Peel off the adhesion part,
remove the function door shaft (B)

q; Two tapping screws

(B2.6 × 6B CR)
9 Three claws

2-7
2-10.DVD DRIVE

2 Harness
(RD-122) (CN5, 4P)

3 Four tapping screws

1 Remove the harness that is (+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)
fixed on the clamp.

Clamp
4 Remove the DVD section
in the direction of the arrow A.

qa Flexible flat cable

5 Clamp (FRD-3) (40P)

q; CN-199 board (40P)

6 Two tapping screws

(+B3(3-CR) B3 × 3)

7 MD (R) (M) bracket

qs DVD drive

8 Two tapping screws

(+B3(3-CR) B3 × 3)
9 MD (L) (M) bracket

2-8
2-11.FR-215 BOARD, FL-140 BOARD

7 Harness
(XX-XX) (CN104, 6P)

6 Harness
(AL-70) (CN105, 11P)

8 FL-140 board

5 Three tapping screws

(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

(CN102, 9P)

(CNXXX, XP) 2 Flexible flat cable

1 Flexible flat cable (FAR-4) (CN001, 17P)
(FLR-4)
4 XXX-XXX board

3 Three tapping screws

(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

2-12.REAR PANEL

4 Rear panel

1 Five tapping screws

(+P3(3-CR) B3 × 8)

2 Nine tapping screws

(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 10)

3 Screw
(+B3(3-CR) B3 × 3)

2-9
2-13.AV-92 BOARD

1 Harness
(AL-070) (CN801, 11P)
2 Connector (CN3, 13P)
4 Seven tapping screws
(+BV3(3-CR) B3 × 6)

3 Flexible flat cable

(FRA- 4) (CN603, 17P)

7 Flexible flat cable

(FRE- 2) (CN502, 13P)

8 Flexible flat cable

(FRE- 1) (CN503, 25P)
6 Flexible flat cable
(FRA- 7) (CN501, 27P)

q; AV-92 board

9 Two miniature card spacers

2-10
2-14.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

Power block

CN-220 board

EPG-001 board

FL-140 board

AV-92 board
RD-55 board

FR-215 board

2-11
MEMO

2-12E
 RDR-HX900
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)

CN1001

AV-092 BOARD (1/2) 1 RECY

Q706 3 RXD

IC701 UNSW6V Q1104

4 TXD
VIDEO IN SELECT 5 IR SENSE

Q705
REC CB
38 15 Cb
TU VIDEO
40 CVBS IN1
Q703
IC1101
7 L2 Y/C 12 C IN3 REC Y STB CONTROL
Y OUT 29 19 RECY
22 Y IN3 J1102
Q704 TXTSCL
9 L1 Y/C 10 C IN2 REC C 14 B3 1 31
C OUT 31 23 RECC
20 Y IN2
Q601,602 CN501(1/2)
TXTSDA
3 L3 Y/C 14 C IN4 SLICE V 23 XIN 2

5 24 Y IN4 X1101
CSYNC OUT 34 8MHz
V2
44 CVBS IN3 XOUT 3
Q412 Q407 VSYNC OUT 36
V1
42 CVBS IN2
V3 V DET OUT 43
1 CVBS IN4 J1101
Q406,408,413
V2 YOUT_SEL
6 CB IN
INSEL1 5
Q410 V1
1 8 C IN1
INSEL3
V3
18 Y IN1 COMPONENT-H
TO
RD-055 BOARD
CN1904,CN1905
CN504(1/2)

6 EPG SW2

7 EPS SW1

TU401 CN501(2/2)
AERAL IN VIDEO 18 AADDATA
SDT0 21 3 AI SDT

OUT R 26 TU L/R 9 AADBCK

L 27 36
L/R IN1
IC201 BICK 22 AADLRCK
PL2256L1
5
AI BCK
AUDIO AMP/ADC LRCK 23 1 AI LRCK
SCL 4 FA INL/R 5 256 FS
L/R IN3 MLCK 24 9
SDA 5 40

21 7 XAADRST
L/R IN2 PDN 25 2 AADXRST
25 38

AFT 16 3 ADSMUTE
L/R IN4 SMUTE 27 3 SMUTE
RF_AGC 17 42
SEL 0 3

SEL 2

CN801 TO
CN105 EPG-001 BOARD
J101
2 Y2 IN,C2 IN 2 L2 Y/C EPG SW1 45 CN602
LINE 2 IN Y C
4 4 109 SYNCIN EPG SW2 46
S VIDEO 4 IT XRST
S2 SW
1 1 113 CVIN1 IT REQ 18
V2 IN L2CVBSIN V2 6 IT SCLK
6 6 5 CSYNC IT SOUT 38
8 IT SIN
8 L2 IN,R2 IN 8 FA IN L/R 72 H DET IT CLK 40
10 IT SOUT
VIDEO 10 10 17 SYNC V
IC603 ITXRST 56
CTRLS 12 IT REQ
76 S2SW SYSTEM CONTROL ONDO 96
Q617 13 TEMP
AUDIO L

AUDIO R
FL-140 BOARD 87 TU VDET X OUT 12
X601 CN502
57 TU SCL 10MHz
(1/3) 58 TU SDA X IN 14
UNSW5V

XCIN 9 Q616
116 TU AFT
Y IN X602
Y 83 SAP DET 32.768KHz
85 TA MUTE XCOUT 10
CB IN
CB 79 MAIN SAP
88
1 TU S/B D
CR
CR IN
54 TU FMONO
90
75
INSEL 1/2/TU
IC061
Q402,403
104 TU G MAX 107 CN603 CN001
AGC REMOTE
84 AUTO PRESET IR
SIRCS 2 12 6 1 COMMANDER 2 UNSW5V
RECIEVER S101

IC604 KEY1
CN002
KEY1
POWER

KEY 1 97
KEY 2 98
5
11
KEY2
13
7
S012-017
4
LED RST
FLD CS
6
IC101
L1 Y/C
UNSW6V 2 RESET 1 11 RESET FUNCTION LED CK ND101
KEY3
KEY 3 99 7 11 KEY 5 LED DT 5 FLD FLOORESCENT
KEY4 SW1-SW5 DRIVER INDICATOR
KEY 4 100 9 9 S041-S043 S036,037 S021-027 8 2
FLD CS TUBE
L3 Y/C
LINE 4 IN
IC607 FLD DATA 42

FLD CLK 44
4

6
LED RST
LED STB
LED CK
2

8
FUNCTION
KEY
FUNCTION
KEY
FUNCTION
KEY
CN102

LED DT
S VIDEO Y C Y C LED STB 47 8 10
1 VCO 2 115 FSC IN
10

L1CVBSIN V1
X603
1MHz
FLD XRESET 49

FLD CS 50 16
12

14
LED RST
FLD CS
IC062
LED CK
L3CVBSIN V3 LED DT
VIDEO AU1 L/R
IC602 LED
DRIVER

TXT_SCL 28 TIMER REC

5 59 EEP SDA SYNCRO REC
EEP ROM EEP SCL TXT_SDA 29 BLUE AMBER
AU3 L/R
AUDIO L 7 61 EEP WP
FR-215 BOARD FL-140 BOARD
AUDIO R (2/3)

3-1 3-2
RDR-HX900

3-2. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

RD-50 BOARD

CN1904 IC702 IC803 (1/2) 115 256Fs IC901 IC1101 CN-199 BOARD
Cb 15 80 VI 1A 161 512Fs AV ENCODER MR
Y2 106 VIDDT0
23 VI 4A 43-47 | | CN1101 CN1802 CN1801
| 50-52
RECY 19 7 VI 2A Y9 HD 113 VIDDT7 CILENCV 0 45 16 IVIN 0 OS 0 56-59 84,86,91 ENC DT 0 ATP D0 56-59 IDE D0-D15
RECC 23 16 VI 3A VD | | | | | 61 90,92,97 | | 61 23-38 24-38 3-18
HD 72 101 VIDCK
• SILCK • CILENCV 7 53 23 IVIN 7 OS 7 63-65 96,102 ENC DT 7 ATP D15 63-65
1 VI 1B VD 73 103 VIDVD 35,33
• • ENCDATO 36 9 IABD AMCLK 2 256Fs 33MHz 33 CLK33 ATP A0 170,208 IDE A0-A4
8 VI 2B DATACLK 40 104 VIDHD 6,8,5 6,8,5 36,37 DVD
| 185,228
ENCBCKO 37 7 IALACK STCLK 34 13 CLK27 206 3,4 3,4 DRIVER
17 VI 3B 28 • • ATP A4 38
SCL • ENCLRCKO 38 8 IABCK 28 12,14 10 1,21
TO 4 27MHz 182-184
SDA 29• SYNC 11 IVFLD 16,18 12,14 IDE R.W.DREQ.RST 23,25
AV-092 BOARD FSW 27 35 INTREQ 30 205 INTRQ
• SILENCCK 40 4 • 224-226
CN501 RESETB 34 12 IVHSYNC XDIOW 20,40 16,18 IDE INT,DACK,IORDY 27,29
SILENCVD | •
14 IVVSYNC
IC902 IORDY 10 20,40 31
SILENCHD 43
AISDT 3
ADDATI
117 ADDATI SILENCFD
•
25 IVCLK IC903 DMARQ
XDMAC
AIBCK ADBCKI, ADLRCKI 118 ADBCKI 64Mbit XRESET
5
• • CD0-7 CA0-5 SDRAM XDIOR
AILRCK 1 119 ADLRCKI CN-220 BOARD
PLL256FS PLL256LI(IC1704)
256FS 9 57
XSWGBRST2 • SWAHD 0-31(DATA)
AADXRST 2 68 CN1102 CN1802 CN1801
• SWAHD 0-7 HST D0-D15
69 ATS D0 56-59 IDE D0-D15
• SWAHA 0-25(ADDRESS)
71 HST A0-A15 | 61 3-18 23-38 3-18
SWAHA 0-5 63-65
ATS D15
78-80 59-67 ATS A0 99,101 33,35, IDE A0-A4 35,33 HARD
87 6,8,5 36,37
| 94,87 36,37, DISK
95 3,4 38
ATS A4 38 DRIVER
144 1,21, 10 1,21
14•23-25 IC1202 150,151 INTRQ 23,25, 12,14 IDE R.W.DREQ.RST 23,25
155-157 27,29, 16,18 IDE INT,DACK,IORDY 27,29
IC2202 13 161
XDIOW
IC1001 SWAHD0 DT0I 38,60,18 DEC DT0 IORDY 31 20,40 31
512fS | | 37-40 | DMARQ
2 SRC 42-45 61,39,19
CTL0 5 40,42 DEC DT7 XDMAC
• SWAHD15 DT7I XRESET
CTL1 6 4-6 XDIOR
• SWAHA0 72 DEC CLK
LREQ 63 •
• | 47 78 DEC XREQ
SCLK 2 •
• SWAHA21 | 79 DEC XRDY
FL-140 BOARD LKON 58 51 •
• 64
•
DEC XERR IC1102
(3/3) LPS 59 12,13 93,94,96 73 DEC XSTRT 256Mbit
TPA +/- 15-18 512Fs
1 2 2 VD0 40 22 ACLK CDIN2I 31 BCLK17 SDRAM
TPB +/- 43 D0 5,6, 2 PHY_D7 | 33MHz • •
2 3 3 | 8,9, | 156 CRPCLKI CDIN1I 32 36
SPDIF
| | | VD7 47 • •
3 4 4 46 D7 11,12, 11 PHY_D0 27MHz 158 CLKI CDBCKI 34 LRCK59
14,15 • • •
4 5 5 160 SCLKI CDLRCKI 35 DADTA
37
104 AMCLK
CN103 CN104 CN2201 50 VCLKI
IC2102 TDO,TDI 97-99 180 TDO
DV IN TCK,TMS 101 201-203 TCK,TDI
51 VCLKO
P_D0-D15 TRST 102 222 TRST,TMS IC1304
DVSIMCK
IC2105 102 APWM
IC1305
IC2106 48 AFSI AD1-10
64Mbit SDRAM
PLL
INVERTER
IC803 (2/2)
XSWGBRST2 3 IC2103
CN1905
SDRAM IC303 IC1301
SMUTE 3 Q1303 CN1903
EPGRST 5 SHHD 0
IC304 DVO 0
84-87 30,29
DEC DT 0 SILNZCVA 0 128
| |
DI1D0
| | | PO RR C26 25 CR/R
| 89-92 27-22
EPGSDA 1 DVO 7 DEC DT 7 SILNZCVA 7 135 DI1D7
SHHD 31 LRCKO 28 20 DECLRCKI SILNZCVB 0 DI2D0
EPG SCL 2 • • 145-148 Q1302
TO SHHA 0 BCKO 29 19 DECBCKI | |
EPG-001 BOARD IT XRST 4 | • • 150-153 PO RB D26 23 CB/B
• SILNZCVB 7 DI2D7
IT SCLK SHHA 25 DO 30 16 DECSPDI
CN604 6 • • SILPBCK 122 SILPBCK
IT SIN 8
• IC104 ACD120 24 18 DECDATI
SILPBFD 124-126 SILPBFD Q1301
IT SOUT
•
10 IC112 95 SILPBHD 139 SILPBHD
PO Y E26 21 Y/G
• 95-98 TRST,TCK SILPBVD 141-143 SILPBVD
IT REQ 12 IC103 IC301 102 TMS,TDI SELEECK SELEECK
TEMP 13 TDO SELEEFD SELEEFD Q1305
SYSTEM CONTROL IC305 SELEEHD SELEEHD
SELEEVD SELEEVD VO Y A21 19 Y
TH1901 IC1203 IC1206 32 DECCLK
IC111 X102
33MHz 64Mbit 512fs DABCKO U26 SYSCK TDO Q1306
EEPROM
CN103 SDRAM DALRCKO SPDO DADATO TDI
TCK VO C A20 17 C
DIAG 156,157 159 155 SWAHA2 SWAHD0
1 TMS
SH RXD2 | | TRST VO YC A19 Q1304
CHECK 3 15 V
IC1402 SWAHA7 SWAHD7
SHHD 0-31

SHHA 0-25

SH TXD2 51-55
4
BUFFER SWAHA 0-25(ADDRESS)
XVMUTE
SWAHD 0-31(DATA) 24 XVMUTE
IC402 RST RST
256Mbit
NAND
IC1601 TO
2CH DAC EPG-001 BOARD
FLASH IC401 CN606
MEMORY
COMA 11 9
66 FLFRI AOUTL • • LCH+/-
IC1501 12 11
57 SPDIFI FLFRO 47 3 SDTI
UNHD 0-31

PLL1FSEL-PLL3FSEL
9 3
59 LRCKI AOUTR • • RCH+/-
• 7 CCLK 10 5
60 BCKI •
8 CDTI
IC201 51 TRST,TMS
IC302 IC307 5
| TCK,TDI 16
IC310 IC204 55 TDO SPDIFO 49
IC309 SYSTEM
128Mbit SHCKIO
CONTROL 512Fs
SIGNAL NOR FLASH 512Fs
UNHA 0-25

MEMORY
7
10 L MUTE
IC106 IC1502
CLOCK BUFFER PLL27MA 16Mbit
IC501 IC1701-1704 SDRAM
1Y0 3
IC108 IC306 PLL27M1-PLL27M3
XAMUTE
•
1Y3 7 IC109 IC308 CPUCK66
PLL PLL33M1-PLL33M2
1 CLKIN GPS3 CLOCK GENERATOR PLL256L1-PLL256L3
1Y1 2 256Mbit
• SDRAM PLL512L1-PLL512L5
1Y2 5
X1701
27MHz
1 SPDIFO

3-3 3-4
 RDR-HX900

3-3. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

AV-092 BOARD (2/2) SW5V

IC603 WIDE 95
(2/2)
SYSTEM Q815,816
IPG-001 BOARD CONTROL IC802
VIDEO SELECT
SPDIFO 1
9 YOUT 24 Y
LCH +/-
11 Q814
CR/R
3 1 25 17 J804
RCH +/-
5 CBOUT 22 PB/CB COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Q813
TO LMUTE 10 CB/B
3 23 15
RD-055 BOARD RMUTE 4
CN1903 XVMUTE 24 Q812 CROUT 20 PR/CR
VIN Y/G
V 15 5 21 12
CIN
C 17
YIN Q811
Y 19 Y
Y/G IN 7 19 8 Y IN
Y/G 21
CB/B IN YOUT 29
CB/B 23 Q810
CR/R IN IC201 IC502 IC504 C
CR/R 25 XX 9 17 6 C IN COUT 31 C Y C Y
ROTA VIDEO ENCODER S VIDEO
CN606 Q809
VIN Q506
8 V
Q201 6 11 15 3 VIDEO IN
CN608 10 CVBS2 R OUT 44 2 RIN VOUT 20 9
RECY 1 8 CVBS1 YIN VIDEOOUT 33
Q202 16 Q504 XVMUTE
TO G OUT 43 3 GIN 3 2 24 7 MUTE1
AV-092 BOARD YOUT 16 1 VIDEO
IR SENSE 5 14 GP2 Q203 J804
CN1101 CIN 16 MUTE2
TXD 4 13 GP1 B OUT 40 4 BIN 11 Q503
5 LINE 2 OUT
RXD 3 COUT 15 14
60,56, DAC DATA0
DOUT 0 31 10 SYNCIN
56,55 SCIN
52-49 | | 2 7 12 17 LCH +/- 9 AOUT L +/-
DAC DATA7 6 • • 5
DOUT 5 26 15 11 7 AUDIO L
UNSW 3.3V 6
23 RCH +/- 3 AOUT R +/-
DACCLK0
DACCLK1

• •
RESET N

21 5 3
1 AUDIO R
PON N

IC503 2
CTL0
CTL1

IC302
PH2

X501 IC501
XX AUDIO AMP
93,94,96 61,62 48 35 VIDEO ENCODER Q309 Q310
Q311
Y/G IN 8 Q505 UNSW12V
6
6 RIN YOUT 14 9 UNSW5V
CB/B IN Q501
16
7 GIN 3
UOUT 15 1 LMUTE XLMUTE J301
16 10
Q313
8 BIN
CR/R IN
11 Q502 22 RMUTE Q305,307
5 COAXIAL
VOUT 13 14 DIGITAL OUT
2 YIN PCM/DTS/MPEG/
2 7 12 SPDIFO SPDIFO DOLBY DIGITAL
1 1 1 OPTICAL
4 CPIN CN605 CN503

IC401
IC402 SYNC SEP
Q406
5 BKPCH CVID 2

1 CSYNC RSET 6

IC301 HSYNC
7 HORIZ
SDRAM
VSYNC
77,76,73, 3 VSYNC
26,29 ROTA DOUT 0 72-70 2,4,5,
68,67, 7,8,10,11, DQ0
31,34,
35,36 88-86 13,42,44,
ROTA DOUT 7 84-82 45,47,48,
80,79 DQ15
50,51,53
133 CE 3 N 113
CN602 23-26 A0
12 ROTA CTL1 111-109 29-34 Q403 Q404
SMUTE 11 • 108,105, 22,35,36,
13 ROTA CYL0
IT XRST 10 104,102,96, 20,21,40 A15
11 PH2 95,114,94,
TO IT SCLK 8 • 99,117,116,
17 PH0 15 LDQM
AV-092 BOARD IT SIN 6 • 98,97,101, CN607
18 PH1 2,3,5,6 39 UDQM TO
CN502 IT SOUT 4 6 EPG SW2
16 /WE AV-092 BOARD
IT REQ 2 7 EPG SW1 CN504
15,16 ROTA DIN O 17 /CAS SW5V
TEMP 1 DQM0 90
19-21 18 /RAS
23-25 DQM1 65
ROTA DIN 7 19 /CS
CE 0 N 64
38 CLK
TEMP 13 OE N 63
131 UART IN 37 CKE
IT REQ 12 MWE N 61
130 UART OUT
IT SOUT 10 CAS N 60 S603
IT SIN 8 48 SCLK 0 RAS N 59 IC302
TO
RD-055 BOARD
IT SCLK 6 IC103 45 SDA 0 SDCS N 53
FLASH MEMORY
CN1905 SMUTE 3 RESET SDCLK 91
EPG SDA 1 SDCLKE 92
AN2 5 119 JTAG RST N 29,31,33,
EPG SCL 2
AN1 6 54 TEST MODE 35,38,40, DQ0
IT XRST 4 4 AN3 POR N 37 42,44,30,
AN0 7
32,34,36,
5
CLKIN 2 IC101 VSYNC N 49
VSYNC 39,41,43, DQ15
EPG RST 45
Q001 GS
CN604
25-18 A0
8-1
/2Q 8 51 HSYNC IN 48,17,16,
S601
RESET 2CP 11 9,10,13 A21
1CP 3
HSYNC 11 /WE
1D 2
12 /RESET
26 /CE
IC102 28 /OE
HSYNC I/F

3-5 3-6
RDR-HX900

3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)

TU401

30V
5V
7 13 9

AV-092 BOARD EPG-001 BOARD

Q702 IC703
SW 9V
1 3
REG
IC404
Q415 Q701

1 30V REG 4
CN101
UNSW 3.3V IC705
2 IC401
4
SW 3.3V
Q414
IC101 IC102 IC103 IC201 IC501
4 1.8V REG 5
5 UNSW 6V TU 5V XX HSYNC I/F RESET ROTA VIDEO ENCODER
4 5
TO REG
6
POWER SW 12V
BLOCK 8 CN504
UNSW 12V UNSW12V
10 3 3
UNSW -8V EPG 3.3V UNSW3.3V
12 1 1 UNSW 3.3V

13
XP-FAIL
IC104 5
SW5V
5

SW -5V 4
SW-5V
4 SW -5V IC301 IC401 IC402 IC502 IC503
2 3.3V
REG
4 IC607 CN503 CN607 IC303 SYNC SEP. INVERTER VIDEO ENCODER IC504
VCO SWA 5V 8 SDRAM COMPARATOR
Q607
FLASH MEMORY
TO
CN501 RD-055 BOARD

IC102 Q603,604
UNSW 6V 12

13
CN002 CN102 Q101,102 T101
SW 5V SW 5V SW -8V
4 5 CN603 CN001 1 9 SWITCHING ND101
REG Q103
SW -8V SW -8V UNSW 5V
3 1 17 3 7
UNSW 6V UN 6V Q002 KEY1
14 4 4 6
UNSW 6V UNSW 5V UNSW 5V
15 3
Q001
IC1101 13
LED_DIM
5

IC103 STB CONTROL 5

KEY1
13
IC101
IC062 ND DRIVE
UNSW 5V CN601
UNSW 5V LED DRIVE
UNSW UN 5V
6 4 2
5V REG D001,002,004,005
UNSW 12V TIMER REC S101
SYNCHRO REC POWER
SW 3.3V BLUE
IC101 AMBER

10V REG
CN102
Q304 SWA 5V
FUN OUT SWA 5V
3 4 OUT IN 2 1 3
FAN
2
ADJ TEL
REG
IC061 FL-140 BOARD
5 1 Q303
IC301 REMOTE
COMMANDER
IC201 IC603 IC602 IC604 IC302 RECIEVER
FAN ON

Q302
AUDIO AMP/ SYSTEM CONTROL EEPROM RESET AUDIO AMP

Q101
FAN_HI -8V ADC
FR-215 BOARD
Q301 D701

TU_PCONT
FAN DET XP_FAIL Q702

J301

DIGITAL VCC
2 Q701
OUT

IC701
VIDEO IN
SELECT

IC801
Q802

2 3
IC802
-5V REG
Q801 VIDEO
SW -5V
BUFFER

3-7 3-8
 RDR-HX900

3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3)

CN1801 CN103
UNSW 6V UNSW 5V
1 FL 7
NOT USE
6
SH 3.3V

IC1804 IC2201
SW 5V DV 3.3V
SW 5V
4
REG
5 5 DV3.3V
REG
4
IC103 IC104 IC111 IC112 IC106 IC108
3 1 SH BUFFER EEP ROM BUFFER CLOCK IC109
256Mbit SDRAM

UNSW 3.3V
4 FL

IC1803
TO
POWER
BLOCK 1 UNSW 1.5V
3 UNSW 1.5V IC201 IC301 IC306 IC401 IC402
REG 6
IC204 IC305 IC310 SWITCH 256Mbit NAND
5 SW 2.5V FLASH MEMORY
FL 128Mbit
FLASH MEMORY SWA BUFFER UNSW BUFFER
6
9 SW 3.3V
FL
10

IC1802
FL FL
11 SW 3.3V SW 1.8V 3 SW 1.8V
FL 1
12 REG 6

2 IC703 IC501 IC803 IC901 IC902 IC1001 IC1101 IC1102 IC2103 IC2102 IC2105 IC2106
GPS3(HOST GLUE) AV GLUE AV ENCODER IC903 AUDIO SRC MR PROCESS 256Mbit SDRAM 16Mbit SDRAM DV I/F INVERTER PLL
SDRAM
P_CCONT 4 1.5V REG 5
14

CN1904
IC701
12 VDEC6V(UNSW 6V)
5 3.3V REG 4
IC1201
13

1
5 1.8V REG 4
AD-84 BOARD IC702 IC1202 IC1203 IC1206 IC2202
CN1903
A5V VIDEO DECODER AV DECODER 64Mbit SDRAM 512 FS PHY
8

SW 3.3V
IC1601
2CH DAC
IC1306

5
V REF
4 IC1301 IC1304 IC1402 IC1501 IC1502 IC1702 IC1701 IC1703
REG
NAZCA IC1305 BUFFER AUDY 16Mbit SDRAM PLL 27MHz BUFFER IC1704
SDRAM 512 FS
256 FS

RD-055 BOARD

3-9 3-10
RDR-HX900

3-6. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)

SWITCHING REGULATOR(POWER BLOCK)

F101
T3.15A/250V P301 1A
D101-104
L T101
1 POWER Q303 Q301 CN4
TRANSFORMER D301 L301
AC IN 12V REG SW 12V REG 1 SW12V TO
HDD&DVD
SW5V
2
N IC301 Q302
4
CN101 L101,102 D401 SHUNT REG
AC INLET
1
4
D451 IC402
L103 5V REG

IC101 5
L501
PC101(1/2)
PHOTO
L401
1 2
D501
SWITCHING 7 COUPLER
4
6 VR401 CN3
D601
8 SW12V

PC101(2/2) 10 UNSW12V
PHOTO COUPLER
IC401 P401 2A
5
UNSW6.0V
SHUNT REG 6 TO
Q451 AV-092 BOARD
SWITCH 13 XP_FAIL
Q501 P501 2.5A
SW 3.3V 4 SW3.3V
REG
2 UNSW3.3V
IC501 12 USW-8V
SHUNT REG
VR501
1 UNSW6.0V

IC503 1 VIN
VOUT 2
5
SW2.5V
SW2.5V REG 4 6
UNSW 3.3V UNSW3.3V
TO
4
REG RD-50 BOARD
IC502 P601 1A
9
SW3.3V
L601
UNSW3.3V REG 12

14 P-CCONT

CN2

3-11 3-12E
 RDR-HX900
SECTION 4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

VHF/UHF
TU401

A INPUT
AV-92 BOARD
CN501 27P CN1904 27P RD-55 BOARD
OUTPUT
TUNER
AI_LRCK 1 1 AI_LRCK CN-199 BOARD
AADXRST 2 2 AADXRST
CN1101 40P CN1802 40P CN1801 40P
AI_SDT 3 3 AI_SDT
GND 1 40 IDE_RST IDE_RST 1
DGND 4 4 DGND
DASP 2 39 GND GND 2
J803 AI_BCK 5 5 AI_BCK
IDE_A3(CS1) 3 38 IDE_D7 IDE_D7 3
DGND 6 6 DGND
B AUDIO L
DGND 7 7 DGND
IDE_A4(CS0)
IDE_A2
4
5
37
36
IDE_D8
IDE_D6
IDE_D8
IDE_D6
4
5
DGND 8 8 DGND
IDE_A0 6 35 IDE_D9 IDE_D9 6
256FS 9 9 256FS
AUDIO R NC 7 34 IDE_D5 IDE_D5 7
DGND 10 10 DGND
IDE_A1 8 33 IDE_D10 IDE_D10 8
DGND 11 11 DGND
IDE_HD16 9 32 IDE_D4 IDE_D4 9
UNSW6V 12 12 UNSW6V
LINE IN VIDEO IDE_INT 10 31 IDE_D11 IDE_D11 10
UNSW6V 13 FLAT CABLE 13 UNSW6V
GND 11 30 IDE_D3 IDE_D3 11
AGND 14 14 AGND
C Cb 15 15 Cb
IDE_DACK
NC
12
13
29
28
IDE_D12
IDE_D2
IDE_D12
IDE_D2
12
13
AGND 16 16 AGND
IDE_IORDY 14 27 IDE_D13 IDE_D13 14
B 17 17 B
GND 15 26 IDE_D1 IDE_D1 15
AGND 18 18 AGND
IDE_R 16 25 IDE_D14 IDE_D14 16
RECY 19 19 RECY

G
GND 17 24 IDE_D0 IDE_D0 17

C
AGND 20 20 AGND
IDE_W 18 23 IDE_D15 IDE_D15 18
S VIDEO G 21 21 G
GND 19 22 GND GND 19
DVD

Y
AGND 22 22 AGND
DRIVE
D

G
IDE_DREQ 20 21 N.C N.C 20
RECC 23 23 RECC FRD-3
NC 21 FLAT CABLE 20 IDE_DREQ IDE_DREQ 21
AGND 24 24 AGND
GND 22 19 GND GND 22
R 25 25 R
IDE_D15 23 18 IDE_W IDE_W 23
AGND 26 26 AGND
IDE_D0 24 17 GND GND 24
FSW 27 27 FSW
IDE_14 25 16 IDE_R IDE_R 25

IDE_D1 26 15 GND GND 26

CN502 13P CN602 13P CN604 13P CN1905 13P IDE_D13 27 14 IDE_IORDY IDE_IORDY 27

E CN001 CN603 17P RESERVED 1 13 RESERVED EPG_SDA 1 1 EPG_SDA IDE_D2 28 13 N.C GND 28

IT_GND 1 1 SW-8V RESERVED 2 12 RESERVED EPG_SCL 2 2 EPG_SCL IDE_D12 29 12 IDE_DACK IDE_DACK 29

FLD_CS 2 2 IT_GND SMUTE 3 11 SMUTE SMUTE 3 3 SMUTE IDE_D3 30 11 GND GND 30

UNSW5V 3 3 IT_GND IT_XRST 4 10 IT_XRST IT_XRST 4 4 IT_XRST IDE_D11 31 10 IDE_INT IDE_INT 31

UN6V 4 4 LED_DT DGND 5 9 DGND EPG_RST 5 5 EPG_RST IDE_D4 32 9 IDE_HD16 IDE_HD16 32

CN002
LED_DIM 5 5 KEY1 IT_SCLK 6 FLAT CABLE 8 IT_SCLK IT_SCLK 6 6 IT_SCLK IDE_D10 33 8 IDE_A1 IDE_A1 33
1 SW-8V
IR 6 6 LED_CK DGND 7 7 DGND DGND 7 7 DGND IDE_D5 34 7 N.C N.C 34
2 IT_GND
KEY2 7 7 KEY3 IT_SIN 8 6 IT_SIN IT_SIN 8 8 IT_SIN IDE_D9 35 6 IDE_A0 IDE_A0 35
3 UNSW5V
FAR-4
F 4 KEY1
LED_RST

KEY4
8
9
FLAT CABLE
8
9
LED_STB
KEY4
DGND
IT_SOUT
9
10
5
4
DGND

IT_SOUT
DGND 9 9 DGND IDE_D6 36 5 IDE_A2 IDE_A2 36

IT_SOUT 10 10 IT_SOUT IDE_D8 37 4 IDE_A4(CS0) IDE_A4(CS0) 37

5 LED_RST
LED_STB 10 10 LED_RST DGND 11 3 DGND DGND 11 11 DGND IDE_D7 38 3 IDE_A4(CS1) IDE_A4(CS1) 38
6 FLD_CS
KEY3 11 11 KEY2 IT_REQ 12 2 IT_REQ IT_REQ 12 12 IT_REQ GND 39 2 DASP DASP 39
7 LED_DT
LED_CK 12 12 IR TEMP 13 1 TEMP TEMP 13 13 TEMP IDE_RST 40 1 GND GND 40
8 LED_CK
KEY1 13 13 LED_DIM
9 IT_GND CN503 25P CN605 25P CN606 25P CN1903 25P
LED_DT 14 14 UN6V
SPDIFO 1 25 SPDIFO SPDIFO 1 1 SPDIFO
IT_GND 15 15 UNSW5V
DGND 2 24 DGND DGND 2 2 DGND
G FR-215 BOARD
IT_GND
SW-8V
16

17
16

17
FLD-CS
IT_GND
Rch+ 3 23 Rch+ Rch+ 3 3 Rch+
CN1102 40P CN1802 40P CN1801 40P
RMUTE 4 22 RMUTE RMUTE 4 4 RMUTE
IDE_RST 40 40 IDE_RST IDE_RST 1
Rch- 5 21 Rch- Rch- 5 5 Rch-
GND 39 39 GND GND 2
AUGND 6 20 AUGND AUGND 6 6 AUGND
CN102 CN105 CN801 11P IDE_D7 38 38 IDE_D7 IDE_D7 3
AUGND 7 19 AUGND AUGND 7 7 AUGND
9 SW-8V S2 SW 1 1 S2 SW IDE_D8 37 37 IDE_D8 IDE_D8 4
A5V 8 18 A5V A5V 8 8 A5V
8 IT_GND Y2 IN 2 2 Y2 IN IDE_D6 36 36 IDE_D6 IDE_D6 5
Lch+ 9 17 Lch+ Lch+ 9 9 Lch+
7 UNSW5V AN GND 3 3 AN GND IDE_D9 35 35 IDE_D9 IDE_D9 6
LMUTE 10 16 LMUTE LMUTE 10 10 LMUTE
H 6

5
KEY1

LED_RST
C2 IN

AN GND
4

5 AL-070
4

5
C2 IN

AN GND
Lch- 11 15 Lch- Lch- 11 11 Lch-
IDE_D5

IDE_D10
34

33
34

33
IDE_D5

IDE_D10
IDE_D5

IDE_D10
7

8
HARNESS DGND 12 14 DGND DGND 12 12 DGND
4 FLD_CS V2 IN 6 6 V2 IN FLAT CABLE IDE_D4 32 32 IDE_D4 IDE_D4 9
DGND 13 13 DGND DGND 13 13 DGND
3 LED_DT AN GND 7 7 AN GND IDE_D11 31 31 IDE_D11 IDE_D11 10
DGND 14 12 DGND DGND 14 14 DGND
2 LED_CK L2 IN 8 8 L2 IN IDE_D3 30 30 IDE_D3 IDE_D3 11
V 15 11 V V 15 15 V
1 IT_GND AU GND 9 9 AU GND IDE_D12 29 29 IDE_D12 IDE_D12 12
DGND 16 10 DGND DGND 16 16 DGND
R2 IN 10 10 R2 IN IDE_D2 28 28 IDE_D2 IDE_D2 13
C 17 9 C C 17 17 C
AU GND 11 11 AU GND IDE_D13 27 27 IDE_D13 IDE_D13 14
DGND 18 8 DGND DGND 18 18 DGND
I J101 C Y CN102 3P Y 19 7 Y Y 19 19 Y
IDE_D1

IDE_14
26

25
26

25
IDE_D1

IDE_D14
IDE_D1

IDE_D14
15

16
LINE 2 IN S VIDEO 3 FAN OUT DGND 20 6 DGND DGND 20 20 DGND
IDE_D0 24 24 IDE_D0 IDE_D0 17
G G 2 FAN SENS Y/G 21 5 Y/G Y/G 21 21 Y/G
IDE_D15 23 23 IDE_D15 IDE_D15 18
1 GND DGND 22 4 DGND DGND 22 22 DGND HDD
GND 22 22 GND GND 19 DRIVE
DC FAN CB/B 23 3 CB/B CB/B 23 23 CB/B
NC 21 FLAT CABLE 21 N.C N.C 20
J301 XVMUTE 24 2 XVMUTE XVMUTE 24 24 XVMUTE
IDE_DREQ 20 20 IDE_DREQ IDE_DREQ 21
VIDEO DIGITAL OUT 1 D IN CR/R 25 1 CR/R CR/R 25 25 CR/R
GND 19 19 GND GND 22
AUDIO L(MONO) 2 VCC
J AUDIO R FL-140 BOARD(1/2) OPTICAL 3 GND
CN504 7P
UNSW3.3V 1 1
CN607
UNSW3.3V
7P IDE_W
GND
18
17
18
17
IDE_W
GND
IDE_W
GND
23
24
4
GND 2 2 GND IDE_R 16 16 IDE_R IDE_R 25
COAXIAL 5
UNSW12V 3 3 UNSW12V GND 15 15 GND GND 26

CN3 SW-5V 4 4 SW-5V IDE_IORDY 14 14 IDE_IORDY IDE_IORDY 27

AGND 1 SW5V 5 5 SW5V NC 13 13 N.C GND 28

UNSW16V 2 EPG-SW2 6 6 EPG-SW2 IDE_DACK 12 12 IDE_DACK IDE_DACK 29

AGND 3 EPG-SW1 7 7 EPG-SW1 GND 11 11 GND GND 30

K SW3.3V

UNSW6V
4

5
CN1101 5P CN608 5P
IDE_INT

IDE_HD16
10

9
10

9
IDE_INT

IDE_HD16
IDE_INT

IDE_HD16
31

32
RECY 1 1 RECY
UNSW6V 6 IDE_A1 8 8 IDE_A1 IDE_A1 33
GND 2 2 GND
DGND 7
RXD 3 3 RXD EPG-001 NC 7 7 N.C N.C 34

SW12V 8 IDE_A0 6 6 IDE_A0 IDE_A0 35

DGND 9 CN101
TXD 4 4 TXD BOARD IDE_A2 5 5 IDE_A2 IDE_A2 36
IR-SENSE 5 5 IR-SENSE
UNSW12V 10 1 GND IDE_A4(CS0) 4 4 IDE_A4(CS0) IDE_A4(CS0) 37

DGND 11 2 UNSW18V IDE_A3(CS1) 3 3 IDE_A4(CS1) IDE_A4(CS1) 38

L UNSW-8V
XP_FAIL
12
13
3
4
GND
SW3.3V
J804 DASP
GND
2
1
2
1
DASP
GND
DASP
GND
39
40

5 UNSW6V
L AUDIO L
SWITCHING REGULATOR CN2
6 UNSW6V
CN1801 15P CN-220 BOARD
7 GND
(POWER BLOCK) UNSW+6V 1
8 SW12V
UNSW6V 1

A_GND 2 R AUDIO R AGND 2

9 GND
A_GND 3 AGND 3
10 UNSW12V
2P UNSW+3.5V 4 UNSW3.3V 4
M AC IN
1 L SW+2.5V 5
11

12
GND

UNSW-8V
V VIDEO LINE OUT SW2.5V 5

2 N SW+2.5V 6 SW2.5V 6
50/60Hz 13 XP_FAIL
D_GND 7 DGND 7
D_GND 8 DGND 8

SW+3.5V
SW+3.5V
9
10
SW3.3V
SW3.3V
9
10
FL-140 BOARD(2/2) CN103 4P

SW+3.5V 11 SW3.3V 11 TPB- 1

G
G

SW+3.5V 12 SW3.3V 12 TPB+ 2 DV

C

IN/OUT
N D_GND 13
S VIDEO
DGND 13 TPA- 3
F_CONT 14 P_CONT 14 TPA+ 4
Y
Y

G
G

D_GND 15 DGND 15

CN2201 6P CN104 6P
GND 1 1 DGND

TPB- 2 2 TPB-

O TPB+
TPA-
3
4
3
4
TPB+
TPA-
SW+12V

SW+12V
SW+5V

SW+5V
A_GND

A_GND

A_GND
A_GND

TPA+ 5 5 TPA+
CN4
CN5

J802 GND 6 6 DGND

J801
COMPONENT
1

3
4

1
2
3

CONPONENT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO IN PR/P /YB
PR/P /YB

RP-121 HARNESS

RH-67 HARNESS

RD-122 HARNESS

16

FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

4-1 4-2
RDR-HX900

4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS WAVEFORMS

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AV-92 BOARD

(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For schematic diagrams) 1 IC405 6 6 IC802 w; qa IC802 ed
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF.
50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and
tantalums.
• All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1 /10 W) un-less
otherwise specified.
kΩ=1000Ω, MΩ=1000kΩ.
4.2 Vp-p 1.0 Vp-p
• Caution when replacing chip parts. 1.0 Vp-p
New parts must be attached after removal of chip. 54.3 ns H H
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, be-
cause it is damaged by the heat.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B,
unless otherwise noted. 2 IC603 0 7 IC802 ws
• 2 : non flammable resistor
• 5 : fusible resistor
• C : panel designation
• f : internal component.
• C : adjustment for repair.
• U : B+ Line
• V : B– Line 1.0 Vp-p
3.1 Vp-p
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms. 30.4 us H
• Voltages are dc between measurement point.
• Readings are taken with a color-bar signals on DVD reference
disc.
• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MW). 3 IC603 qs 8 IC802 wf
• Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production toler-
ances.

Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted

line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
5.2 Vp-p 2.0 Vp-p
Replace only with part number specified.
100 ns H

When indicating parts by reference number, please include

the board name.
4 IC603 <zzb 9 IC802 wl

1.0 Vp-p 2.1 Vp-p

225.5 ns H

5 IC607 7 0 IC802 ea

5.5 Vp-p 1.3 Vp-p

225.5 ns H

WAVEFORMS
AV-92 4-3 4-4
 RDR-HX900

RD-55 BOARD
qd IC1702 34 ql IC2105 2 (JL2127)
1 IC103 A2 (JL127) 7 Q1301 E

4.5 Vp-p
3.3 Vp-p
29.5 ns 50.2 us

2.0 Vp-p 780 mVp-p

H
30.3 ns

qf IC1702 78 w; IC2106 0
2 IC702 7 (S-VIDEO) 8 Q1302 E

4.5 Vp-p
4.4 Vp-p
1.0 Vp-p 37.0 ns 55.5 ns
390 mVp-p
H H

qg IC1702 qs wa IC2202 wa
3 IC702 qh (S-VIDEO) 9 Q1303 E

3.9 Vp-p
3.8 Vp-p
77.0 ns 40.8 ns
570m Vp-p 390 mVp-p
H H

qh IC1702 qg
4 IC702 wd (VIDEO) 0 Q1304 E

4.4 Vp-p

40.7 ns
1.0 Vp-p
780 mVp-p
H H

qj IC1702 qk
5 IC702 ug qa Q1305 E

4.4 Vp-p

44.3 ns

2.0 Vp-p 780 mVp-p

69.8 ns H

qk IC1702 w;
6 IC1202 og qs Q1306 E

4.4 Vp-p

500 mVp-p 81.4 ns

3.9 Vp-p
37.0 ns H

WAVEFORMS
4-5 4-6 RD-55
RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

AV-92 BOARD(1/8)
POWER NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
A
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES-
CN101 13P
JL101
GND 1
JL102
UNSW3.3V 2

GND 3
JL103 B+ B+
SW3.3V 4 SW3.3V
JL104
UNSW6V 5
B TO
SWITCHING REGULATOR UNSW6V 6
B+ B+
UNSW6V
2 TO(2/8)

CN3
GND 7 VIN_GND
JL105 JL117
(SEE PAGE 4-88)
SW12V 8 B+
SW3.3V
GND 9 JL114
JL106 B+ B+
UNSW12V 10 UNSW12V
GND 11
JL107 B- B- 3 TO(3/8)
UNSW-8V 12 UNSW-8V
JL108 B+
XP_FAIL 13 JL113 UNSW5V
C 6 GND

GND
VOUT_GND

IC101
SI-3010KM-TL
IC101 B+

GND

OUT

ADJ
CTL
UNSW6V

IN
9V REG
1 2 3 4 5 R108 TU_GND 4 TO(4/8)
0
IT_GND

4.8

12.2

7.4

1.0
B+
B+
D XP_FAIL
R109
100k
B-
UNSW-8V
FAN_ON ± 0.5% B+
R110 UNSW6V
1 TO(5/8) Q101 0.4 10k B+ 5 TO(5/8)
MUN2213T1 UNSW5V
SWITCH
0 IT_GND
FAN_HI C105 C112
0.1u R111 0.01u C113
B 5600 B 47u B+
FAN_DET ± 0.5% 25V 16V SW3.3V
16V
B+
CN102 3P UNSW5V 6 TO(6/8)
JL115
FAN OUT 3 VIN_GND
E FAN SENS 2
JL116 B+
R118 B+
GND 1 10k SW3.3V
B+ JL110 B+

5.8

5.1
DC FAN SW5V
B-
UNSW-8V 7 TO(7/8)

IC102 4 5

PQ1MX55M2SPQ
R105 VOUT_GND

VIN

VOUT
0
5V REG TU_GND
IC102
JL112
VIN_GND

CONT

GND
B-

ADJ
SW-5V
F IC104 3 2 1
R137 R139
3.3V REG 330k 47k
3.3

1.2
± 0.5% ± 0.5%

B+
IC104 UNSW6V
C103 C108 B+
SI-3010KM-TL R138 1u
0.1u B UNSW5V
B 120k
6 ± 0.5% R107 25 TO(8/8)
0
GND

IT_GND
JL111
TU_GND
B+ R106
G 0
5.8

5.0
GND

OUT

ADJ

CN504 7P
TL

IN

B+
6 5 4 1 UNSW3.3V
TK11250CMCL-G

1 2 3 4 5
GND

VOUT
VIN

2 GND
B+
IC103
5.8

5.8

3.4

1.0

IC103

3 UNSW12V TO
B-
CONT

EPG-001
GND

5V REG 4 SW-5V
NP

R122 JL538 B+ BOARD(1/6)

1200 5 SW5V CN607
R123 1 2 3 JL539
22k EPG_SW2 6 EPG_SW2 (SEE PAGE 4-28)
± 5% 24 TO(5/8) JL540
5.8

1.3

EPG_SW1 7 EPG_SW1
H C110 C109 R124
B+
C104
C116
0.01u
C117
0.01u 10k 1u
47u ± 5% 0.1u B B
16v B B 16V 25V 16V
16

POWER
AV-92 (1/8) 4-7 4-8
 RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

AV-92 BOARD(2/8)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
AUDIO IN R :REC MODE SIGNAL PATH
A REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- P :PB MODE
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
AUINR1

FA_INR REC
AU3INR
PB
8 TO(7/8) AU3INL
C209 C210 C214 C217
FA_INL 47u 47u 10u
47u
B AUINL1
16V 16V 16V 16V
BP
ADGND

R220 R222 R223 R224

47k 47k 47k 47k
± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 0.5%

B+

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

5.0
C TU_R 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34

RIN5

TEST8

RIN4

TEST7

RIN3

TEST6

RIN2

TEST5

RIN1

M/S

CTRL
3.3 JL217 B+

33
1
LIN5 CNS/CAD1

C202 JL218

32
R214
47u 47k 2 WTM1 CCLK/SCL
16V ± 0.5% 2.5 JL219
D

31
3

LIN4 CDTI/SDA
9 TO(4/8)
C203 IC201 0 JL220
R228
22k
R242
18k

30
R215
4

47u WTMO SEL2 INSEL_TU

47k R229 R243
16V AUDIO A/D CONV.
± 0.5% 2.5 0 JL221 22k 18k

29
5

LIN3 SEL1 INSEL_2

IC201 R0 R230 R244
C204 P2.7 JL222 22k 18k 11 TO(5/8)
AK5365VQ

28
R216
6

47u ZELMN SEL0 INSEL_1

47k
16V ± 0.5% 2.5 0 JL223

27
7

LIN2 SMUTE ADSMUTE

C205
10u 3.3 CN501 27P
R217

26
JL501
8

16V FS ALC
47k
E BP ± 0.5% 2.5 3.2
R234
100 JL502
1 AI_LRCK

25
9

TU_L LIN1 PDN 2 AADXRST

R235 JL503
2.5 1.6 560 3 AI_SDT
R508 10K
10

24
R218 LOPIN MLCK
13k R236 4 DGND
± 0.5% 2.5 1.7 22 JL504
11

23
LOUT LRCK 5 AI_BCK
6 DGND
JL523
7 DGND
ROPIN
IPGAR
IPGAL

VCOM

DVDD
ROUT

AVDD

DVSS

SDTO
AVSS

BICK
8 DGND
JL505

F 9 256FS

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 DGND
11 DGND
2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

5.0

2.5

3.3

1.2

1.6
C206
4.7u 12 UNSW6V TO
50V R237 B+ JL506 RD-55 BOARD(1/22)
C213
0.1u 10 13 UNSW6V CN1904
R221
13k B
C208
4.7u ± 0.5% 16V 14 AGND (SEE PAGE 4-43)
50V C216
C211 0.01u R238 15 Cb
22 JL524
0.01u B
B 25V 16 AGND
JL544
25V
G L201
C212 C215
47u 2.2u C218
17

18
B

47uH 16V 50V 47u AGND

B+ B+ 16V
JL507
10 TO(3/8) SWA5V 19 RECY
20 AGND
B+ B+ JL543
SW3.3V 21 G
B+ 22 AGND
2 TO(1/8) UNSW6V JL525
23 RECC
VIN_GND 24 AGND
C219 JL542

H 0.01u
B
25
26
R
AGND
JL541
27 TO(5/8) AD_DGND 27 FSW

REC_C

REC_Y 12 TO(6/8)
REC_CB
16

AUDIO IN
4-9 4-10 AV-92 (2/8)
RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

AV-92 BOARD(3/8)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
AUDIO OUT R :REC MODE
A -REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- P :PB MODE

CN503 25P

SPDIFO 1
JL515
SIGNAL PATH
JL529
DGND 2
JL530 VIDEO SIGNAL
Rch+ 3
AUDIO
R310 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
RMUTE 4 4700 R320
JL531 ± 0.5% 2200
Rch- 5
C313
REC
R311 R323
B AUGND
AUGND
6
JL532 4700
± 0.5%
560p
CH
50V
5600
± 0.5%
IC302 PB
7
JL533 B+
A5V 8 R314 C310 C314 C316
JL534 150p 180p AUDIO AMP
5600 R317 47u
Lch+ 9 ± 0.5% CH 2200 CH R326
50V 50V 16V
JL535 470
LMUTE 10
JL536 B-
Lch- 11
DGND 12

-9.6
JL537 R354

1.4

1.4
R343

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO
TO SPD_GND

0
EPG-001 BOARD(1/6) DGND 13 100k 470
CN605 AUOUTR1
C (SEE PAGE 4-28)
AGND 14
JL516
4 3 2 1 0

Q310
C319 R-9.4 R355

BA4558F-HT
V 15 V 0.1u R330 P0.8
47k 470
F
DGND 16 16V R362 AUOUTR2
JL517 4700 C327 C330
C 17 C 100p 100p
CH CH
DGND 18 50V 50V
JL518 AU_GND 14 TO(7/8)
Y 19 Y C326 C329

IC302
100p 100p
DGND 20 13 TO(7/8) R352

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO
JL519 CH CH
R340 470 50V 50V
Y/G 21 Y/G 4700 AUOUTL1
C320 R331 R-9.4
47k P0.8
D DGND 22 0.1u

Q309
JL520 B R353
CB/B 23 CB/B 5 6 7 8 16V 470
JL521 0 AUOUTL2
XVMUTE 24 XVMUTE

1.3

1.3

12.2
JL522 Q309,310
CR/R 25 CR/R AUDIO MUTE
C311 C315
150p 180p B+
CH CH
50V 50V

R312 R315 R316 C317 R327

4700 5600 2200 47u 470
± 0.5% ± 0.5% 16V

R318
2200
E R313 C312
R321
4700 560p
CH 5600
± 0.5% ± 0.5%
50V

VOUT_GND Q304 B+ B+
2SB1561T100Q SWA5V 10 TO(2/8)
B+
UNSW5V R346 5.1
R302 Q311 1k
D301
1k Q305,307,311 MSB709-RT1
B+ 12.2 12.2 2 M1MA152WK-T1
POWER MUTE R-9.5 2.6 Q313
UNSW12V 3 10.5 P7.4 MSD601-RT1
C302 1 R345 C333 BUFFER
F 47u
16V R307 R303
470
C321
1u
R334
10k
1k 0.1u
B 1.9
10k 11.5 50V 16V
R10.5
C318 P6.8
220u IC301
R309 16V NJM78M05DL1A-TE1
5600 R338 R348 R350 C324
R347 68 47u
R332 Q307 10k 1k 220
B- 10k DTC124TKA-T146 R10.5 16V
P0
Q303 -9.6 R304
MSD601-RT1 220k Q305
-8.9 R0.1
3 TO(1/8) MUN2213T1

GND
OUT
P4.5 DIGITAL OUT
J301

IN
R308
-9.5 100k R335
R2.8
G UNSW-8V
B- -9.6 JL301 R324
0
P0 47k 1 2 3
C328
5
4
COAXIAL
Q302 47u

12.2

5.1
C301
47u 2SD1781K-T146-QR 16V
16V R305 3 GND
10k -8.9 B+ B+
2 VCC OPTICAL

R306 1 D IN

SW3.3V
3.3 3.3
10k
IC301
C304 C306
B+ JL303 47u 47u 5V REG
Q301 16V 16V C307 C308 C309
Q301-304 0.01u 0.01u
MUN2111T1 POWER SWITCH 47u
B B
16V
H GND
25V 25V

16

AUDIO OUT
AV-92 (3/8) 4-11 4-12
 RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
IC404
L402 TK11819MTL
47uH B+
L406
1mH R5.2
P0 T1
IC404 VHF/UHF
IN/OUT

6
AV-92 BOARD(4/8) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R4.7
V-IN
30V REG
A P0 GND

DE-EMOUT
2

5
TUNER R :REC MODE OSC

TU401
P :PB MODE R33.7 R32.0

RF AGC
B+

VIDEO
P0 P0

ADRS
V-OUT
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES-

GND
SDA

SDA
SCL

SCL
30V

AFT
DK

VIF

SIF
L411

BB

5V

5V
R457
47uH 100

C429 C439 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C428 0.1u R441 0.1u
C437 R453

JL419

JL421

JL422
JL423

JL424

JL428

JL406
JL434

JL436

JL437
JL438

JL441

JL442

JL443

JL444
JL445
JL448
JL449
JL435
47u B 1k B
16V 10u 100k 50V
50V 50V
AGC
C443

0
10u
B L408 50V

R480
R482
B+ 47uH B+

22k
R5.2 R5.2

22k
P0 P0 L403
R427 10uH C430
Q402 R4.1 R4.7 1500
P0 P0 0.1u R489

R479
MSD601-RT1 R418

R481
Q408 B 4700
1500 MSB709-RT1 R5.2
Q402,403 C419 P0
2200p R434
R3.6 AGC CONT R1.6 R423 R2.8 100 C432
P0 P0 1M B P0
Q406 50V 100u
R405 R410 MSD601-RT1 6.3V
JL405 100 C418 Q413

JL411
TU_G_MAX 27k 4700p
R0.2 R2.2 MSD601-RT1
R3.7 Q403 P0 D405 B P0 B+
P0 MUN2213T1 R0.6 MMDL914T1 50V

R484
R493
R492

R487
R486

R488
R490
4700
100

100
P0

100

100
1k
1k
C R409
0
C413 C414 R419
R421 R433 R468 R469
47u 0.1u 3900 R424
100k 2700 4700 1k 1500 470
16V B
16V

C415 C416 C417 C435 C434

TU_FMONO
JL408

TU_AMUTE
0.022u 0.001u 0.1u

TU_SAP_D
TU_M/SAP
TU_AUTOP 2.2u 47u

TU_S/B_D
B B B 16V B

TU_SDA
TU_SCL

TU_AFT
25V 50V Q406,408,413 16V
6.3V
VIDEO DET

AGC
D 9 TO(2/8)
TU_R

TU_L
JL416
B+ L409
47uH
TU_VDET
TU_PCONT
15 TO(6/8) TU_VIDEO TU_PCONT
Q414,415 Q407,412 R428
B+ L405 TU_G_MAX
TU_G_MAX
POWER CONTROL Q415 VIDEO BUFFER 1k 10uH
2SB1561T100Q TU_AUTOP
5.2 TU_AUTOP
TU_M/SAP
E JL415
Q414
MUN2211T1
0.1 4.5
R3.4
P0 TU_AFT
TU_M/SAP
TU_AFT
TU_PCONT R440
1k R436 TU_AMUTE 16 TO(5/8)
4.7 R5.2 R491 TU_AMUTE
10k 5.2 P0 R2.8
R426 1k
Q407 R3.4 100 P0 TU_FMONO
P0 TU_FMONO
MSD601-RT1 Q412
R3.4 MSB709-RT1 TU_SAP_D
P0 TU_SAP_D
JL414
TU_S/B_D
TU_S/B_D
C424 R2.8
0.1u P0 C427 C426 TU_SDA
R420 R0.2 0.1u TU_SDA
B P0 47u
1k B TU_SCL
16V 16V 16V TU_SCL

F IC401 JL407
Q410
MUN2211T1
CLAMP
TU 5V REG
B+ B+
UNSW6V
5.7

5.2

R414
0
4 5
SIGNAL PATH
PQ1MX55M2SPQ

VIN

VOUT
IC401

VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
CONT

GND

ADJ

4 TO(1/8) CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL

G 3 2 1
R412 R413
REC
5.7

1.2

R407 220k 100k

1k ± 0.5% ± 0.5% PB
C403 C405 C404 C408
0.1u R411
0.1u 100k 1u 47u
B B
16V 16V ± 0.5% B 16V

16 TU_GND

TUNER
4-13 4-14 AV-92 (4/8)
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B+

AV-92 BOARD(5/8) B+
-9.5 -9.5 B-
A SYSTEM CONTROL R623
Q607
2SD1781K-T146-QR
0 R637
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- 10k
-8.8
CN603 17P
B- JL636
1 SW-8V

WIDE

INSEL_TU
INSEL_2
INSEL_1
FAN_ON
FAN_HI
KEY4

KEY3
KEY2

KEY1
INSEL_C

TU_G_MAX
TU_AFT
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
C659
R :REC MODE 27p
2 IT_GND
P :PB MODE Q603,604,607
R635 R634 CH
50V
R1693 3 IT_GND
2700 2700 3300 JL637

B-
POWER SWITCH
IC607 R671
1M
± 0.5%
IC607
TC7WU04F(TE12R)
5 FLD_DATA
KEY1 JL649
4 LED_DT

UNSW-8V 5 KEY1
B 4.9 DSC C620 2.5 5.0
R1699 C621 R1688 R1640 FLD_CLK JL650

8
27p 1A VCC 0.01u 10k 10k 6 LED_CK
0 X603 8200 JL669
CH 2.4 B ± 0.5% KEY3
50V 3.579545MHz 2.5 25V 7 KEY3
R1636 JL671

7
Q603 3Y 1Y LED_STB
10k 8 LED_STB TO
MUN2211T1 R1700 R1687 JL696
Q604 2.5 KEY4 FR-215 BOARD
5.0 2200 3300 R1635

6
4.9 2A 3A C637 9 KEY4 CN001
MUN2111T1 ± 0.5% 10k JL697
0.01u FLD_RST
10 LED_RST
B
JL698 (SEE PAGE

5
GND 2Y 25V R1633 KEY2
10k 11 KEY2 4-41)
5 TO(1/8) L602 SIRCS JL699
R1696 12 IR
0 47uH R1698
B+ DIMMER JL1601
15k 13 LED_DIM
± 0.5%
C B+ JL607 JL612
B+ JL1603
14 UN6V
B+ B+ B+ JL1605
UNSW5V 15 UNSW5V
R625 R687 R601 FLD_CS JL1606

R1607
R1601

R1605

R1611
B+ 0 JL608 0

R698
B+ 10k

R675

R696
16 FLD-CS

100
R688

100

100
100

0
100

0
0
UNSW6V JL1608
JL609

R1617
R1614
R610 D602 C636 C638 17 IT_GND

10k
10k
R691
2.2 EC10DA40-TE12 0.01u 0.01u

10k
C635
560p
50V
CH
B B
25V 25V
IT_GND

R679
C606 C607 C666

470
47u 0.1u 47u B+
16V B R1695 16V JL610
16V 0 XP_MUTE
XP_MUTE NOT USE
D

0.01u B 25V

25V
25V
25V

25V
25V
ADSMUTE

0.01u B
0.01u B
0.01u B

0.01u B
0.01u B
SLICE_V ADSMUTE

JL1607
JL1610
JL1615

JL1640

JL1633
JL1632
C632

R3.0

R3.3
INSEL_1

C609

P4.9
C645

C646

C648

C640
C647
0.01u

2.0

4.8

2.0

4.8

4.8

5.0

5.0

4.8

4.8

R0
P0

P0
INSEL_1

0
Q616 B INSEL_2 11 TO(2/8)
MSB709-RT1 R1641 R1642 25V
2200 INSEL_2
R618 5.0 5.0 47k 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 INSEL_TU
0 SIRCS
L601 INSEL_TU
B+ 47uH

ANEX1

2.3
FSCIN
VSS3
CVIN1
VDD3
VSS1
1.3
SVREF
SYNCIN

VDD1
0
P97(INSEL_Ct)

VREF
AN0(TU_G_MAXT)

0
AN1(FSWT)
AN2(KEY5T)
AN3(KEY4T)
5.0
AN4(KEY3T)
5.0
AN5(KEY2T)
5.0
AN6(KEY1T)
3.1
AN7(ONDOT)
0
P00(WIDEt)
0
P01(NC)
0
P02(NC)

P03(FAN_ONOFFt)
P04(FAN_SPEEDt)
P05(INSEL_TUt)
P06(INSEL2t)
P07(INSEL1t)
AVCC

AVSS
R695

(TU_AFTT)
10k TU_PCONT
4.5 Q616,617 TU_PCONT
R1683 SWITCH
6800 5.0 INSEL_1
E R613 ± 0.5%
1.6 Q602
R1711
100k
INSEL_1
470
R1684 MSD601-RT1 TU_S/B_D
R4.9
P0 4 P10(TU_V_DETT) 0
R1648
100 TU_VDET
INSEL_2
INSEL_2

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87
1
2200 CLAMP ANEX0(TU_S/B_Dt) R1649 INSEL_TU
4.9 4.8 INSEL_TU
± 0.5% R1.7 D614 P11(TU_PCONTt) 100 TU_PCONT

2
P1.1 RB705D-T146 TB4IN(SIRCSt) R1650 SLICE_V
R611 JL1634 0 0 SLICE_V
39k R1676 P12(TA_MUTEt) 100 TU_AMUTE
18 TO(6/8)

3
2.7 C603
MMDL914T1

R621 R0 R653 10k TB3IN(JUST_CLK)/P93 R1651 YCSEPON

2.0 47u 0 P4.9 100 0 0 0 TU_AUTOP YCSEPON
P13(AUTO_PRESETt)
D613

4
16V JL1641 R654 TB2IN(AV_LINK_INt) R5.0 R1652 HDET
0 CSYNC 0 4.4 P14(SAP_DETt) P0 100 TU_SAP_D HDET
C602 R612 R615

5
47u Q617 TB1IN(CSYNCt) R607 CSYNC
22k 10k C667 0 5.1 CSYNC
16V UN2213-TX FAN_DET P15(P_FAILT) 100
2.2u

6
R661 P90(FAN_DETt) JL681 VSYNC
B 10k 0 0 R1647 VSYNC
6.3V INT4(NC) R1660 220k
Q601

7
R628 R604 BYTE 10k INSEL_C
F MSB709-RT1 10k 100 0 INT5(ERINTT) 0 JL680
R1707 INSEL_C

8
BUFFER C612 CNVSS 10k R1653 R616
22p 1.3 0 JL1616 TU_M/SAP 0
P20(MAIN/SAPt) 100
IC604

9
50V X602 R668 _XCIN JL1617 R1654 S2SW
R674 C613 0 1.5 4.8 0 XP_MUTE S2SW
2 P21(XP_MUTEt)

29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
47k 18p R639 WIDE
19 TO(7/8)
XCOUT JL1618 WIDE
RESET 50V 100 4.6 P22(SYNCHRO_DETT) 0 R642 R1655
R669 _RESET 10k R1644 10k
IC604 0 2.4 5.0 JL1619 100
C614 P23(S2SWT) S2SW FAN_ON
R3112N281A-TR 10p C617 R1656 FAN_ON
R677
470k 4.6 3.2
50V X601
10MHz
0.047u
B 16V
XOUT

VSS
3 IC603 P24(YC_SEP_ONt)
R4.8 JL1620
P1.0
R0
0
R1657
YCSEPON FAN_HI
FAN_HI
27 TO(2/8) P4.9 JL1621 1 TO(1/8)
1

AD_DGND OUT CD C615 2.1 P25(SYNC_POWt) 0 SYNC_POW FAN_DET

C604 10p C618 XIN SYSTEM CONTROL FAN_DET
4.8 0.001u 4.8 0 JL1622
50V 0.01u P26(DSELt) R1661
IC603
2

VDD CH B R667 10k R1659

VCC
G R505 C634
25V 25V 10k
JL617
4.8
_NMI
M306H2MC-511FPU0
P27(H_DETT) 4.9 JL1623
0 HDET XP_FAIL
3

0.01u GND NC VSYNC 4.9 VSS

CN502 13P 10k
B R657 _INT2(SYNC_Vt) C652
JL508 25V JL605 0 0 JL1624 0.01u
ITREQ5 10k P30(BS_BST_CONTt) R1662
RESERVED 1 RESET DETECT R662 10k B
R0.1 _INT1(IT_REQt) 4.8
JL526 470 P0.3 VCC 25V SYNC_POW
RESERVED 2 R619 _INT0(SLICEON_INt) SYNC_POW NOT USE
JL509 ADSMUTE 10k JL1635 0 0 JL1625
P31(BS_CONV_CONTt) R1663
SMUTE 3 R640 10k
XITRST5 4.8 P81(N.C.T) 0 JL1626
JL527 DIMMER 100 P32(BS_VOL_DETT) R1664
IT_XRST 4 10k
JL622 TA4OUT(DIMMERT) JL1627
0 P33(BS_C_DETT) 0 R1665
DGND 5 R658
CEVISCK5 10k P77(AREA1t) JL1628 10k
TO JL570 R1701 0 P34(BS_DEC_SWt) 0 R1666
TI_SCLK 6 10k 10k R1673
EPG-001 BOARD TA3OUT(BUZZERT)
H (1/6)
CN602
DGND 7 CEVISDO5
R1658
10k
JL624

JL625
0
P75(NC)
P35(BS_BIT_SWT) 0 JL1629
JL1630
R1667
10k
R1672
2200 2200 TU_M/SAP
TU_M/SAP
JL511 R1702 0 P36(NC) 0 R1674 TU_AUTOP
IT_SIN 8 TU_AUTOP
(SEE PAGE 10k R659
10k JL626 4.8 TA2OUT(STB_CNT) 0 JL1631 10k JL1647
P37(XNENTMUTEt) TU_G_MAX
4-27) DGND 9 CEVISDI5 JL1636 P73(AREA0t) JL661 R1668 TU_G_MAX
JL512 R620 0 P40(EEP_SDA) 4.8 100 TU_S/B_D

P50(SYNC_S/V_SWT)
IT_SOUT 10 R1677 10k R1708 R1669 TU_S/B_D
TA1OUT(AV_LINK_OUT T)/CLK2

P54(FLD_XRESETT)
JL528 JL628 5.0 4.8 JL627

TXD0(FLD_DATA T)

P51(SYNC_C_SWT)
0 P41(EEP_SCL) 10k 100 TU_AMUTE

TXD1(IT_SOUTT)

CLK0(FLD_CLKT)

P55(FL_PCONTT)

P47(TU_FMONOT)
D_GND 11 R1678 R1670 TU_AMUTE
ITREQ5 P71/RXD2/SCL(TXT_SCL)

RXD1(IT_SINt)
CLK1(IT_CLKT)

RXD0(FLD_INt)

P56(LED_STBT)

P46(RESET5VT)

P45(IT_XRSTT)
JL513 JL629 5.0 4.8
0 TU_VDET

P53(FLD_CST)

P52(TXT_ENT)
P42(EEP_WPt) 0
IT_REQ 12 TA0OUT/TXD2/SDA(TXT_SDA) TU_VDET

P44(TU_SCL)
P43(TU_SDA)
JL514 ONDO TU_AFT 16 TO(4/8)

P64(H/Bt)
TEMP 13 B+ TU_AFT
TU_SAP_D

SLICEON

EPG_SW1

EPG_SW2
C622 TU_SAP_D
I 100u TU_FMONO

VSS2

VDD2
TU_FMONO

LP2
LP3

LP4
16V

M2
M1
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
IC602 TU_PCONT
TU_PCONT
R1705
EEPROM 0
TU_SDA

R0
P4.8
R4.9
P0
1.4

4.7
1.5

4.8
0

0
0

4.8

0
0
0
4.8

0
4.8
4.8
4.8
4.5

0
0

0
0
4.8
4.8
5.0
5.0
R1706
0
TU_SCL
R622

JL1637

JL1638

JL1639
JL606
JL613
JL618

JL619

JL620
JL621
4700

R605

JL654
JL623

JL642

JL645

JL646
100
FB601 IC602
B+ 0uH
JL614 S-24C04BFJ-TB

R632 R624 4.8 B+

R633
J

8
0 4700 NC VCC

R1602
0

R1606
R1608
R692

R699
4.8

100

R1620
R689

R1626

R1630
R1612
R680

R685
R686

R1628
R678

100

100

100
100
100
R676

100

470
100
2200

10k
R1689

100

470
R673

7
NC WP R1671

0
0

0
510 2200 4.8 0

6
C616 C626 NC SCL
0.001u 47p C664 JL1008 4.8
B C663 47p

5
C623 CH C630 C631 C668 VSS SDA C653
JL1006
JL633 0.01u 50V 0.1u 50V 0.1u 47p 0.01u 0.22
B B B CH B 5.5V
JL631 JL611 25V 16V 16V 50V
JL1004
JL632
R1682 C610

R1709
R1703
R626
R631

R1645

R1646

10k
10k

10k
10k

R602

10k
0.01u

10k

10k
10k
JL615
B
JL616 25V
K JL634
CEVISDI5
R1704 EPG_SW2
CEVISDO5 10k
JL635 B+ 24 TO(1/8)
EPG_SW1
CEVISCK5

R1631
R1632

4700
JL630

4700
FLD_DATA

R1686
CEVISDO5

CEVISCK5
CEVISDI5

LED_STB

FLD_RST
FLD_CLK

FLD_CS
JL1645

TU_FMONO
R1685

XITRST5
0 JL1644

L
JL1005
TXT_SDA
JL1007
TXT_SCL 17 TO(8/8)
16
CTRLS

SYSTEM CONTROL
AV-92 (5/8) 4-15 4-16
 RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

VIDEO SIGNAL
AV-92 BOARD(6/8)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
A VIDEO IN R :REC MODE
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- P :PB MODE REC

PB
B+ 5.0 5.0 B+
UNSW5V
C711 Q702 L701
0.1u R709 2SB1561T100Q 10uH
B 10k
16V 4.2

Q701,702
R710 POEWR SW
1k
B 6 TO(1/8) D701
M1MA152WK-T1
R703
0.1
SW3.3V 4700 3.7
TU_PCONT Q701
C712 MUN2212T1
47u
16V
VIN_GND

B+
C

HDET

VSYNC

CSYNC
C701
0.1u R755 R721
B R717
1k 1k 1k JL716
16V
REC_Y
15 TO(4/8) TU_VIDEO JL717
C702 REC_C
0.1u JL714 JL715
B R1.3 R1.5
16V R754 P0.8 P0.8
C713 1k R0.7 R0.9
0.01u P0.1 P0.1
L2_CVBSIN
C704 R707 10k B R743
L2_YCCIN 0.1u 25V 10k B+ Q703 Q704
20 TO(7/8) L2_YCCIN MSB709-RT1 MSB709-RT1
B
L2_YCYIN 16V C741 C719 C742 C721 C717 Y BUFFER C BUFFER 12 TO(2/8)
L2_YCYIN R716
0.001u 220p 470p 0.01u C727
D CH
25V CH
CH
50V
0.01u
B
25V
B 47u
16V
1k R720
1k
50V
L3_YCYIN
C725

1u B 10V
L1_CVBSIN 0.1u
C703 R711 R712 B

JL706
R725
C714
10k 10k
JL701

0.1u 16V

JL711
1k
JL705

B 16V JL720
REC_CB
JL703

JL718
R4.9

R2.6

R3.0

R1.5

R4.9

R4.5
P0.3

P1.5

P0.6

P0.2

P0.3

P0.3

R713
1.5

1.5

4.9

4.9

2.6

2.3

4.9

0.2

1.5

1.5
0
R1.4
R756 P0.8
1k R0.7
E 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 P0.1
Q705
CVBS-IN3

CVBS-IN2

VCC1

CVBS-IN1

CVBS-OUT

GND1

VSYNC_OUT

VCC3

CSYNC_OUT

GND3

C-OUT

VCC2

LPF-CTL

GND2

TEST
V-DET_OUT

V-DET-FIL

V-DET-IN

Y-OUT

Y-IN5

Y-IN4

STAND-BY-H
R724 MSB709-RT1
1k BUFFER
LA73031V-TLM-E
IC701

COMPONENT-H

IC701
V-DET-CTL

YOUT-SEL
CVBS-IN4

CVBS-IN5

GAIN-CTL

VIDEO SELECT
21 TO(7/8)

INSEL1

INSEL2

INSEL3
CB-IN

GND4
C-IN1

C-IN2

C-IN3

C-IN4

C-IN5

Y-IN3
Y-IN1

Y-IN2
VCC4

REG
N.C.

F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 R757
1k
R2.9
P1.5
1.5

4.9

1.5

1.5

4.9

5.0

2.9

4.9

2.9

2.9

2.5

2.9

1.5

1.5

1.5
EPG_Y 23 TO(8/8)
JL702

JL704

JL707

JL708

JL709

JL710

JL712
R1.4
R759 P0.8
1k R0.7
C726 P0.1
R705
0 0.1u Q706
B C710
0.1u R758 MSB709-RT1
C706 16V
0.1u B 1k BUFFER
G L3_CVBSIN
B 16V
C751
0.1u
B 16V C745 C746 C718 C720 C723
16V
YIN
YIN
0.1u 0.1u C708 47u 0.1u
B 0.01u 0.1u CRIN
B B 16V B C747 CRIN
16V 16V B 16V 0.1u 26 TO(7/8)
L1_YCCIN 25V 16V CBIN
C707 C722 B CBIN
0.1u B 16V 0.01u 16V
L3_YCCIN C709 B
0.1u B 16V 25V
L1_YCYIN
L2_YCYIN
L2_YCCIN

TU_PCONT
TU_PCONT R753
CRIN
CBIN

0
YIN

HDET
HDET
VSYNC
H VSYNC

CSYNC
CSYNC

18 TO(5/8) YCSEPON

INSEL_1

INSEL_2
INSEL_TU
JL1003
SLICE_V

INSEL_C

I
16

VIDEO IN
4-17 4-18 AV-92 (6/8)
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-4 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CN801 11P
1 S2 SW

A L2_YCYIN 2 Y2 IN

AV-92 BOARD(7/8) 3 AN GND

VIDEO OUT 20 TO(6/8) L2_YCCIN 4 C2 IN

SIGNAL PATH 5 AN GND TO
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- FL-140 BOARD
VIDEO SIGNAL L2_CVBSIN 6 V2 IN CN105
AUDIO 7 AN GND (SEE PAGE 4-10)
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL FA_INL
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE 8 L2 IN

REC 9 AU GND

B PB
FA_INR 10
11
R2 IN
AU GND

R859 R873
75 75 J803
8 TO(2/8) JL826
AU1INR

ADGND R AUDIO R
JL827
AU3INR
JL828
AU1INL
5.0 R884
C V
R822
22 0.6
0 JL829
L AUDIO L

AU3INL
Q809 JL830
MSD601-RT1 L1_CVBSIN
R816 0 BUFFER
2200 V VIDEO LINE IN 1/2
JL831
L3_CVBSIN
5.0 JL832
R823 L1_YCCIN
22 0.6
C
Q810 JL833
MSD601- RT1 L3_YCCIN
R817 0 BUFFER D805 D815
D 2200 HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL

2 2
13 TO(3/8) 5.0 21 TO(6/8) R860 R874
R824 75 75

G
22

C
0.6 1 1
Y
Q811 S VIDEO
MSD601-RT1 2 2
R818

Y
0 BUFFER
2200

G
R861 R875
75 1 75 1
D806 D816
Y/G HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL
Y/G JL834
E CB/B
CB/B
CR/R
L3_YCYIN

CR/R JL835
L1_YCYIN
XVMUTE

S2SW R886
0
19 TO(5/8) SPD_GND
R887
J804

WIDE 0 JL836
AUOUTR1

B+ L803 4.9 IC802 B+ AUGND R AUDIO R

F 22uH LA73056-TLM-E 14 TO(3/8)
AUOUTR2
JL837
JL838
4.9

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
1
NC(GND) (GND)NC AUOUTL1
11 C813

2
0 NC(GND) (GND)NC 0.1u AUOUTL2 L AUDIO L
0 Q816 R801 0 4.9 B JL839
0 16V R853

3
MUN2111T1 VIDEO_IN +5V
SWITCH 0 0.4 68 JL840

4
DCCNT1 VIDEO_OUT
Q815 R883 0
R854

5
MUN2213T1 GND GND V VIDEO LINE OUT 1/2
SWITCH 0 0.1 68 JL841
10
6
C_IN C_OUT
3.2 C815 JL842

7
MUTE1 (GND)NC 0.1u
G 0
8
Y_IN Y_OUT
0.4 B
16V
R842
68
JL843
C805 0 -5.0
R825 5.0
9
9
0.01u NC(DCCNT2) -5V
B Y/G 22 0.6 R803 -5.0 R843
B+ C816 D802 D811
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

25V 0 NC(GND) -5V 68

SW5V Q812 0.1u HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL
L801 R819 MSD601-RT1 B
IC801 0 NC(GND) (GND)NC 16V 2 2
L79M05TLL-SONY-TL-E 47uH 2200 BUFFER 0 4.9 C814
R840 R841

G
G
Y_IN(NC) +5V(NC) 47u
10k 10k

C
0 0.4 16V

C803
DCCNT2 8 Y_OUT
1 1
S VIDEO
R826 5.0 GND GND
47u 22 2 2
IC801

Y
Y
16V CB/B 0.6 0 0.1

G
7

G
Cb_IN Cb_OUT
H Q813 3.2
GND

OUT

R820 MSD601-RT1 1 1
MUTE2 (GND)NC
IN

-5V REG 2200 0 D803 D812

BUFFER 0 0.1
Cr_IN Cr_OUT R844 HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL
1 2 3
C806
0.01u C811
-5.0
-5V 6 -5V
-5.0 68 JL844

Q802 -5.0 B 0.1u R845

2SD1781K-T146-QR R827 5.0
25V 22 B 68 JL845
CR/R 0.6 16V
B- -9.5 -9.5
UNSW-8V
R821 B-
2200 0
R802
10k
-8.8
7 TO(1/8) C804 Q814 C812
47u L802 MSD601-RT1 R829 47u
I Q801,802 R809
B-
16V 47uH BUFFER 3300 16V

POWER SW 2200 R856

B+
SW3.3V
3.3 3.2
IC802 68 JL816

JL817
J802
R805
0 VIDEO BUFFER
C801 R857 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Q801 C802 PR, P, YB
0.01u 47u 68
MUN2111T1 B JL818
16V
25V
VOUT_GND R858
68
R885 JL813
J801
0
J TU_GND
JL814
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
VIN_GND PR, P, YB
B- JL815
SW_5V R862 R855 R852
75 75 75
CRIN
CBIN 26 TO(6/8)
YIN
16

VIDEO OUT
AV-92 (7/8) 4-19 4-20
 RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AV-92 BOARD(8/8)
STB CONTROL
-REF.NO.:10000 SERIES- NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
A Q1104
R1132
330
D1101 2SB1561T100Q
EC10DA40-TE12
B+ 5.3
UNSW6V
0 R1107
R1110 330
B+ 2200 D1102
25 TO(1/8) UNSW5V 5.2 R1115
HZM6.8ZWA1TL 0
TU_GND J1101
R1120
IT_GND 1k SET TOP BOX CONTROL
D1103
IC1101 C1102 HZM6.8ZWA1TL R1113
B S3C80F9XKA-SO77
5.0
47u
16V
C1101
0
R1121
VDD R1106 C1104

32
0.01u 1k

1
VSS B 2200 470p
P3.1/REM/ B
5.0 T0CK/SCLK 5.0 D1104

31
2
XIN HZM6.8ZWA1TL
P3.3/T0PWM/ JL1104 C1103 R1122
0.3 T0CAP/T1CAP/SDAT 47u R1111 220

30
3
XOUT 16V 10k
R1108
0 J1102
0 P2.4/INT9 D1105 R1103

29
4
HZM6.8ZWA1TL R1123 1k CONTROL S IN
X1101 TEST
JL1105 220
8MHz 0 P2.3/INT8

28
5 P2.5/INT9
C R1102
1k P2.2/INT7
R1119
0

27
EPG_Y 23 TO(6/8)
6

P2.6/INT9

C1107
C1108
5.0

100p
CN1101 5P

100p
P2.1/INT6

26
7

RESET 1 RECY
R1116 TO
100k P2.0/INT5 0 R1117 EPG-001 BOARD

25
8

10k 2 GND
P2.7/INT9 (1/6)
5.0 3 RXD CN608
P0.7/INT4 R1125

24
(SEE PAGE 4-28)
9

P1.0 10k
IC1101 P0.6/INT4 5.0
4 TXD
10

23
P1.1 5 IR_SENSE
STB CONTROL FB1101
D P0.5/INT4 5.0 R1126 0uH
11

P1.2 22 10k

P0.4/INT4 5.0 R1127

12

21

P1.3 10k
5.0
P0.3/INT3 R1128
SIGNAL PATH
13

20

P1.4 10k
5.0 P0.2/INT2 5.0 R1129
14

19

TXT_SCL 10k VIDEO SIGNAL

P1.5
P0.1/INT1 5.0 R1130
15

18

P1.6 10k CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA

P0.0/INT0 5.0 R1131
E
16

17

17 TO(5/8) P1.7 10k REC

TXT_SDA
PB

16 CTRLS

STB CONTROL
4-21 4-22 AV-92 (8/8)
RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CN-199 BOARD
RELAY
A -REF.NO.:30000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT

CN1801 40P CN1802 40P

IDE_RST 1 40 IDE_RST

GND 2 39 GND

IDE_D7 3 38 IDE_D7

B IDE_D8

IDE_D6
4

5
37
36
IDE_D8

IDE_D6

IDE_D9 6 35 IDE_D9

IDE_D5 7 34 IDE_D5

IDE_D10 8 33 IDE_D10

IDE_D4 9 32 IDE_D4

IDE_D11 10 31 IDE_D11

IDE_D3 11 30 IDE_D3

C IDE_D12 12 29 IDE_D12

IDE_D2 13 28 IDE_D2

IDE_D13 14 27 IDE_D13

IDE_D1 15 26 IDE_D1

IDE_D14 16 25 IDE_D14

IDE_D0 17 24 IDE_D0
TO
IDE_D15 18 23 IDE_D15 RD-55 BOARD(1/22)
CN1101
GND 19 22 GND
(SEE PAGE 4-44)
D DVD
N.C 20 21 N.C

IDE_DREQ 21 20 IDE_DREQ

GND 22 19 GND

IDE_W 23 18 IDE_W

GND 24 17 GND

IDE_R 25 16 IDE_R

GND 26 15 GND

IDE_IORDY 27 14 IDE_IORDY

E GND
IDE_DACK
28
29
13
12
N.C
IDE_DACK

GND 30 11 GND

IDE_INT 31 10 IDE_INT

IDE_HD16 32 9 IDE_HD16

IDE_A1 33 8 IDE_A1

N.C 34 7 N.C

IDE_A0 35 6 IDE_A0

F IDE_A2 36 5 IDE_A2

IDE_A4(CS0) 37 4 IDE_A4(CS0)

IDE_A4(CS1) 38 3 IDE_A4(CS1)
DASP 39 2 DASP

GND 40 1 GND

RELAY
CN-199 4-23 4-24
 RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CN-220 BOARD
RELAY
A -REF.NO.:30000 SERIES-
XX MARK:NO MOUNT

CN1801 40P CN1802 40P

IDE_RST 1 40 IDE_RST

GND 2 39 GND

IDE_D7 3 38 IDE_D7

B IDE_D8

IDE_D6
4

5
37
36
IDE_D8

IDE_D6

IDE_D9 6 35 IDE_D9

IDE_D5 7 34 IDE_D5

IDE_D10 8 33 IDE_D10

IDE_D4 9 32 IDE_D4

IDE_D11 10 31 IDE_D11

IDE_D3 11 30 IDE_D3

C IDE_D12 12 29 IDE_D12

IDE_D2 13 28 IDE_D2

IDE_D13 14 27 IDE_D13

IDE_D1 15 26 IDE_D1

IDE_D14 16 25 IDE_D14

IDE_D0 17 24 IDE_D0
TO
IDE_D15 18 23 IDE_D15 RD-55 BOARD(1/22)
CN1102
GND 19 22 GND
(SEE PAGE 4-44)
D HARD DISK
DRIVE
N.C 20 21 N.C

IDE_DREQ 21 20 IDE_DREQ

GND 22 19 GND

IDE_W 23 18 IDE_W

GND 24 17 GND

IDE_R 25 16 IDE_R

GND 26 15 GND

IDE_IORDY 27 14 IDE_IORDY

E GND
IDE_DACK
28
29
13
12
N.C
IDE_DACK

GND 30 11 GND

IDE_INT 31 10 IDE_INT

IDE_HD16 32 9 IDE_HD16

IDE_A1 33 8 IDE_A1

N.C 34 7 N.C

IDE_A0 35 6 IDE_A0

F IDE_A2 36 5 IDE_A2

IDE_A4(CS0) 37 4 IDE_A4(CS0)

IDE_A4(CS1) 38 3 IDE_A4(CS1)
DASP 39 2 DASP

GND 40 1 GND

RELAY
4-25 4-26 CN-220
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-89 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

EPG-001 BOARD(1/6) CN605 25P

JL641
A CONNECTOR,POWER SIGNAL PATH SPDIFO
25 SPDIFO
JL642
-REF.NO.: SERIES- JL643
24 DGND
VIDEO SIGNAL Rch+
AUDIO 23 Rch+
RMUTE
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL JL644
22 RMUTE
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE Rch-
21 Rch-
REC
20 AUGND
JL645
R627
PB 0 JL646
19 AUGND
A5V
18 A5V
Lch+ JL647
B LMUTE JL648
17
16
Lch+
LMUTE
Lch- JL649
15 Lch- TO
AV-92 BOARD(3/8)
14 DGND CN503
JL650
13 DGND (SEE PAGE 4-11)
12 AGND
JL651
V_OUT 11 V
10 DGND
JL652
C R619
C_OUT 9
8
C

CN604 13P R603 DGND

JL621 0 JL678 JL653
150
EPG_SDA 1 R604 EPG_SDA Y_OUT 7 Y
150 JL622 JL679
EPG_SCL 2 EPG_SCL 1 TO(4/6) 6 DGND
JL633 SMUTE R618 JL654
SMUTE 3 0 EPG_RST Y/G_OUT 5 Y/G
JL634 IT_XRST
IT_XRST 4 4 DGND
JL655
EPG_RST 5 CB/B_OUT 3 CB/B
JL635 IT_SCLK JL656
TO IT_SCLK 6 2 TO(2/6) 2 XVMUTE
RD-55 BOARD(1/22) R628 JL657
D CN1905
(SEE PAGE 4-43)
DGND

IT_SIN
7
JL636
0
IT_SIN
CR/R_OUT 1 CR/R

8 V_IN
V_IN CN606 25P
DGND 9 C_IN SPDIFO JL661
JL637 IT_SOUT C_IN 1 SPDIFO
IT_SOUT 10 Y_IN JL662
JL638 Y_IN 2 DGND
DGND 11 Y/G_IN Rch+ JL663
JL639 IT_REQ Y/G_IN 3 Rch+
IT_REQ 12 CB/B_IN RMUTE
JL640 TEMP CB/B_IN 4 RMUTE
TEMP 13 CR/R_IN Rch- JL664
CR/R_IN 5 Rch-

CN602 13P EPG_SW2 6 AUGND

E RESERVED 13
JL619

JL620
JL665
JL666
7 AUGND
A5V
RESERVED 12 8 A5V
JL601 SMUTE Lch+ JL667
SMUTE 11 9 Lch+
JL602 IT_XRST LMUTE JL668
IT_XRST 10 10 LMUTE
Lch- JL669
DGND 9 11 Lch-
TO JL603 IT_SCLK TO
AV-92 BOARD(5/8) IT_SCLK 8 B+ 12 DGND RD-55 BOARD(1/22)
SW9V JL670 CN1903
CN502
DGND 7 B+ 13 DGND
(SEE PAGE 4-15) JL604 IT_SIN UNSW3.3V (SEE PAGE 4-43)
IT_SIN 6 B+ V_IN V_IN 14 AGND
F DGND 5
JL605
B-
SW5V 5 TO(2/6) 3 TO(3/6)
EPG_CVBS
JL671
15 V
IT_SOUT SW-5V
IT_SOUT 4 16 DGND
JL606 GND C_IN JL672
DGND 3 17 C
JL607 IT_REQ B+
IT_REQ 2 UNSW3.3V 18 DGND
JL608 TEMP B+ Y_IN JL673
TEMP 1 SW5V 19 Y
B- 6 TO(3/6)
R609 SW-5V 20 DGND
22k Y/G_IN JL674
S601 GND 21 Y/G
(RESET)
B+ 22 DGND
G R608
39k
R629
10k B+
UNSW3.3V
7 TO(4/6)
CB/B_IN JL675
JL676
23 CB/B
UNSW1.8V
R630 24 XVMUTE
10k GND CR/R_IN JL677
25 CR/R
0 B+
UNSW3.3V
3.1 8 TO(5/6) R623
560 CN608 5P
GND
Q001 1 RECY
MSD601-RT1 B+ C606
SWITCH 2 GND T0
SW5V Y/G_IN R624 100p
9 TO(6/6) AV-92 BOARD(8/8)
0 CN1101
GND RXD R625 3 RXD
0 (SEE PAGE 4-22)
H 4 TO(6/6)
TXD
IR_SENSE
R626
0
C607
100p
4 TXD

IC703 EPG_SW2
JL680
5 IR_SENSE

9V REG JL681
EPG_SW1
B-
Q702 B+
2SB1561T100Q IC703 C604
BA09FP-E2 B+ 47u
B+ 6.3V CN607 7P
B+
12.1 12.1 1 UNSW3.3V
I R723
10k IC705
PQ1L183M2SPQ JL683
R610
100
S603
R620 0
R621 2 GND
11.4 B+ 0 T0
3 UNSW12V
GND
OUT

C717 R622 AV-92 BOARD(1/8)

1.3 B+ B-
IN

Q701,702 R725 0.1u 0 CN504

1

R605 4 SW-5V
SWITCH 10k B B+
1.8
IC705 R611
JL658 0 (SEE PAGE 4-8)
2

1 2 3 JL685 JL684 R617 R606 5 SW5V

Q701 C718 3.3 3.3 100 JL659
2200 0
0.1u
3

MSD601-RT1 6 EPG_SW2
12.1

9.1

1.8V REG R616 R607

0 B B+ JL660 0
B+ 2200
7 EPG_SW1
0.7 B+ B+ C603
47u
R722 16V
10k R724 C719 C720 C721 C602
47u 47u
J 10k
6.3V
0.1u
B 6.3V
47u
16V
C703 C707 C711 C715
47u 0.1u 0.1u 47u
16V B B 16V
16

CONNECTOR, POWER
EPG-001 (1/6) 4-27 4-28
 RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-89 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

EPG-001 BOARD(2/6) Q501-506 C521

BUFFER
A RGB ENCODER 10u
16V

-REF.NO.: SERIES- IC503 IC503

CB/B_IN

IC501 SWITCH
2.5
NJM2284V(TE2)

2.5
R505
1M R532
4700
R542
4700
IN1A

16
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE CB/B_OUT

1
VIDEO ENCODER IN1B C540 Q501
MSB709-RT1 0.7
IC501 0 47u R527
GND1 6.3V 10k

15
TA1287FG(EL) Y/G_OUT

2
R504 CTL1 0
Q505
R517 1M MSB709-RT1
C502 1.6 4700 1.8 2.5 R511 R531 0.7
IN2B

16

14
1M

3
R518 0.1u V_IN MCNT C511 C513 100
OUT1
47k B 0.01u 10u 0
6.1 4.1 B 16V V+ 5.1
B

15

13
C_CYNC

4
Y_IN U_OUT C514 R540
R519 GND2 C541 R528
10u 47u 10k 100
6800 4.8 16V 1.8 0 6.3V C522
R514 CTL2

14

12
3

5
2200 U_IN Y_OUT C515 OUT2 0.1u
10 TO(6/6) JL503 10u B -5.1
0.2 4.1 16V 1.0 2.5 Y/G_IN
IN2A

13

11
CP

6
CPIN V_OUT
OUT3 C519
R506 10u
CVBS_SW 9.1 R516 1M 0 R512 1M 16V
GND3

12

10
22k

7
C504 GND VCC
CTL3
B+ C536 R525
0.1u C512 0.01u 0
B 6.2 0 1.7 IN3B 1.7 B

11
0.01u EPG_SW2

9
C505 R_IN YS3
IN3A
R563 B R549
0.1u
B 6.2 7.3 10k R564 100k

10
R538

7
C506 G_IN YS2 10k C537
C 0.1u
B 6.2 7.5 R502 C542
0.01u
B
Q502
MSB709-RT1
4700
CR/R_OUT

9
B_IN YS1 10k 0.7
47u
6.3V 0

R534

R522
IC504 R520
100
-5.1 C520
R507 10u
0 SWITCH 1M 10k 2 TO(1/6)
16V
CR/R_IN
C546
IC502 0.1u
B C543 R529 C523
R541 R537
47u 10k 0.1u
D R515
2200
IC502
BH7236AF-E2
VIDEO ENCODER R560
3300
R510
IC504
NJM2286V(TE2)
6.3V B
Q506
MSB709-RT1
4700 4700
V_OUT
0.7
2200 1.7 1.7
IN1A

24

16
1

1
C507 GND1 GND2 0
IN1B Q503 C_OUT
0.1u JL506 MSB709-RT1
B 2.3 0 GND1 R536 0.7

23

15
R_OUT
2

2
C508 RIN ROUT 100
R567 CTL1
0.1u JL507 0
B 2.3 1M 1.0 1.6
IN2B
22

14
11 TO(3/6) G_OUT
3

3
C509 GIN GOUT C545 R530 R533
OUT1
0.1u JL508 0.1u 10k 100
B 2.3 C516 V+ 5.1 B
21

13
B_OUT
4

4
BIN BOUT R561 10u
R568 GND2
3300 16V -5.1
1.5 1M 1.0 0
CTL2
E
20

12
5

5
NC VOUT R526 C532
R513 OUT2
0 1M 0.1u
1.4 5.1 1.0 IN2A 1.7 B
19

11
C_IN
6

6
SCIN VCC2 R508 OUT3
JL504 2200
0 GND3
18

10
7

7
NT/PAL NC
CTL3
C530 C538
C517 1.7 1.6 0.01u R539
0.1u IN3B
17

4700
8

9
BFPOUT YTRAP R562 10u IN3A B
B
3300 16V Q504
1.7 R521 Y_OUT
MSB709-RT1
16
9

R565 NC YOUT 10k 0.7

B+ 0
X501 1.8 2.4 0
10

15

UNSW3.3V SYNCIN COUT R509

F JL505 2200 R523
1M
C544
47u
R535
100
C533
10u
11

14

C529 SYNCOUT NC 6.3V -5.1 16V

10u C528 Y_IN
16V 0.1u 5.1
B
12

13

VCC1 NC V_IN
C534
R566 10u
R524 16V
B+ 0 1M B+
5 TO(1/6) SW5V

B- B-
SW-5V
C527 C526 C535
10u C531 C525
0.1u 0.1u 0.01u
G GND
16V B B
0.1u
B B

B+
SW9V
16 SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA

REC
PB

RGB ENCODER
4-29 4-30 EPG-001 (2/6)
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-89 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
12 TO(4/6)
EPG-001 BOARD(3/6)
ROTA IC

ROTA_RESET_N
A

ROTA_DOUT0

ROTA_DOUT1
ROTA_DOUT2

ROTA_DOUT3
ROTA_DOUT4

ROTA_DOUT5

ROTA_CTL1
ROTA_CTL0

ROTA_DIN0
ROTA_DIN1

ROTA_DIN2

ROTA_DIN3

ROTA_DIN4

ROTA_DIN5
ROTA_DIN6
ROTA_DIN7
-REF.NO.: SERIES-

PH0

PH1
PH2
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE

R221
R222

0
0
P :PB MODE

ROTA_DOUT0
ROTA_DOUT1

ROTA_DOUT2

ROTA_DOUT3
ROTA_DOUT4

ROTA_DOUT5

R220
R223

0
0

B+
B

1.6
1.6

0.8

3.3
0

0
0

0
0
0
0
C212
0.1u
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 B

DVSS2
DE_N

CTL1
CTL0

DACCLK0
DACCLK1

DVDD1
DVSS1
DAC_DATA0

DAC_DATA1

DAC_DATA2
DAC_DATA3

DAC_DATA4

DAC_DATA5
DAC_DATA6

DAC_DATA7
C220
0.1u R217
B 4700
Q201-203
BUFFER R_OUT
RV001
R203 1k 0.6
R214
C 300 0 3.3
R204
C221
100

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
0.1u

1
FSW_IN RESET_N 0
1.2 1200 B

2
DVSS3 RSET C213 -5.1
1.2 Q201
0.1u MSB709-RT1

3
DVSS4 VREF B
1.7 1.8 C214
4
C205 PH_2 COMP 0.1u
0.1u 0 B R218
4700
5
B NC0 R_OUT
B+ 3.3
IC201 0
G_OUT 11 TO(2/6)
6

C201 AVDD_ADC G_OUT

0.001u 3.3 B+ C215 0.6
R215
7

B AVSS_ADC ROTA TC AVDD_DAC 0.1u

0.3 B 100 0
EPG_CVBS
8

CVBS1 AVSS_DAC
D 3 TO(1/6)
0 Q202
9

AVSS0 B_OUT MSB709-RT1

0.5 0
16 15 14 13 12 11 10

V_IN CVBS2 FSW_OUT JL201

IC201 0
C202 AD55/136-0Z(ADV7201)
0.001u AVSS1 R_IN JL202 R219
C206 0 4700
B 47u GP0 G_IN JL203
6.3V 1.3 0 B_OUT
GLINK_SENSE GP1 B_IN JL204 0.6
R216
13 TO(6/6) 0 3.3
100
IR_OUT_SENSE GP2 PON_N C217 0
R206 0.1u
GP3 NC1 10k B Q203
MSB709-RT1 B+
GP4 DOUT0C SW5V
E C222
100p
C223
100p
C203
0.001u
B
C204
0.001u
B R213 B-
SW-5V
C216 R207 R209 R211 C219
300 300 300 0.1u

DOUT1C
300
REFOUT

47u
± 0.5%
DOUT5

DOUT4
DOUT3

DOUT2
DOUT1

DOUT0
±0.5%
DVSS5

DVSS0

6.3V B
CAP2
CAP1
CML
GP5

GP6
GP7

R212
R208 R210 300
300 300
± 0.5%
6 TO(1/6)
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1.1

1.7
1.2
2.2

1.5
R0.4
P1.4
R1.1
P1.6
R1.0
P1.6
R0.2
P0.9
R1.5
P0.9
L201 L202
6uH 18uH
B+ B+
UNSW3.3V
F GND
C210
10u
16V

SIGNAL PATH
ROTA_DOUT5
ROTA_DOUT4
ROTA_DOUT3

ROTA_DOUT2
ROTA_DOUT1
ROTA_DOUT0

C207 C208 C209 C211

10u 10u 0.1u 0.1u VIDEO SIGNAL
16V 16V B B
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA

G REC

16 PB

ROTA IC
EPG-001 (3/6) 4-31 4-32
 RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-89 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

EPG-001 BOARD(4/6) 14 TO(5/6)

GS

ROMCS_N

SDCS_N
SDCLKE

MWE_N
A

POR_N
RAS_N
SDCLK

CAS_N
DQM0

DQM1

OE_N
-REF.NO.: SERIES-

A10

A13
A14

A21
A18
A19
A20

D10

D11
D12
D13

D14
D15
A17

A12

A15
A16

A11

D8
D9

D0
D1

D2
A0

A1
A2
A3

D3
D4

D5

D6
D7
A4

A5
A6

A7

A8
A9
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE

A10
A13

A14
A18

A19

A20
A21
A0

A1
A2
A3

ROMCS_N
P :PB MODE C110 C109

SDCS_N
MWE_N
0.1u

POR_N
0.1u

RAS_N
CAS_N
DQM1

OE_N
B B

D3
D4
D5
D6

D7
B B+

R103

R135
B+

22
1k
0.3

0.3

0.4
3.3

0.4

1.8

1.4

3.3

0.9

0.7

1.0

1.8
0.8

1.2

0.7

0.4

1.4
3.3

0.7

0.6

0.9
0

0
0

0
0

0
108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

A4

NC11

NC10
A5
A6

VDD7
A7

A17
VSS5

A12
A15
A16

A8
A9

A11
VDD_CORE5
3.3
SDCLKE

SDCLK
DQM0

VDD6
D8
D9

D10
VDD_CORE4

D11
D12
D13
VSS4
D14

D15

VDD5
D0

D1
NC9
NC8

D2
C
A3 0.3 0.2 D3

144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
A3 D3
A2 0.4 0.2 D4
A2 D4
A1 0.4 0.2 D5
A1 D5
C105 C108
0.1u
3.3 1.8 B+ 0.1u
VDD8 VDD_CORE3
B 0 0.2 B
A0 D6
A0 D6 C117
A10 0 0.2 220u 4V D7
A10 D7

VSS8 VSS3
R0.5
D A14 P0
R0.1 A14 DQM1
0 DQM1
A13 P0 3.3 ROMCS_N
A13 CE_0_N
JL109 3.3 OE_N
GPIO61/V_SYNC_OUT OE_N R107
JL101 3.3 3.3 1k
JTAG_RST_N VDD4
JL102 0 R2.6 B+
P3.2 MWE_N
JTAG_TMS MWE_N R105
R120 1.8 R3.0
100k P3.3 1k CAS_N
R0 VDD_CORE6 CAS_N R106
JL103 P3.3 3.2 1k RAS_N
JL104
R121
100k 0
JTAG_DOUT

JTAG_DIN
IC101 RAS_N

VSS2
R122
E JL105

JL110
100k
R123
0
JTAG_CLK
GS
OSCO
0.7
R134
C101
7p
100k 0 0.8 0 C102
GPIO60/H_SYNC_OUT OSCI 7p

12MHz
3.3

X101
GPIO24/IRQ0 IC101 VDD3 R108
F741779APGEG4 0 10k
GPIO25/IRQ1 TEST_MODE
0 R1.9
P3.2 SDCS_N
IR_OUT GPIO65/IR_OUT SDCS_N
1.8
VDD_CORE7 GPIO02/SDA1 R109
0 0.4 1k
GLINK_RXD GPIO66/UART_IN GPIO26/IRQ2/H_SYNC_IN
15 TO(6/6) 3.3
GLINK_TXD R101 GPIO64/UART_OUT GPIO63/IR_IN
F VSYNC_IN
VSYNC_IN 10k 3.3
GPIO04/PWM0 GPIO27/IRQ3/V_SYNC_N
5.0
R3.2
VSYNC_IN R115
0
HSYNC_IN_HOST 3.3 P0
HSYNC_IN_HOST GPIO69/CE_3_N GPIO01/SCLK0 EPG_SCL
3.3 1.8
GPIO05/PWM1 VDD_CORE2 C107
0.1u
R102 B
10k GPIO68/CE_2_N GPIO28/SDA2
R3.2 1 TO(1/6)
P0.1
VSS7 GPIO00/SDA0 EPG_SDA
R116
GPIO06/PWM2 GPIO29/SCLK2 0 EPG_RST

GPIO07/PWM3 GPIO03/SCLK1
3.3
VDD9 GPIO30/SDA3
G GPIO08/PWM4 VDD2
3.3
IC103
A24 GPIO31/SCLK3
GPIO40/ROTA DIN0/GREEN0
GPIO41/ROTA DIN1/GREEN1

GPIO42/ROTA DIN2/GREEN2

GPIO43/ROTA DIN3/GREEN3
GPIO44/ROTA DIN4/GREEN4

GPIO45/ROTA DIN5/GREEN5
GPIO46/ROTA DIN6/GREEN6

GPIO47/ROTA DIN7/GREEN7
RESET
GPIO09/PWM5 GPIO67/CE_1_N
R124
GPIO70/ROTA DOUT0

GPIO71/ROTA DOUT1

GPIO72/ROTA DOUT2
A25 GPIO62 0
GPIO77/ROTA CTL1

GPIO76/ROTA CTL0

3.3
GPIO59/OVERLAY3

POR_N
GPIO10/PWM6 POR_N
IC103
GPIO11/PWM7

C103

ROTA_DOUT3
ROTA_DOUT4

ROTA_DOUT5
PIC12F629T-I/SNG-E01
VDD_CORE1
GPIO80/PH2

GPIO78/PH0

GPIO79/PH1

0.1u
VDD CORE0

R113
B 10k
R104 B+ VSS
GPIO84

GPIO83

GPIO82

GPIO81

8
1k VDD
VDD0

VSS0

VSS1

3.3
A18

A19

A20

A21

A22
A23

GP0/AN0
H

7
0.1 CP5/OSC1/CLKIN 3.3 JL108
R110 GP1/AN1/VREF

6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 4700 GP4/OSC2/ GP2/T0CKI/
AN2/INT 0
AN3/CLKOUT

5
3.1 GP3/MCLR/VPP 3.3 R114
0
0
3.3

0
JL106 0

1.7
0

0
1.8

0
0

1.6
1.6

0.8
0

1.8

0
0
R1.4
P0.9

R0.4
P0.9

R1.1
P1.6

R1.1
P1.6
R1.8
P1.4
1.3
10k
JL107 R111
0
R136
0
B+ B+
UNSW3.3V
B+ R138 C115 IC102 B+
7 TO(1/6) UNSW1.8V C111 C116 0 74LCX74MTCX
C113 0.1u
R137 0.1u 47u 0.1u B+ B
I 0 B 6.3V B 3.3 3.3

10 11 12 13 14
GND

1
1RD VCC
C106 C112 4.5 3.3
0.1u HSYNC_IN_HOST
0.1u

2
1D 2RD
B B 1.4 2.9
R117

3
0 1CP 2D
B+ 3.3 1.4
A18

A19

A20
A21

4
1SD 2CP
2.9 3.3

5
1Q 2SD
PH2

PH0

PH1
ROTA_CTL1

ROTA_CTL0

ROTA_DIN0
ROTA_DIN1

ROTA_DIN2

ROTA_DIN3
ROTA_DIN4

ROTA_DIN5
ROTA_DIN6

ROTA_DIN7
ROTA_DOUT0

ROTA_DOUT1

ROTA_DOUT2

ROTA_DOUT3

ROTA_DOUT4

ROTA_DOUT5
ROTA_RESET_N

IC102

9
1Q 2Q
0.4

8
HSYNC I/F GND 2Q
R118
0
J R119
0
12 TO(3/6)
16

GS
4-33 4-34 EPG-001 (4/6)
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-89 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

EPG-001 BOARD(5/6) A0
A0
FLASH,SDRAM IC301 A1
A -REF.NO.: SERIES-
IC301
K4S641632H-UC75T IC302 A2
A1

SDRAM A2
C301 B+ FLASH A3

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
0.1u

1
VDD0 VSS3 A3
D0 B 3.3 D15 A4
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE IC302

2
R0.8 DQ0 DQ15 A4
C302 MX29LV160BBTC-90G
R :REC MODE 0.1u P0.6 1.2 A5

3
VDDQ0 VSSQ3 A5
P :PB MODE D1
B 3.3 D14 A15 A16 A6

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
4

1
DQ1 DQ14 R0.4 A15 A16 A6
D2 0.6 P0.6 D13 A14 0 0 B+ C311 A7
0.1u

2
DQ2 DQ13 A14 V_I/O A7
1.0 0.6 C309 A13 0.5 3.3 B A8
0.1u

3
VSSQ0 VDDQ3 A13 VSS0 A8
D3 3.3 B D12 A12 0.1 D15 A9
B

4
DQ3 DQ12 A12 DQ15 A9
D4 0.7 1.1 D11 A11 0 1.3 D7 A10

5
DQ4 DQ11 R1.0 A11 DQ7 A10
C303 1.0 P0.8 0 0.7 A11
0.1u A10 D14

6
VDDQ1 VSSQ2 A10 DQ14 A11
D5 B 3.3 0 0.4
D10 A9 D6 A12

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

7
DQ5 DQ10 A9 DQ6 A12
D6 1.0 1.0 D9 A8 0 0.7 D13 A13

8
DQ6 DQ9 A8 DQ13 A13
0.6 0.8 C310 A19 0 0.8 D5 A14
0.1u

9
VSSQ1 VDDQ2 A19 DQ5 A14
D7 3.3 B D8 A20 0 0.8 D12 A15

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
DQ7 DQ8 A20 DQ12 A15
C304 0.8 0.8 MWE_N 0 0.9 D4 A16
0.1u VDD1 VSS2 WE DQ4 A16
DQM0 B 3.3 A15 POR_N 2.6 1.0 C312 A17
C MWE_N 0
LDQM
WE UDQM
NC1
0 DQM1 A21 3.3
RESET
A21
VCC
DQ11
3.3
0.1u
B D11 A18
A17

R302 R301 A18

CAS_N 0 2.6 0 0 SDCLK 0 0.8 D3 A19
R303 CAS CLK WP# DQ3 A19
RAS_N 0 3.0 1.4 SDCLKE 3.3 0.7 D10 A20
RAS CKE RY/BY# DQ10 A20
SDCS_N 3.2 3.3 A12 A18 1.2 D2 A21
CS NC0 A18 DQ2 A21
A13 1.9 0 A11 A17 0 1.1 D9 MWE_N
BA0 A11 A17 DQ9 MWE_N
A14 0.1 0 A9 A7 0 0.7 D1 POR_N
BA1 A9 A7 DQ1 POR_N
A10 0.5 0 A8 A6 0.4 0.5 D8 DQM1
A10 A8 A8 DQ8 DQM1
A0 0 0 A7 A5 0.4 0.8 D0 SDCLK
D A1 0
A0
A1
A7
A6
0.4 A6 A4 0.3
A5
A4
DQ0
OE
0.8
SDCLK
OE_N
14 TO(

R0
A2 P0.4 0.4 A5 A3 0.3 3.3
A2 A5 A3 VSS1
A3 0.4 0.3 A4 A2 0.3
A3 A4 A2 CE ROMCS_N
C305 0.3 0.3 A1 0.4 3.3 A0 SDCLKE
0.1u VDD2 VSS1 A1 A0 SDCLKE
B 3.3 0.4 0 DQM0
DQM0
R304 CAS_N
CAS_N
B+ 0 B+ RAS_N
UNSW3.3V C306 RAS_N
8 TO(1/6) 0.1u SDCS_N
E GND
C307 C308
B
D0
SDCS_N

D0
47u 47u D1
6.3V 6.3V D1
D2
D2
D3
D3
D4
D4
D5
D5
D6
D6
D7
F D8
D7
D8
D9
D9
D10
D10
D11
D11
D12
D12
D13
D13
D14
D14
D15
G D15

16

FLASH, SDRAM
EPG-001 (5/6) 4-35 4-36
 RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-89 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

EPG-001 BOARD(6/6) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

G LINK,VIDEO SYNC SEPARATOR
A -REF.NO.: SERIES-

C_CYNC
B+
SW5V
9 TO(1/6) IC402
GND TC7S04F(TE85R)
IC402
IC401 5.1
10 TO(2/6)

5
NC VCC INVERTER
C408
0.1u 4.9
SYNC SEPARATOR B
B

2
IC401 C405 CVBS_SW
R428 GS4981CTA 0.1u 0.2
CP

4
1k B GND
3.6 5.1 R424

8
CSYNC VCC 220
1.8 4.4
HSYNC_IN_HOST

7
CVID HORIZ
Q406 R401 5.0 1.2
MSB709-RT1 C402

6
120 10u VSYNC RSET
AMP
1.5 16V 4.9 R416

5
GND BKPCH 680k 1.2
0.8 R426 ± 0.5%
Y/G_IN 0 0
R429 C407 Q403
1k 0.1u R415 MSD601-RT1
C R430
10k
C401
560p
R402
330k
B 680k
±0.5%
R431
100k
Q403,404
SWITCH

R414 R417
0 15 TO(4/6)
47k 47k 0
EPG_SW1
R403
R420 4700
4 TO(1/6) 100k
Q404 IR_OUT
MSD601-RT1
EPG_SW2
R418
2200
VSYNC_IN
D RXD
R406
220
GLINK_RXD
R405
TXD 220 GLINK_TXD
JL401
IR_SENSE

IR_OUT_SENSE
R408 R412
13 TO(3/6) 22k
22k
GLINK_SENSE
R409 R411 R419
15k 15k 15k

16

G LINK,VIDEO SYNC SEPARATOR

4-37 4-38 EPG-001 (6/6)
RDR-HX900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
ND101 FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

FL-140 BOARD
A DV/LINE 2 IN/FL DRIVER

16G

15G

14G
13G
12G

11G

10G

P37
P36
P35
P34

P33

P32
P31
P30
P29

P10

P11
P12

P13

P14

P15
P16
P17

P18

P19

P20
P21

P22

P23
P24

P25

P26
P27
P28
NC
9G
8G

7G
6G

5G
4G
3G

2G

1G

P1

P2

P3
P4

P5
P6
P7
P8

P9
F1

F2
-REF.NO.:40000 SERIES-
1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 60
ET101

NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

JL112
JL113

JL114
JL115

JL116
JL117

JL118
JL119

JL120
JL121
JL122

JL123
JL124

JL125

JL126
JL127

JL129
JL130

JL131

JL132
JL133

JL134
JL136

JL138
JL139

JL140
JL141
JL143

JL144
JL145

JL146

JL148
JL149

JL150
JL151

JL152
JL153

JL154

JL155

JL156
JL157

JL158

JL159
JL160

JL161

JL162

JL163
JL164

JL165

JL166
JL167

JL168
JL183

JL184
COM16

COM15
COM14

COM13

COM12
COM11

COM10

SEG35
SEG34

SEG33

SEG32

SEG31

SEG30

SEG29

SEG28

SEG27

SEG10

SEG11

SEG12
SEG13

SEG14

SEG15
SEG16
SEG17

SEG18

SEG19
SEG20

SEG21

SEG22
SEG23
SEG24

SEG25

SEG26
COM9

COM8

COM7
COM6

COM5

COM4
COM3

COM2

COM1
B

SEG1
SEG2

SEG3
SEG4
SEG5

SEG6

SEG7
SEG8

SEG9
AD2

AD1
CN102 9P
JL104 JL103 B-
SW-8V 9
JL108
IT_GND 8
JL105 JL147
UNSW5V 7 J101
TO
JL106 B+
KEY1 6 LINE 2 IN 1
FR-215 BOARD C105 14S3
C CN002 LED_RST 5
JL107 FLD_RESET 0.1u
B 4 C
R109
0 D104
STZ6.8N-T146 3
(SEE PAGE 4-42) JL109 FLD1_CS 50V 2 JL175
CN105 11P
FLD_CS 4 2012 6 S1
JL110 FLD_SOUT 1 S2 SW
LED_DT 3 2 CGND JL176
JL111 FLD_SCLK 2 Y2 IN
LED_CK 2 JL177
JL185 3 AN GND
IT_GND 1 JL178
1

G
D105 4 C2 IN

C
STZ6.8N-T146 R112 JL186
3

FLD_SOUT
FLD_SCLK

FLD1_CS
FLD_RESET
S VIDEO 75 5 AN GND TO
S101 2 JL179
AV-92 BOARD(7/8)
R108 C106 6 V2 IN CN801

Y
3300 39p 1
D (SEE PAGE 4-20)

G
D106 R113 7 AN GND
STZ6.8N-T146 75 JL180
(ON/Standby) C102 3
C101 0.01u 2 8 L2 IN
47u 1 YGND JL181
B R110
R104
R105
R106

R107
16V 9 AU GND

COM16
COM15

COM14
COM13
COM12

COM11

COM10

COM9
COM8

COM7

COM6

COM5
COM4

COM3
COM2
COM1

SEG35

SEG34

SEG33
SEG32

SEG31
SEG30

SEG29
100

100
100
100
0

JL142
5 S2 JL182
R111 10 R2 IN
3 Y JL187
0
11 AU GND
JL128 7 V

-26.7
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9

-24.9
-24.9

-24.9
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9

-24.9
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9

-23.0
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9

-26.8
-24.9
VIDEO 1
5.0
0.1
5.0

4.7
5.0
2.1
2.1
8 VGND FB101 D107
0uH STZ6.8N-T146 3 R114
9 L 75
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 AUDIO L 2
(MONO)
10LGND
E FB102
VDD
DA

CP
CS

RESET
OSC1
OSC0
GND
VFL

COM16
COM15

COM14

COM13
COM12

COM11
COM10

COM9
COM8

COM7
COM6
COM5

COM4

COM3

COM2

COM1
SEG35

SEG34
SEG33

SEG32

SEG31

SEG30
SEG29
0uH FB103
11R 0uH
AUDIO R 13RBR
12RGND
2
IC101 IC101
15S4 D108
STZ6.8N-T146
3
ML9208-02MBZ03B
1
INDICATOR TUBE
DRIVER
1
SEG10 D109

SEG11

SEG12
SEG13
SEG14

SEG15
SEG16

SEG17
SEG18

SEG19

SEG20

SEG21
SEG22

SEG23

SEG24

SEG25
SEG26

SEG27
SEG28
SEG1
SEG2

SEG3
SEG4
SEG5

SEG6
SEG7

SEG8

SEG9

STZ6.8N-T146
AD2
AD1

3
P1
P2

F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
C109
100p
C110
100p
R116
220k
-26.8

-26.8
-23.0

-26.8

-26.8

-24.9

-26.8
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9
-24.9

-26.8

-23.0
-26.8

-26.8
-24.9

-26.8
-24.9

-24.9

-24.9

-23.0
-26.8
-24.9
-26.8
-26.8

-24.9
-26.8
-24.9

-26.8
-26.8
R115
220k
JL137
JL135

SEG10

SEG11
SEG12

SEG13
SEG14

SEG15

SEG16

SEG17

SEG18
SEG19
SEG20

SEG21

SEG22
SEG23

SEG24
SEG25

SEG26

SEG27

SEG28
D102
SEG1

SEG2

SEG3
SEG4

SEG5
SEG6
SEG7

SEG8

SEG9

STZ6.8N-T146
AD2

AD1

DV IN
CN104 6P
CN103 4P JL169
L101 1 DGND
JL170
47uH
G Q101 D111
Q103
2SB1197K-T-146-R
TPB- 1
JL171
2 TPB-
TO
2SC5053T100Q 1SS355TE-17 SWITCH TPB+ 2 3 TPB+ RD-55 BOARD(21/22)
JL101 -35.9 -26.8 JL172 CN2201
R102 0 TPA- 3 4 TPA-
2200 T101 D112 JL173
-9.3
1SS355TE-17 C114
(SEE PAGE 4-84)
CONVERTOR TPA+ 4 5 TPA+

MA8062-L-TX
TRANSFORMER 0.1u R118 JL174
C113 C115 10k -27.3 C118
6800p B 22u C116 6 DGND

D114
-9.2 0.1u
B- 100V 50V 50V 0.1u B
2 10 2012 B 50V
C112 D101 D113 50V
1SS355TE-17 2012
100u -9.3 UDZSTE-1727B 2012
16V 3 1
D110 JL102
SIGNAL PATH
1SS355TE-17 R120
0
H Q102
2SC5053T100Q
4 7 27k
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
Q101,102
6 8 CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
SWITCHING
5 9 REC
16
PB

DV/LINE 2 IN/FL DRIVER

FL-140 4-39 4-40
 RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-5, 4-6 for waveforms.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
CN002 9P
B- JL026 JL027

FR-215 BOARD JL028

1

2
SW-8V

IT_GND
LED DRIVE,FUNCTION KEY B+ JL029 JL030
A JL031
3 UNSW5V

-REF.NO.:40000 SERIES- 4 KEY1 TO

LERST JL032 FL-140 BOARD
R051 R053 5.7 5 LED_RST CN102
0 2200 FLCS JL033
6 FLD_CS (SEE PAGE 4-39)
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE B+ LEDT JL034
Q002
R :REC MODE 0 R054
4700
5.7
MSB709-RT1 LECK JL035
7 LED_DT
P :PB MODE LEDIM 8 LED_CK
C063 Q001 5.0 JL036
IC062 0.01u 4.8 DTC114EKA-T146
Q001,002
9 IT_GND

B+
B LED B+ SWITCH
CN001 17P
JL007 JL008 LED DRIVE
B IT_GND

FLD_CS
1
JL009 FLCS IC062
2 NJU3711M(TE2)
JL010 JL011 TIMER REC

B+
UNSW5V 3 5.0 D002
JL013

10 11 12 13 14
JL012 R002

1
R0.1 P3 VDD SLR-332VRT32
UN6V 4 P5.0 5.0 470
JL014

2
LEDIM R5.0 P4 P2
LED_DIM 5 P0 5.0
JL015

3
P5 P1
IR 6 5.0 LERST
JL016

4
VSS XCLR
TO KEY2 7 JL002 4.9 SYNCHRO REC
LESTB
JL017

5
AV-92 BOARD(5/8) LERST P6 XSTB D001
CN603 LED_RST 8 JL003 4.8 LECK SLR-332VRT32 R001
JL018 470

9
P7 CLK
C (SEE PAGE 4-16) KEY4 9
JL019
JL004 0.1 LEDT

8
LESTB P8 DATA
LED_STB 10 C064
JL020 0.1u
KEY3 DVD
11 B
JL021 R055
LECK D005 R005 0
LED_CK 12 SLI-343YCT32WST
JL022 2200
KEY1 13
JL023 LEDT
LED_DT 14
IT_GND 15 HDD
D004 R004
IT_GND 16 EB3804X-TP-J555K
JL024 JL025 B- 470
D SW-8V 17

S021

TOOLS EN030
R012 R022 ENTER
S012 SW4
2200 S022 2200
REC STOP SW5
CHANNEL+ (RIGHT)
E IC061 S013
R013
2200 S023
R023
2200 SW3
R032
2200
(UP)
REMOTE COMMANDER REC PAUSE
CHANNEL- SW2 R033
RECEIVER
(DOWN) 2200
R014 R024 SW1
IC061 GP1UM27SXK0F S014 3300 S024 3300
R034
REC (LEFT) 3300
INPUT SELECT
R015 S041 R025
S015 5600 S025 R035
5600 5600
(OPEN/CLOSE)
REC MODE
1 2 3 (STOP)
R042
F S016
R016
8200 S042 2200 S026
R026
8200 S036
R036
8200
5.0

5.0

DVD
RETURN
(PAUSE)
R017 R043 R027 R037
S017 S043 S027 22k S037 22k
B+ 22k 2200
16 R061
HDD
SYSTEM MENU
0 C062 (PLAY)
0.01u
B

LED DRIVE, FUNCTION KEY

4-41 4-42 FR-215
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

SIGNAL PATH 10 TO(19/22)

DGND
C1133 CN1101 40P
RD-55 BOARD(1/22) VIDEO SIGNAL SW3.3V
B+
C1130 C1131 C1132
0.1u
B
JL1107
JL1167
1 GND

A CONNECTOR AUDIO 0.1u

B
0.1u
B
0.1u
B JL1108
2 DASP
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL ATP_A3
3 IDE_A3(CS1)
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES- ATP_A4
JL1109
4 IDE_A4(CS0)
REC ATP_D0
ATP_D0
ATP_A2
JL1110
ATP_D1 RB1101 5 IDE_A2
ATP_D1 JL1111 33X4
PB ATP_A0
ATP_D2 6 IDE_A0
ATP_D2
R1170 7 NC
R1916 ATP_D3 JL1112 33
CN1904 27P ATP_D3 ATP_A1
JL1904 0 8 IDE_A1
ATP_D4 JL1113
AI_LRCK 1 ADLRCKI ATP_D4
JL1910 9 IDE_HD16
ATP_D5 JL1114 R1171
AADXRST 2 R1901 ATP_D5 ATP_INTRQ 82
B AI_SDT 3
JL1906
JL1909
0
ADDATI 1 TO(3/22) ATP_D6
ATP_D6 R1166 10k
10

11
IDE_INT

GND
ATP_D7 JL1115 R1172
DGND 4 R1912 ATP_D7 ATP_XDMAC 22
JL1902 0 12 IDE_DACK
ATP_D8 R1198 1k
AI_BCK 5 ADBCKI ATP_D8
ATP_D9 R1173 13 NC
DGND 6 ATP_D9 ATP_IORDY JL1116
82
ATP_D10 14 IDE_IORDY
DGND 7 ATP_D10
TO ATP_D11 R1174 15 GND
AV-92 BOARD(2/8) DGND 8 FB1901 ATP_D11 ATP_XDIOR JL1117 22
CN501 JL1901 16 IDE_R
ATP_D12
256FS 9 PLL256L1 2 TO(18/22) ATP_D12
(SEE PAGE 4-10) ATP_D13 JL1118
R1175 17 GND
DGND 10 ATP_D13 ATP_XDIOW 22
C DGND 11
JL1911
R1917
0
ATP_D14
ATP_D14 18 IDE_W

B+ ATP_D15 R1176 19 GND

UNSW6V 12 VDEC6V ATP_D15 ATP_DMARQ JL1119 TO
82
JL1912 20 IDE_DREQ CN-199 BOARD
ATP_A0
UNSW6V 13 ATP_A0 CN1802
XSWGBRST2 R1167 21 NC
ATP_A1 5600
AGND 14 ATP_A1 (SEE PAGE 4-24)
ATP_A2 22 GND
Cb 15 reccb ATP_A2 ATP_D15 JL1120
JL1953 23 IDE_D15
ATP_A3 JL1121
AGND 16 ATP_A3 ATP_D0
ATP_A4 24 IDE_D0
B 17 3 TO(2/22) ATP_A4 ATP_D14 JL1122
ATP_INTRQ RB1102 25 IDE_14
AGND 18 ATP_INTRQ ATP_D1 JL1123 33X4
D RECY 19
JL1915
RECY ATP_XDMAC
ATP_XDMAC
ATP_D13 JL1124
26
27
IDE_D1
IDE_D13
ATP_IORDY JL1125
AGND 20 ATP_IORDY ATP_D2
ATP_XDIOR 28 IDE_D2
G 21 ATP_XDIOR ATP_D12 JL1126
ATP_XDIOW RB1103 29 IDE_D12
AGND 22 ATP_XDIOW ATP_D3 JL1127 33X4
JL1917 30 IDE_D3
ATP_DMARQ JL1128
RECC 23 RECC ATP_DMARQ ATP_D11
ATP_XRESET 31 IDE_D11
AGND 24 ATP_XRESET ATP_D4 JL1129
32 IDE_D4
R 25 ATP_D10 JL1130
RB1104 33 IDE_D10
AGND 26 ATP_D5 JL1131 33X4
E FSW 27 ATP_D9 JL1132
34

35
IDE_D5

IDE_D9
ATP_D6 JL1133
R1919
0 36 IDE_D6
CN1905 13P EPG_SCL ATP_D8 JL1134
R1918 37 IDE_D8
0 RB1105
EPG_SDA 1 EPG_SDA ATP_D7 JL1135 33X4
5 TO(12/22) JL1168
38 IDE_D7
EPG_SCL 2 XVMUTE
JL1934 R1911 0 R1177 39 GND
ADSMUTE JL1136 33
SMUTE 3 34 TO(5/22) ATP_XRESET
JL1919 40 IDE_RST
IT_XRST 4 XITRST5
JL1962 R1922 0
EPGREST 5 EPGRST CN1102 40P
F TO
EPG-001 BOARD(1/6) IT_SCLK 6
JL1921

R1913
ITSCK5
JL1169

JL1166
1 GND
CN604
DGND 7 0 2 DASP
(SEE PAGE 4-27) JL1923
ATS_D0 ATS_A3
JL1137
IT_SIN 8 ITSDO5 6 TO(12/22) ATS_D0
JL1138
3 IDE_A3(CS1)
JL1956 R1914 ATS_A4
0 ATS_D1
DGND 9 ATS_D1 4 IDE_A4(CS0)
JL1925 JL1139
ATS_D2 ATS_A2
IT_SOUT 10 ITSDI5 ATS_D2 RB1106 5 IDE_A2
JL1957 R1915 JL1140 33x4
0 ATS_D3 ATS_A0
DGND 11 ATS_D3 6 IDE_A0
JL1927
ATS_D4
IT_REQ 12 ITREQ5 ATS_D4 R1178 7 NC
JL1932 JL1141
ATS_D5 ATS_A1 33
TEMP 13 XSWGBRST2 ATS_D5 8 IDE_A1
G TH1901
ATS_D6
ATS_D6
JL1142
JL1143 R1179 9 IDE_HD16
ATS_D7 ATS_INTRQ 82
ATS_D7 R1168 10 IDE_INT
ATS_D8 10k
CN1903 25P R1903 ATS_D8 11 GND
JL1938 0 JL1144 R1180
ATS_D9 ATS_XDMAC 22
SPDIFO 1 SPDIFAO ATS_D9 12 IDE_DACK
ATS_D10 R4104 1k
DGND 2 ATS_D10 R1181 13 NC
JL1939 JL1145
ATS_D11 ATS_IORDY 82
Rch+ 3 AOUTR+ ATS_D11 14 IDE_IORDY
JL1940
ATS_D12
RMUTE 4 NOT USE ATS_D12 R1182 15 GND
JL1941 JL1146
ATS_D13 ATS_XDIOR 22
Rch- 5 AOUTR- ATS_D13 16 IDE_R
H AUGND 6
JL1958

JL1959
C1901
0.01u 7 TO(10/22) ATS_D14
ATS_D14
JL1147 R1183 17 GND
B ATS_D15 ATS_XDIOW 22
AUGND 7 AUGND ATS_D15 18 IDE_W
JL1942 R1904
0 B+ ATS_A0 R1184
A5V 8 A5V ATS_A0 19 GND
JL1943 JL1148 82
ATS_A1 ATS_DMARQ
Lch+ 9 AOUTL+ ATS_A1 20 IDE_DREQ TO
JL1944 CN-220 BOARD
ATS_A2 R1169
LMUTE 10 XLMUTE ATS_A2 21 NC CN1802
JL1945 5600
ATS_A3
Lch- 11
JL1960
AOUTL- ATS_A3
JL1149
22 GND (SEE PAGE 4-26)
ATS_A4 ATS_D15
TO DGND 12 ATS_A4 23 IDE_D15
EPG-001 BOARD(1/6) JL1961 ATS_D0 JL1150
ATS_INTRQ
CN606 DGND 13 ATS_INTRQ 24 IDE_D0
I (SEE PAGE 4-28) DGND 14
JL1946
R1905
0
ATS_XDMAC
ATS_XDMAC ATS_D14 JL1151
JL1152
RB1107 25 IDE_14
ATS_IORDY ATS_D1 33x4
V 15 V ATS_IORDY 26 IDE_D1
ATS_D13 JL1153
R1906 ATS_XDIOR
DGND 16 ATS_XDIOR 27 IDE_D13
JL1947 0 JL1154
ATS_XDIOW ATS_D2
C 17 C ATS_XDIOW 28 IDE_D2
ATS_D12 JL1155
R1907 ATS_DMARQ
DGND 18 ATS_DMARQ RB1108 29 IDE_D12
JL1948 0 JL1156
ATS_XRESET ATS_D3 33x4
Y 19 Y ATS_XRESET 30 IDE_D3
ATS_D11 JL1157
DGND 20 R1908 31 IDE_D11
JL1949 0 8 TO(8/22) JL1158
ATS_D4
Y/G 21 Y/G 32 IDE_D4
ATS_D10 JL1159
DGND 22 R1909 RB1109 33 IDE_D10
JL1950 0 ATS_D5 JL1160 33x4
J CB/B

XVMUTE
23

24
JL1951
R1910
CB/B
ATS_D9 JL1161
34

35
IDE_D5

IDE_D9
JL1952 0 JL1162
ATS_D6
CR/R 25 CR/R 36 IDE_D6
ATS_D8 JL1163
DGND RB1110 37 IDE_D8
ATS_D7 JL1164 33x4
38 IDE_D7
JL1170
R1185 39 GND
JL1165
16 ATS_XRESET 33
40 IDE_RST

CONNECTOR
RD-55 (1/22) 4-43 4-44
 RDR-HX900
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5, 4-6 for waveforms.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

VIDVD

VIDHD
RD-55 BOARD(2/22)
A VIDEO DECODER NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

R716

R718
R :REC MODE

22
22
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES- P :PB MODE C730 C735

R736

R739
2200

2200
0.1u C733 0.1u
B 10p B VIDDT0 JL710
C737 VIDDT0
C731 JL711

14.31818MHz
0.1u VIDDT1
10p B VIDDT1
B+ B+ JL712

X701
VIDDT2
VIDDT2

R714
C718 VIDDT3 JL713

0
0.1u B+ VIDDT3
B VIDDT4 JL714

JL701

JL703

JL704
JL706
JL707
VIDDT4

R715
100k
B 11 TO(3/22)

1.8

1.8

0.7

3.1
1.5

1.8

3.3
RECCB VIDDT5 JL715

0
R702 VIDDT5
0 VIDDT6 JL716
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 VIDDT6
VIDDT7 JL717
VIDDT7

0.6
VI_1A

CH1_A18GND

CH1_A18VDD
PLL_A18GND
PLL_A18VDD

0.8
3.3
VS/VBLK/GPIO

HS/CS/GPIO
FID/GPIO
C0/GPIO/JTMS

C1/GPIO/TRST
DGND
DVDD

C2/GPIO/TCK

C3/GPIO/TDI
C4/GPIO/TDO
C5/GPIO

IOGND
IOVDD
XTAL2
XTAL1
VIDSILCK JL718
VIDSILCK
VIDHD
RECY VIDHD
C719
R708 0.1u VIDVD
RECC VIDVD
0 B
0

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
1
VI_1B C6/GPIO/RED
0 5

2
C715 VI_1C C7/GPIO/GREEN
C 0.1u

3
B CH1_A33GND C8/GPIO/BLUE
C725 3.3
0.1u

4
CH1_A33VDD C9/GPIO/FSO
B 3.3

5
C720 CH2_A33VDD DGND
1.8 C738
R704 0.1u 0.1u

6
B CH2_A33GND DVDD
0 0.5 JL708 B

7
VI_2A Y0
R710 0 0 JL709
IC702

8
VI_2B Y1
0 R1.8
C721 0.1u B P0 VIDDT0

9
VI_2C Y2
R1.3
C716 VIDEO DECODER P0 VIDDT1
SIGNAL PATH

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
3 TO(1/22) 0.1u CH2_A18GND Y3
R1.3
D B C726
0.1u
B
1.8
CH2_A18VDD
IC702
TVP5147PFP Y4
P0
RB701
VIDDT2
1.8
A18VDD_REF IOGND
22 VIDEO SIGNAL
3.3 C739
A18GND_REF IOVDD 0.1u CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
C727 1.8 R1.3 B
0.1u P0 VIDDT3
C722 CH3_A18VDD Y5
R1.3
B
R706 0.1u
CH3_A18GND Y6
P1.7 VIDDT4 REC
0 B R1.3
0.6 P0 VIDDT5
VI_3A Y7 PB
R711 0 0
VI_3B
3 Y8
R1.1
P0
RB702
VIDDT6
0 R1.3
C723 0.1u B P1.7 22 VIDDT7
VI_3C Y9
E C717
0.1u C728
CH3_A33GND
4 DGND
C740
B 3.3 1.8
0.1u CH3_A33VDD DVDD 0.1u
B B

AVID/GPIO/FC
CH4_A33GND

CH4_A18GND
CH4_A33VDD

CH4_A18VDD
XSWGBRST2

GLCO/I2CA
R0.5/P0.1

FSS/GPIO

DATACLK
RESETB
INTREQ

IOGND
IOVDD
PWDN
DGND
VI_4A

DVDD
NSUB

TMS

SDA
SCL
3.3

1.8

3.3

3.3
3.3
1.8

3.2

3.1
3.3

1.6
IC701

0
C724
0.1u
3.3V REG B 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
B+
VDEC6V

JL705
F L701
10uH VIDSILCK
XVIDINT
XVIDINT
5.8

3.3

B+

R722 0
S-T111B33MC-OGSTFG

I2C0_SDA
I2C0_SDA
I2C0_SCL 12 TO(12/22)
5 4 I2C0_SCL
C701 R727

R720
P_CONT
IC701

10u

10k
10k P_CONT
16V
B+ B+

1 2 3 C705 R740 C707 B+

10u 10k 10u C729
3.2

16V 16V 0.1u

DGND B

G C732
0.1u
B
C734
0.1u
B
R729 C736
10k 0.1u
B
C704
0.1u
3.2

B
R719
R717

R726
IC703
100
100

3 2 1 0
PQ1M185M2SPQ

10 TO(19/22)
VC

GND

NR
1.2

1.5V REG
IC703

I2C0_SDA
VIN

I2C0_SCL
3.2

1.8

B+
VO

XVIDINT
P_CONT

H 4 5
L702
10uH

B+ B+ B+
SW3.3V
C702 C741 C706 C708
10u 0.1u 10u 10u
16 16V B 16V 16V

VIDEO DECODER
4-45 4-46 RD-55 (2/22)
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
91 23 26
TO 27
RD-55 BOARD(3/22) TO
(4/22,5/22,
(4/22,
5/22,
TO
(6/22,
TO
A AV GLUE
6/22,8/22,
15/22) 6/22,
15/22)
11/22,
12/22) (18/22)
28 TO(10/22)

XSWGBRST

XSWGBRST
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES-

PLL512L3

DALRCKO
PLL256L2
SWAHA5

SWAHA4

SWAHA3
SWAHA2
SWAHA1
SWAHA0

DABCKO
DADATO

SILNZCVB7

SILNZCVB6
SILNZCVB5
SILNZCVB4

SILNZCVB3
SILNZCVB2
SILNZCVB1

SILNZCVB0

SILEEVD

SILEEHD
SILEEFD

SILEECK
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE SILNZCVB7

SPDO
SILNZCVB7
R :REC MODE SILNZCVB6
SILNZCVB6
P :PB MODE SILNZCVB5
SILNZCVB5
SILNZCVB4
SILNZCVB4
SILNZCVB3
SILNZCVB3

R868 33
R875 33

R884 33
RB807

RB808
SILNZCVB2

33x4

33x4
B R871
33
R873
33
R886
33
R888
33
R882
33 SILNZCVB1
SILNZCVB2
SILNZCVB1
SILNZCVB0
SWAHD0 SILNZCVB0
SILEEVD
SWAHD1 C822 C812 SILEEVD
R3824 C821 C814
0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u SILEEHD
SWAHD2 B B 0 B B SILEEHD
RB801
0x4 SILEEFD
SILEEFD

JL826
JL862
JL863
JL864
JL865

JL866
JL861
SILEECK
SILEECK
SILNZCVA7
B+

JL829

R1.1/P0
R1.3/P0
C TO(4/22,5/22,
SILNZCVA6

R1.2

R1.2

R1.3

R1.2

R1.2

R1.2
R1.7
P1.6

P1.6

P1.1

P1.1
13

3.2
3.2
3.2

3.3

1.4

0.7
0.7

0.3

3.3
3.2

1.6

1.6

1.6
1.6

3.3

3.3

3.2
3.0

1.6

1.6

1.6
SILNZCVA5

R0
R0
P0

P0

P0
P0

P0
6/22,8/22, RB809

0
14/22,20/22) 33x4
176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133
20 TO(8/22)

VD_1

VSS

VDD
XSWGBRST

VS_9
TST4
ACKPB

VSS
SPDO

SCANOUT
DALRCKO

DABCKO

VD_4

SILNZCVB7
SILNZCVB6
SILNZCVB5

SILNZCVB4

VSS
SILNZCVB3
SILNZCVB2

SILNZCVB1
SILNZCVB0
VDD

SELEEVD

SELEEHD
SELEEFD
VPDX

SELEECK
VSS
SELCLKA1

SELCLKA0
SWAHD2

SWAHD1

SWAHD0

SWAHA5

SWAHA4

SWAHA3
SWAHA2

SWAHA1
SWAHA0

SILNZCVA7
SILNZCVA6
SILNZCVA5
DADATO
3.2 1.5

89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
SWAHD3 SILNZCVA4

1
SWAHD3 SILNZCVA4
D SWAHD4
3.2 R0/P0.9
SILNZCVA3

2
SWAHD4 SILNZCVA3
3.2 R0/P0.4
SWAHD5 SILNZCVA2

3
SWAHD5 SILNZCVA2
3.2 R0/P0.9
SWAHD6 SILNZCVA1

4
RB802 SWAHD6 SILNZCVA1 RB810
0x4 3.2 R1.1/P0.8 33x4
SWAHD7 SILNZCVA0

5
SWAHD7 SILNZCVA0
R849 R3813

6
10k VSS VSS
0 3.2 33
R3810
SILPBVD

7
0 TST1 SILPBVD
3.2 3.2 R3812 33
XSILINT SILPBHD

8
XINT SILPBHD
3.2 0
14 XSILWT SILPBFD

9
TO(17/22) XWT SILPBFD
E R852 R3814

44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
XSILCS 10k VS_1 VS_8 33
3.0 1.5
XSILWE XWE SILPBCK SILPBCK
3.3 3.3 C816 R3811
VDD VDD 0.1u 33
15 TO(15/22) 3.2 3.3 JL860 B
XCS SCANIN
2.9 1.6 JL824
XSILRD XRD ADLRCKCKI ADLRCKI
C808 1.6 JL822
0.1u VS_2 ADBCKI ADBCKI 1 TO(1/22)
JL817 B 1.6 1.2 JL825
DECSPDI DECSPDI ADDATI ADDATI

VSS VSS
F DECDATI
JL818 0
DECDATI ACKREC
1.6 JL828
C823
DECBCKI
JL820
JL819
1.6

1.6
DECBCKI IC803 VD_6
3.3
R1.3/P1.6
0.1u
B
JL844
DECLRCKI DECLRCKI AV GLUE VIDDT7 VIDDT7
R1.1/P0 JL845
VS_3 VIDDT6 VIDDT6
JL816 1.6 R1.4/P0 JL846
DECDT7 DECDT7 VIDDT5 VIDDT5
JL815 R0/P1.1 IC803 R1.3/P1.7 JL847
16 TO(6/22) DECDT6 DECDT6 CXD9779R VIDDT4 VIDDT4
JL814 R0/P1.1 R1.3/P0 JL848
DECDT5 DECDT5 VIDDT3 VIDDT3
JL813 1.6 R1.3/P0 JL849
DECDT4 DECDT4 VIDDT2 VIDDT2
G DECDT3
JL812 R0/P0.9
DECDT3 VIDDT1
R1.3/P0 JL850
VIDDT1 11 TO(2/22)
JL811 R0/P0.4 R1.8/P0 JL851
DECDT2 DECDT2 VIDDT0 VIDDT0

VSS VSS
JL810 R0/P0.9 3.1 JL853
DECDT1 DECDT1 VIDHD VIDHD
JL809 R1.2/P0.8 3.3 JL854
DECDT0 DECDT0 VIDVD VIDVD
C809 3.2
0.1u VS_4 TDO
B 1.5 1.6 JL852
17 TO(7/22) DECSILCK DECCLK VIDCK VIDSILCK
3.3 3.3 C817
VDD VDD 0.1u
H R3827
10k
JL808 0
SELCLK VGOOD
JL855 B
SILTDO
3.2
VS_5 TDI MRTDO
R828 33 1.2 3.3
ENCDATO ENCDATO TMS JTAGTMS 21 TO(11/22)
R826 33 1.6 3.3
ENCBCKO ENCBCKO TCK JTAGTCK
R827 33 1.6 3.2
ENCLRCKO ENCLRCKO TRST JTAGTRST
C818
0.1u VSS VSS
R829 33 B 1.6
SILENCCKA SILENCCK ROUT1 JL856
R831 33 3.2
SILENCVD SILENCVD ROUT0 JL857

I SILENCHD
R830
R832
33

33
2.7
SILENCHD LOUT1 JL858
1.6
SILENCFD SILENCFD LOUT0 JL859
18 TO(4/22) SILENCV0 3.3 3.3 C820

R1.2/P0
SILENCV0 VD_2 VD_3 0.1u
SILENCV1 B
SILENCV1
1.5

1.6

1.6

SRCBYPASS
SRCMSSEL

SRCOLRCK
SRCODATA
DVIOLRCK
SILENCV2

SRCILRCK
DVIODATA
SILPBCKB

SRCIDATA
SILENCV0

SILENCV1
SILENCV2

SILENCV3

SILENCV4

SILENCV5

SILENCV6

SILENCV7

SRCOBCK
DVNZCV0
DVNZCV1

DVNZCV2

DVNZCV3
DVNZCV4

DVNZCV5
DVNZCV6
DVNZCV7

SILENCV2

DVIOBCK
DVOMCK

SRCIBCK
DVIMCK

SMUTE
NZCCK

SILENCV3
DVCK

VD_5
VS_6

VS_7

SILENCV3

TST2

TST3
VDD

VDD
VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS
SILENCV4
SILENCV4
SILENCV5
SILENCV5 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
J SILENCV6
SILENCV6
R1.8/P0

R1.3/P0
R1.2/P0

R1.2/P0
R1.3/P1.6

R1.3/P0
R1.1/P0

R1.3./P1.6

3.3

1.7

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3
3.3
3.3

3.3
3.3

1.5
1.6
3.3

1.6

3.3

1.1
1.6

1.6
0
0

3.2
3.2
SILENCV7
SILENCV7
JL842
JL821

JL827

JL837

JL841
JL839

JL840
FL802
B+ B+
SW3.3V
R3822 10 TO(19/22)
19 TO(8/22) NZCSILCK 0
GND
C813 C819 C815 R3823 C803
R3825

0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0 10u

33

B B B 16V

33

33
R899 33
R879 R892

R894

R897
33 33
RB804

SIGNAL PATH
RB803

JL836
JL834

JL835
33x4
33x4

K
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
SRSIBCK
SRSILRCK
NZCSIL0
NZCSIL1

NZCSIL2
NZCSIL3
NZCSIL4

NZCSIL5
NZCSIL6
NZCSIL7

DVSIMCK

DVSILCK

SRSIDATA

SRCMSSEL

SISRBCK
SISRLRCK
SILDVCK
SIDVMCK

SISRDATA

SMUTE
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
SILENCV0
SILENCV1
SILENCV2
SILENCV3
SILENCV4

SILENCV5
SILENCV6

SILENCV7

REC
16
71 TO(8/22,20/22) 4 TO(20/22) 24 TO(22/22)
PB

AV GLUE
RD-55 (3/22) 4-47 4-48
 RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

RD-55 BOARD(4/22)
A AV ENCODER
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES-

SWAHD7

SWAHD5

SWAHD3
SWAHD6

SWAHD4

SWAHD2

SWAHD1

SWAHD0
SWAHA4

SWAHA3

SWAHA2
SWAHA1

SWAHA0
SWAHA5
AVENC_XNRST

AVENC_NDI
AVENC_NMOD
AVENC_NDO
AVENC_NCLK

AVENC_NDO

AVENC_NDI
AVENC_NMOD

AVENC_XNRST

AVENC_NCLK
R931 68
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE XAVEWT
R :REC MODE XAVERD
P :PB MODE
XAVECS 32 TO(17/22)
RB901 C912 RB904 RB905
4700x4 C916 33x4 33x4
0.1u 0.1u XAVEWE
B+ B B
R935 47
SWAHD0 AVEINT
SWAHD0 R918 10k
B SWAHD1
SWAHD1
B+ XAVERST

R910
C913 R917

10k
R903 RB906

JL916
SWAHD2 C918 33 TO(12/22)
0.1u 47k 0.1u 10kx4 0
SWAHD2 B XAVEPST
SWAHD3 B
TO(3/22,5/22, SWAHD3
13 6/22,8/22, SWAHD4

JL915
14/22,20/22) SWAHD4

2.4

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.2

2.4

0.8

0.7

0.3

3.3
3.3

2.4

3.3

3.2

3.3

3.2
3.2
3.2

3.2
3.2

3.2

2.4
3.2

3.3

3.2
3.2

3.2
SWAHD5

0
0

0
SWAHD5
SWAHD6
SWAHD6
SWAHD7
208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157
IC902
IC902
SWAHD7 IC42S16400-7TG

OVOUT7

OVOUT6

GND
OVCLK

VDD2

GPO6/OVVSYNC_

GND

GPO5/OVHSYNC_

VDD3

GPIO4

GPIO3
GPIO2

GPIO1
GPIO0

GND

VDD2

NDO
NDI

NMOD
GND

NRST_

VDD2
NCLK

GND

CD7/FD7
VDD3

CD6/FD6
CD5/FD5

CD4/FD4
CD3/FD3
CD2/FD2

GND
CD1/FD1

VDD2

CD0/FD0

CRE_
CCS_

CMODE2

CWE_/CSDI
SDRAM

CWAIT/FOE_
OVOUT5/FA19

OVOUT4/FA18
OVOUT3/FA17

OVOUT2/FA16
OVOUT1/FA15

OVOUT0/FA14

CA5/FA5

CA4/FA4
CA3/FA3

CA2/FA2
CA1/FA1

CA0/FA0
B+
VSS
C

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
SWAHA5 VDD
SWAHA5 AVENSDDT0 3.2 R1.4/P2.5 AVENSDDT15
DQ15

2
SWAHA4

3.3

1.4
SWAHA4 2.0 DQ0
TO(3/22,5/22, VSSO
91

3
6/22,8/22, SWAHA3 2.4

105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156
SWAHA3 VDDO

1
15/22) VDD2 CMODE1/CSDO AVENSDDT1 3.2 DQ14 R1.8/P2.2 AVENSDDT14

4
SWAHA2 1.6 R924
SWAHA2 R1.8 DQ1

2
AMCLK CMODE0/CSCLK 10k AVENSDDT2 P2.1 DQ13 R1.9/P2.2 AVENSDDT13

5
R1.6 DQ2

3
GND GND P2.1 VDD0 3.2

6
SWAHA1 R919 1.6 0
VSSO
SWAHA1 R1.8

4
10k OALRCK CINT AVENSDDT3 DQ12 AVENSDDT12
TO(3/22,5/22, P2.9
23

7
SWAHA0 R920 1.6 2.4
6/22,15/22) SWAHA0 R1.9 DQ3 R2.0

5
10k OABCK VDD2 AVENSDDT4 P2.1 DQ11 AVENSDDT11
P2.2
B+

8
R921 0 3.2
R1.7 DQ4

6
10k OABD RESET_ P2.9 VSSO
D

9
1.6 VDDO R1.7

7
ENCLRCKO IALRCK GND R1.5 AVENSDDT5 3.2 DQ10 P2.2 AVENSDDT10

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
1.6 P2.3 AVENSDDT15 R1.8 DQ5 R1.9

8
ENCBCKO IABCK MD15 AVENSDDT6 P2.1 P2.2 AVENSDDT9
DQ9
1.2 3.3
R1.7 DQ6 C925

9
ENCDATO IABD VDD3 P2.1 3.2
R1.5 VDDO 0.1u
P1.9 AVENSDDT14 VSS0

52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
GND MD14 AVENSDDT7 2.1 B AVENSDDT8
DQ8
1.6 1.9 AVENSDDT13
SILENCFD IVFLD MD13 C928 R1.5 DQ7
P2.5 VSS
2.7 1.9 0.1u
AVENSDDT12 B VDD
SILENCHD IVHSYNC_ MD12 3.2 N.C.
2.4 1.8 AVENSDDT11 DQML
VDD2 MD11 R1.7 0 DQMH 0
3.2 P1.9 AVENSDDT10 WE
SILENCVD IVVSYNC_ MD10 3.2 1.7
CLK
E C906
0.1u
B R1.8 GND GND
C919
0.1u
R2.8
P3.2
CAS
CKE 3.2
18 TO(3/22) P0 1.7 B AVENSDDT9 RAS
SILENCV0 R1.2 IVIN0 MD9 3.2 N.C.
P0 2.4
SILENCV1 IVIN1 VDD2 R2.8 CS
0
R1.2 AVENSDAD13 P3.1 A11 AVENSDAD11
P0 2.0 AVENSDDT8
IVIN2 MD8 R1.9 BA0(A13) R0.1
SILENCV2 R1.2 R2.0 AVENSDAD12 P2.9 A9 P0 AVENSDAD9
P0 P1.8 AVENSDDT0 R1.9 BA1(A12) R0.1
SILENCV3 R1.3 IVIN3 MD0 C920 AVENSDAD10 P0.6 A8 P0 AVENSDAD8
P1.6 0.1u R1.9 A10 R1.8
SILENCV4 IVIN4 GND B AVENSDAD0 P2.9 P2.2 AVENSDAD7
R1.3 1.7
A7
P0 AVENSDDT1 R0.1 A0 R1.8
SILENCV5 IVIN5 MD1 AVENSDAD1 P0 P2.9 AVENSDAD6
R1.1 3.3
A6
P0 R0.1 A1 R1.8
SILENCV6 IVIN6 VDD3 AVENSDAD2 P0 P2.1 AVENSDAD5
R1.3 A5
F SILENCV7
P1.6
2.4
IVIN7
IC901 MD2
1.7
1.8
AVENSDDT2
AVENSDAD3
R2.1
P1.6
A2
A4
R2.1
P1.7 AVENSDAD4
AVENSDDT3 R2.1 A3
VDD2 MD3 C923 P1.7
R1.9 0.1u VSS
1.6 AV ENCODER P2.9 AVENSDDT4
IVCLK MD4 B 3.2 VDD
SILENCCKA
1.9 AVENSDDT5
GND MD5
R906 IC901
GND GND R1.5
100 1.6 UPD61052GD-LML-A
P1.8 AVENSDDT6
SCLK MD6
0 2.4 B+
PSTOP VDD2 R1.5 R925
2.4 P2.3 47 AVENSDDT7
PVDD2 MD7
G C905
0.1u
B
PGND MDQM
0
R926
2.4 3.2 47
PVDD2 MWE_
IC903 IC42S16400-7TG
PLL256L3 R907 PGND GND R927
0 R2.8 47
29 TO(18/22) 1.6 P3.1 3.2 VSS

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
PLL27M2 STCLK MCAS_ VDD R1.5
FB901

3.3 AVENSDDT16 2.1 P2.5 AVENSDDT31

0uH

DQ15

2
GND VDD3 R928 DQ0
2.4 3.2 47 3.2 VSSO

3
ENCSPD0 VDD2 MRAS_ R2.8 R929
C907 R1.8 VDDO R1.8
ENCSPD0 P3.1 47 AVENSDDT17 P2.1 DQ14 P2.1 AVENSDDT30
0.1u

4
ENCSPD1 GND MCS_
ENCSPD1 B R1.6 DQ1 R1.9
C921 AVENSDDT18 P2.1 DQ13 P2.1 AVENSDDT29

5
ENCSPD2 GND GND 0.1u DQ2
H ENCSPD2 3.3 1.7 B VDD0 3.2

6
ENCSPD3 VDD3 MCLK R930 R1.9 VSSO R1.7
ENCSPD3 2.4 47 AVENSDDT19 P2.1 P2.9 AVENSDDT28
DQ12

7
ENCSPD4 PWM VDD2 R1.7 DQ3 R1.9
ENCSPD4 3.3 AVENSDDT20 P2.9 P2.1 AVENSDDT27
DQ11

8
ENCSPD5 GND MCKE
C924 DQ4
30 TO(5/22) ENCSPD5 0 AVENSDAD11 3.2 VSSO
0.1u

9
ENCSPD6 IS0 MA11 R1.8 VDDO R1.7
ENCSPD6 0.1 AVENSDAD9 AVENSDDT21 B P2.1 DQ10 P2.1 AVENSDDT26

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
ENCSPD7 IS1/ISERR MA9 R1.7 DQ5 R1.9
ENCSPD7 0.1 AVENSDAD8 AVENSDDT22 P2.1 P2.1 AVENSDDT25
DQ9
ENCSTB IS2 MA8 C922 DQ6
ENCSTB 0.1u B 3.2 C926
VDDO 0.1u
ENCRDY IS3 GND R1.8
ENCRDY C908 R1.6 VSS0 B AVENSDDT24
P2.3 AVENSDAD7 AVENSDDT23 P2.5 DQ8 2.1
0.1u IS4 MA7
OSREQ B DQ7
I OSREQ
IS5 VDD3
3.3
R1.8
C910
0.1u
3.2
VDD
VSS
2.4 P2.8 AVENSDAD6 B 0 N.C.
VDD2 MA6 R1.9 DQML
P2.1 AVENSDAD5 3.2 DQMH 0
IS6 MA5 R2.8 WE
P3.2 CLK 1.7
GND GND R2.1 CAS
P1.7 AVENSDAD4 3.2 CKE 3.2
IS7 MA4 R3.8 RAS
2.4 P3.1 N.C.
ISSYNC VDD2 R1.9 CS
OSVLD/OSRDY

AVENSDAD13 0 AVENSDAD11
OSCLK/OSSTB

P2.9 A11
ISCLK/ISSTB

R1.9 BA0(A13) R0.1/P0

AVENSDAD12 P0 A9 AVENSDAD9
OS4/FA10

OS5/FA11

OS6/FA12

OS7/FA13

OSSYNC
OS0/FA6

OS1/FA7

OS2/FA8

OS3/FA9

OSREQ_

R1.8 BA1(A12)
J AVENSDAD10 R0.1/P0 AVENSDAD8
ISREQ
ISVLD

P2.9
MD23

MD22

MD21
MD20

MD19
MD18

MD17

MD16

MD24

MD25

MD26

MD27
MD28

MD29
MD30

MD31

MA10

MA12

MA13
A8
VDD2

VDD3

VDD2

VDD2

VDD3

VDD2

VDD3
GND

GND
GND

GND

GND

MA0

GND
MA1

MA2

GND
MA3
R0.1 A10
AVENSDAD0 P0 A7 R1.7/P2.2 AVENSDAD7
R0.1 A0
AVENSDAD1 P0 A6 R1.8/P2.9 AVENSDAD6
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 R2.1 A1
AVENSDAD2 P1.6 A5 R1.8/P2.1 AVENSDAD5
R1.5
P2.2

R1.5
P1.8

R1.9
P2.8

R1.6
P1.8

R2.0
P1.8

R2.0
P1.7

R1.9
P2.8

R1.5
P1.8
R1.5
P2.3

R2.1
P1.6

R2.1
P1.6
R1.8
P2.7
R1.9
P0
R1.9
P2.8
3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

2.4
3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

0
2.4

1.8

1.8

1.7

2.4

1.7

3.3
1.7

1.7

1.8

2.4
0.1

0.1

3.3
R2.0 A2 R2.1/P1.7
AVENSDAD3 P1.7 A4 AVENSDAD4
FL902 R904
B+ B+ B+ 0 A3
3.2 VSS
SW3.3V VDD
FL901 B+
B+ B+ B+
31 TO(19/22) SW2.5V IC903
K DGND
C901 C903 C911 C914 C915 C917
SDRAM

10u 10u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u

16V 16V B B B B
JL917
7
5
3
1
7
5
3
1

AVENSDAD10
AVENSDAD12
AVENSDAD13
AVENSDAD0

AVENSDAD1

AVENSDAD2

AVENSDAD3

RB902 RB903 R909 R911

SIGNAL PATH 47x4
AVENSDDT23

AVENSDDT22

AVENSDDT21
AVENSDDT20

AVENSDDT19
AVENSDDT18
AVENSDDT17
AVENSDDT16

AVENSDDT24

AVENSDDT25

AVENSDDT26

AVENSDDT27
AVENSDDT28
AVENSDDT29

AVENSDDT30
AVENSDDT31

47x4 47 47
8
6
4
2
8
6
4
2

VIDEO SIGNAL
ENCSPD0
ENCSPD1

ENCSPD2

ENCSPD3

ENCSPD4

ENCSPD5

ENCSPD6

ENCSPD7

ENCRDY
ENCSTB

OSREQ

CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
L
REC
16
PB

AV ENCODER
4-49 4-50 RD-55 (4/22)
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

RD-55 BOARD(5/22) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE :Voltage measurement of

MR PROCESS R :REC MODE the CSP IC and the Transistors

SD_DATA6
SD_DATA7
SD_DATA10

SD_DATA13
A P :PB MODE with mark,is not possible.

ATP_XRESET

SD_DATA4
SD_DATA5

SD_DATA9
SD_DATA11
SD_DATA15
AUDTDO
MRTRST

JTAGTCK
JTAGTMS

SD_DATA8
SD_DATA12

SD_DATA14

ATP_D8

ATP_D9

ATP_D10

ATP_D2

ATP_D14

ATP_A3

ATP_XDIOW

ATP_XDIOR
ATP_INTRQ
ATP_D7

ATP_D5

ATP_D4

ATP_D13

ATP_D15
ATP_A2

ATP_XDMAC
ATP_DMARQ

ATP_D6

ATP_D11
ATP_D12
ATP_D1
ATP_A1

ATP_A4
ATP_IORDY
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES-

MRTRST MRTRST

B JTAGTMS JTAGTMS

IC1102

XMRINT
JTAGTCK JTAGTCK
35 TO(11/22)
AUDTDO C1116 C1114 C1121
AUDTDO 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 256Mbit SDRAM
MRTDO B B B
MRTDO
B+ B+

R1144
C1115 C1117

10k
0.1u 0.1u
B B
MRCDDA
MRCDDA

33
MRBCLK IC1102
MRBCLK
MT48LC16M16A2P-75-Y16Y

R1142
MRLRCLK
C MRLRCLK
MRSPDIF
B+
3.2

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
MRSPDIF VDD VSS
R0.3 1.0
AVDSDCK SD_DATA0 P0.9 SD_DATA15

2
AVDSDCK DQ0 DQ15
AVDSDEF 240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 C1125 3.2
0.01u

3
AVDSDEF R0.3 VDDQ VSSQ
B R0.6
XAVDSHD SD_DATA1 P0.9 P0.8 SD_DATA14

GND(8AB)

GND(2AA)

GND(20Y)

TMC1(5Y)
GND(17AB)

GND(15AB)

GND(12AB)

TMC2(4AB)

GND(22AA)
ATP_DMARQ(5AB)

4
VDD2(2AB)

VDD1(9AA)
XAVDSHD DQ1 DQ14

TMS/SMC(3AB)

VDD2(13Y)

VDD2(10Y)
ATP_XDMAC(6AB)

VDD1(21AA)
VDD2(20AA)

VDD2(16AA)

VDD1(14AA)

TRST(5AA)

ATP_XDIOW(8Y)
ATP_A3(9Y)
ATP_A2(9AB)

ATP_A4(8AA)

CTRI(6AA)

ATP_D8(16Y)
ATP_D9(15Y)

ATP_D2(12Y)
ATP_D7(16AB)

ATP_D5(14AB)
ATP_D4(13AB)

ATP_D6(15AA)

ATP_D1(11AA)

SD_DATA4(22Y)

SD_DATA5(21Y)

SD_DATA9(19Y)
SD_DATA6(21AB)
SD_DATA7(20AB)

SD_DATA8(19AA)

ATP_A1(10AA)

ATP_D10(14Y)

ATP_D14(11Y)
R0.4

ATP_D13(11AB)
ATP_D15(10AB)

ATP_D11(13AA)
ATP_D12(12AA)

ATP_XDIOR(7Y)
ATP_IORDY(7AA)

TCK/SCK(3AA)

SD_DATA11(18Y)

SD_DATA15(17Y)
SD_DATA10(19AB)
SD_DATA13(18AB)

ATP_XRESET(7AB)

SD_DATA12(18AA)
SD_DATA14(17AA)

HST_XINT(1AA)

ATP_INTRQ(6Y)
0.6

TDI/SIN(4AA)
2 1 AVDSDO_0 SD_DATA2 P0.9 SD_DATA13

5
AVDSDO0 4 3 DQ2 DQ13
AVDSDO_1 3.2 C1127
6 5 0.01u
36

6
TO(6/22) AVDSDO1 8 7 R1149 R0.4 VSSQ VDDQ
AVDSDO_2 10k SD_DATA3 0.3 B SD_DATA12
P1.0

7
AVDSDO2 RB1121 SWAHD_11 MRTDO DQ3 DQ12

121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180
1
47x4 AVDSDO_3 HST_D11(2A) (4Y)TDO/SOT SD_DATA4 1.0 0.7 SD_DATA11
D B+

8
AVDSDO3 SWAHD_12 C1122 DQ4 DQ11

2
2 1 AVDSDO_4 (3Y)VDD1 0.1u 3.2
HST_D12(3A)

9
AVDSDO4 4 3 SWAHD_15 B VDDQ VSSQ

3
6 5 AVDSDO_5 HST_D15(4A) (2Y)GND SD_DATA5 1.0 0.5 SD_DATA10

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
AVDSDO5 8 7 SWAHA0 XMRDREQ DQ5 DQ10 R0.5

4
AVDSDO_6 HST_A0(5A) (1Y)HST_XDREQ SD_DATA6 0.5 P1.0 SD_DATA9
AVDSDO6 RB1122 SWAHA3 SD_ADRS14 DQ6 DQ9

5
47x4 AVDSDO_7 (22W)SD_ADRS14 3.2
HST_A3(6A)
AVDSDO7 SWAHA6 SD_DATA3 VSSQ VDDQ R0.4

6
XAVDSRQ HST_A6(7A) (21W)SD_DATA3 SD_DATA7 0.6 P1.0 SD_DATA8
XAVDSRQ SD_DATA2 DQ7 DQ8
XAVDSAK 7 3.2
GND(8A) (20W)SD_DATA2
XAVDSAK SWAHA10 ATP_D3 VDD VSS
8

(13W)ATP_D3 SD_DQM0 3.2

HST_A10(9A)
ENCSPD0 SWAHA13 DQML N.C.
9

ENCSPD0 (12W)VDD2 SD_XWR 3.2 3.2 SD_DQM1

HST_A13(10A)
E ENCSPD1 ATP_D0 WE DQMH
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

ENCSPD1 (11W)ATP_D0 SD_XCAS 3.2 1.4 SD_CLK

C1105 DGND0(11A)
ENCSPD2 ATP_A0 CAS CLK
ENCSPD2 0.1u 3.2 3.2
B DVDD0(12A) (10W)ATP_A0 SD_XRAS
ENCSPD3 R1106 XSWAWEA RAS CKE
ENCSPD3 10k (3W)HST_XWR R1151 SD_XCS 3.2 0 SD_ADRS12
DIV_XRESET(13A)
ENCSPD4 PLL27M3 33 XMRWT CS N.C.
ENCSPD4 C1106 (2W)HST_XWT SD_ADRS13 1.6 0 SD_ADRS11
CLK27(14A)
30 TO(4/22) ENCSPD5 0.1u XSWARDA BA0 A11
ENCSPD5 B (1W)HST_XRD SD_ADRS14 3.2 0 SD_ADRS9
GND(15A)
ENCSPD6 BA1 A9
B+

ENCSPD6 (22V)VDD2 R1153 SD_ADRS10 0 R3.2/P1.7 SD_ADRS8

GND(16A)
ENCSPD7 10k SD_DATA1 A10 A8
ENCSPD7 R1108 (21V)SD_DATA1 SD_ADRS0 0 R3.2/P1.7 SD_ADRS7
MRBCLK VDD2(17A)
ENCRDY 33 SD_DATA0 A0 A7
ENCRDY (20V)SD_DATA0 SD_ADRS1 0 R3.2/P1.7 SD_ADRS6
CDDA_BCLK(18A)
F OSREQ
OSREQ AVDSDO_2
DEC_DT2(19A) (3V)HST_XCS
XMRCS
SD_ADRS2 3.2
A1 A6
R3.2/P1.7 SD_ADRS5
ENCSTB AVDSDO_5 XMRDACK R3.2 A2 A5
ENCSTB (2V)HST_XDACK SD_ADRS3 P1.6 R3.2/P1.5 SD_ADRS4
DEC_DT5(20A)
ATS_INTRQ A3 A4
XSWARDA C1126 3.2
VDD2(21A) (1V)ATS_INTRQ 0.01u
XSWARDA C1108 SD_ADRS12 VDD VSS
37 TO(6/22, XSWAWEA 0.1u B
15/22) GND(1B) (22U)SD_ADRS12 B+
XSWAWEA B SD_ADRS13
C1107
0.1u VDD1(2B) (21U)SD_ADRS13
XMRDACK B
XMRDACK (20U)GND
VDD2(3B)
XMRCS SWAHD_13 ATS_DMARQ
XMRCS (3U)ATS_DMARQ ATP_D0
HST_D13(4B)
38 TO(17/22) XMRWT ATS_IORDY ATP_D0
XMRWT ATP_D1
VDD2(5B) (2U)ATS_IORDY
G XMRDREQ SWAHA1 ATS_XDIOW ATP_D1 SWAHA1
XMRDREQ

SWAHD_0
SWAHA4
HST_A1(6B) IC1101 (1U)ATS_XDIOW
SD_ADRS8
ATP_D2
ATP_D2 SWAHA2
SWAHA1
SWAHA2
2 1 HST_A4(7B) (22T)SD_ADRS8 ATP_D3
SWAHD0 4 3 SWAHA7 MR PROCESS SD_ADRS11 ATP_D3 SWAHA3
6 5 SWAHD_1 HST_A7(8B) (21T)SD_ADRS11 ATP_D4 SWAHA3
SWAHD1 8 7 C1110 SD_ADRS10 ATP_D4 SWAHA4
SWAHD_2 0.1u VDD1(9B) (20T)SD_ADRS10 ATP_D5 SWAHA4
SWAHD2 RB1123 SWAHA11 B ATS_XDMAC ATP_D5 SWAHA5
TO(3/22,4/22, 33X4 SWAHD_3 HST_A11(10B) (3T)ATS_XDMAC ATP_D6 SWAHA5
13 6/22,8/22, SWAHD3 SWAHA14 IC1101 ATS_XDIOR ATP_D6 SWAHA6 67 TO(20/22)
14/22,20/22) 2 1 SWAHD_4 CXD9777GG ATP_D7 SWAHA6
HST_A14(11B) (2T)ATS_XDIOR
SWAHD4 4 3 ATS_D7 ATP_D7 SWAHA7
6 5 SWAHD_5 ATP_D8 SWAHA7
VDD2(12B) (1T)ATS_D7 C1123
SWAHD5 8 7 PLL33M1 ATP_D8 SWAHA8
0.1u SWAHA8
SWAHD_6 CLK33(13B) (22R)VDD1 ATP_D9
H SWAHD6
SWAHD7
RB1124
33X4 SWAHD_7
R1105
0 VDD1(14B) (21R)SD_ADRS7
B
SD_ADRS7
ATP_D10
ATP_D9 SWAHA9
SWAHA9
SD_ADRS9 ATP_D10 SWAHA10
2 1 SWAHD_8 R1112 ATP_D11 SWAHA10
33 MODE(15B) (20R)SD_ADRS9
SWAHD8 4 3 MRSPDIF ATS_D8 ATP_D11
6 5 SWAHD_9 R1113 CDDA_SPDIF(16B) (3R)ATS_D8 ATP_D12
SWAHD9 8 7 MRCDDA 33 ATS_XRESET ATP_D12
SWAHD_10 CDDA_DADTA(17B) (2R)ATS_XRESET ATP_D13
SWAHD10 RB1125 AVDSDO_0 ATP_D13
33X4 SWAHD_11 DEC_DT0(18B) (1R)GND ATP_D14
39 TO(6/22,8/22, SWAHD11 ATP_D14
14/22,20/22) AVDSDO_4 SD_ADRS5
2 1 SWAHD_12 C1109 DEC_DT4(19B) (22P)SD_ADRS5 ATP_D15
SWAHD12 4 0.1u B C1124 ATP_D15
3 AVDSDO_6 0.1u
6 5 SWAHD_13 DEC_DT6(20B) (21P)VDD2 B ATP_A0
SWAHD13 8 7 ATP_A0
SWAHD_14 GND(21B) (20P)GND ATP_A1
I SWAHD14
SWAHD15
RB1126
33X4 SWAHD_15
AVDSDO_7
DEC_DT7(22B) (3P)ATS_D9
ATS_D9
ATP_A2
ATP_A1

SWAHD_9 ATP_A2
SWAHA0 HST_D9(1C) (2P)VDD1 ATP_A3
SWAHA0 SWAHD_10 ATS_D6 ATP_A3
23 TO(3/22,4/22, SWAHA1 ATP_A4
6/22,15/22) SWAHA1 HST_D10(2C) (1P)ATS_D6
SD_ADRS2 ATP_A4
SWAHA2 GND(3C) (22N)SD_ADRS2 ATP_INTRQ
SWAHA2 SWAHD_14 SD_ADRS4 ATP_INTRQ
SWAHA3 HST_D14(4C) (21N)SD_ADRS4 ATP_XDMAC
TO(3/22,4/22, SWAHA3 SD_ADRS6 ATP_XDMAC
91 6/22,8/22, SWAHA4 GND(5C) (20N)SD_ADRS6 ATP_IORDY
15/22) SWAHA4 SWAHA2 SD_ADRS3 ATP_IORDY
SWAHA5 HST_A2(6C) (19N)SD_ADRS3 ATP_XDIOW
SWAHA5 SWAHA5 ATS_D5 ATP_XDIOW
SWAHA6 HST_A5(7C) (4N)ATS_D5 ATP_XDIOR
J SWAHA6

SWAHA7
SWAHA7
SWAHA8
HST_A8(8C) (3N)VDD2 ATP_DMARQ
ATP_XDIOR 34 TO(1/22)

SWAHA9 ATS_D4 ATP_DMARQ

SWAHA8 HST_A9(9C) (2N)ATS_D4 ATP_XRESET
SWAHA8 ATS_D10 ATP_XRESET
SWAHA9 VDD2(10C) (1N)ATS_D10 ATS_D0
SWAHA9 SWAHA15 SD_DQM0 ATS_D0
SWAHA10 HST_A15(11C) (22M)SD_DQM0 ATS_D1
40 TO(6/22,8/22, SWAHA10 ATS_D1
15/22) SD_ADRS1
SWAHA11 GND(12C) (21M)SD_ADRS1 ATS_D2
SWAHA11 SD_ADRS0 ATS_D2
SWAHA12 VDD2(13C) (20M)SD_ADRS0 ATS_D3
SWAHA12 XMRPLINI SD_DQM1 ATS_D3
SWAHA13 MB(14C) (19M)SD_DQM1 ATS_D4
SWAHA13 XMRRST ATS_D4
SWAHA14 XRESET(15C) (4M)GND ATS_D5
K SWAHA14
SWAHA15
R1118
33 GND(16C) (3M)ATS_D12
ATS_D12
ATS_D6
ATS_D5
SWAHA15 MRLRCLK ATS_D3 ATS_D6
(22D)DEC_CRPCLK

CDDA_LRCK(17C) (2M)ATS_D3 ATS_D7

(21D)DEC_XSTRT

AVDSDO_1 ATS_D11 ATS_D7

(22C)DEC_XERR

(20E)DEC_XREQ

(21E)DEC_XRDY

(21F)ENC_XRDY

(22J)ENC_XREQ
(19C)DEC_DT3

(10D)HST_A12

(20D)DEC_CLK

(22E)ENC_STB

(20F)ENC_DT0

(22F)ENC_DT1

(20G)ENC_DT3
(21G)ENC_DT2
(22G)ENC_DT4

(20H)ENC_DT6

(21H)ENC_DT5

(20J)ENC_DT7

(22K)SD_XCAS

(21L)SD_XRAS
PLL33M1 DEC_DT1(18C) (1M)ATS_D11 ATS_D8
(19K)SD_XCS

(21K)SD_CLK

(20L)SD_XWR
(2K)ATS_D15

(4K)ATS_D14

(2L)ATS_D13
PLL33M1 ATS_D8
(1D)HST_D6

(2D)HST_D8
(3D)HST_D7

(11D)AGND0

(13D)CLK66

(1E)HST_D3

(2E)HST_D4
(3E)HST_D5

(2F)HST_D2

(3F)HST_D1

(2G)HST_D0
(12D)AVDD0

(1G)ATS_A3

(2H)ATS_A2
(3H)ATS_A4

(1J)ATS_A0

(3J)ATS_A1

(1K)ATS_D0

(1L)ATS_D2

(3L)ATS_D1
83
(20C)VDD1

(21J)VDD1

(20K)VDD2

(19L)VDD2
TO(18/22) PLL27M3 C1130 ATS_D9
(21C)GND

(1F)VDD2

(22H)GND

(2J)VDD1

(3K)VDD2

(4L)VDD2

(22L)GND
PLL27M3 0.1u ATS_D9
(3G)GND

(1H)GND

B ATS_D10
XMRPLINI ATS_D10
XMRPLINI C1131
0.1u ATS_D11
XMRRST B ATS_D11
41 TO(12/22) XMRRST
C1132 ATS_D12
XMRINT ATS_D12
XMRINT 0.1u 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
B ATS_D13
L ATS_D13
JL1106

C1133
ATS_D14
R1121

R1123
R1124

R1126

R1145

R4111

0.1u ATS_D14
33

33
33

33

33

10

FL1102 B
B+ B+ ATS_D15
B+ 2.4 ATS_D15
SW2.5V ATS_A0
FL1101 ATS_A0
B+ 3.3 B+ B+ ATS_A1
31 TO(19/22) SW3.3V ATS_A1
ATS_A2
ATS_A2
DGND ATS_A3
C1101 C1103 C1112 C1113 C1119 C1118 C1120 ATS_A3
10u 10u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
B B B B ATS_A4
16V 16V B ATS_A4
ATS_INTRQ
M ATS_XDMAC
ATS_INTRQ

ATS_XDMAC
ATS_IORDY
AVDSDO_3

ATS_IORDY
SWAHD_3

SWAHD_0
SWAHD_6

SWAHD_5

SWAHD_2
SWAHD_8

SWAHD_7

SWAHD_1
SWAHA12

SWAHD_4

XAVDSRQ

ENCSPD4
ENCSPD1

ENCSPD2

ENCSPD6
XAVDSHD

ENCSPD3

ENCSPD5

ENCSPD7
AVDSDCK

ENCSPD0
XAVDSAK
AVDSDEF

ENCRDY
ENCSTB

ATS_XDIOW
ATS_A3

ATS_A2

ATS_A4

ATS_A1
ATS_A0

ATS_XDIOW
SD_XRAS
SD_XCAS

SD_XWR
SD_XCS

ATS_XDIOR
SD_CLK

ATS_D2
ATS_D14
ATS_D15

ATS_D13
ATS_D0

ATS_XDIOR
SIGNAL PATH
ATS_D1

ATS_DMARQ
ATS_DMARQ
ATS_XRESET
VIDEO SIGNAL ATS_XRESET
AUDIO
R1254 R1219
CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL 0
N OSREQ 0

REC
PB
16

MR PROCESS
RD-55 (5/22) 4-51 4-52
 RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

RD-55 BOARD(6/22) NO MARK:REC/PB MODE

R :REC MODE
AV DECODER P :PB MODE
A -REF.NO.:20000 SERIES-

XAVDCS1
XAVDCS0
XSWARDA
37 TO(5/22,15/22)
XSWAWEA R1289
47 PLL27M1
43 TO(12/22) XAVDINT R1290 48 TO(18/22)
47 PLL33M2
XAVDWT
XAVDDACK0

SWAHA21
SWAHA0

SWAHA1
SWAHA2
SWAHA3

SWAHA4
SWAHA5

SWAHA6
SWAHA7

SWAHA8
SWAHA9

SWAHA10
SWAHA11

SWAHA12
SWAHA13

SWAHA14
SWAHA15

SWAHA16
SWAHA17

SWAHA18
SWAHA19

SWAHA20
R1291
47 SWAHA0
B 44 TO(17/22)
XAVDDREQ0
XAVDDACK1
SWAHA1
SWAHA0
23 TO(3/22,4/22,
5/22,15/22)
R1292 SWAHA1
47
XAVDDREQ1 XAVDCS1 SWAHA2
SWAHA2

R1211

R1213
R1212

R1214
3300
XAVDCS1

2200
SWAHA3

10k
10k
XAVDCS0 SWAHA3 TO(3/22,4/22,
XAVDCS0 SWAHA4 91 5/22,8/22,
SWAHA4 15/22)
C1215 C1221 C1222 C1225 B+ SWAHA5
R1223 0.01u 0.01u 0.01u 0.01u SWAHA5
R1204 10k B B
100 B B
SWAHA6
26 TO(3/22,11/22, XSWGBRST B+ SWAHA6
12/22) C1206 SWAHA7
C1227
C 45 TO(18/22) PLL512L1
0.01u
B
0.01u
B
R1236
10k
B+
SWAHA8
SWAHA7
SWAHA8

JL1241

JL1258

JL1240

JL1214
JL1215
SWAHA9
SWAHA9
SWAHA10

3.2
3.3
3.3

3.2

3.3

3.2
1.8

3.3
3.3

3.3

3.1
3.0

0.3

0.6

0.8

1.3

1.9
1.6

3.3

1.8
1.4
1.8

0.2

1.8

0.2

0.2
0.3

1.9
0.2

0.2
2.7

0.4

3.3

1.6
1.8

1.6

3.3
SWAHA10
SWAHD0

0
SWAHA11 40 TO(5/22,8/22,
SWAHD0 SWAHA11 15/22)
SWAHD1
208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 SWAHA12
SWAHD1 SWAHA12
SWAHD2
SWAHA13

IOVSS13
RSTn
IOVDD13

DMRQ0On
DMACK0In

DMRQ1On
DMACK1In

CVD08

HIRQOn

HCPUMDI
HRWn
HCSn

IOVSS12
HAD0I

HAD1I
HAD2I
HAD3I
CVS08

HAD4I

HAD5I
HAD6I

HAD7I

IOVDD12
HAD8I

HAD9I
HAD10I
HAD11I
CVD07

HAD12I

HAD13I
HAD14I

HAD15I

IOVSS11
HAD16I

HAD17I
HAD18I
HAD19I
CVS07
HAD20I

HAD21I
HAD22I

HAD23I

IOVDD11
SCAN_EN

SCAN_MODE
MBIST_EN

SCLKIN

CLKI

TESTIn
HWAITOn

PAVSS18G

PAVDD18P
SWAHD2 SWAHD3 SWAHA13
TO(3/22,4/22, SWAHA14
13 5/22,8/22, SWAHD3 SWAHD4 SWAHA14
14/22,20/22) SWAHA15
D SWAHD4 SWAHA15

2.0
SWAHD5

3.0

3.2

3.2
SWAHD5 3.3 1.6 SWAHA16

105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156
SWAHD6

1
IOVDD00 CRPCLKI SWAHA16
SWAHD6 JL1206 3.2
SWAHD7 SWAHD0 SWAHA17

2
HDATA0 IOVSS10 SWAHA17
SWAHD7 SWAHD1 3.2 R1.8/P2.1 JL1223 SWAHA18
SWAHD8 AVDSDDT0

3
HDATA1 SDDQ0 SWAHA18
SWAHD8
SWAHD9 SWAHD2 3.2 2.3 AVDSDDT15 SWAHA19 49 TO(8/22,15/22)

4
RB1203 HDATA2 SDDQ15 SWAHA19
SWAHD9 SWAHD10 SWAHD3 0x4 3.2 3.3 SWAHA20

5
HDATA3 IOVDD10 SWAHA20
SWAHD10 C1207 2.1 AVDSDDT1 SWAHA21
SWAHD11

6
0.01u CVS00 SDDQ1 SWAHA21
39 TO(5/22,8/22, SWAHD11 SWAHD4 B 3.2 2.1 AVDSDDT14
14/22,20/22) SWAHD12

7
HDATA4 SDDQ14 AVDSDDT0
E SWAHD12 SWAHD13 SWAHD5 3.2 C1230
0.01u
AVDSDDT0

8
HDATA5 IOVSS09 AVDSDDT1
R1.8 B
SWAHD13 SWAHD14 SWAHD6 3.2 P1.6 AVDSDDT2 AVDSDDT1

9
RB1204 JL1207 HDATA6 SDDQ2 AVDSDDT2
R2.1
SWAHD14 SWAHD15 SWAHD7 0x4 3.2 P2.3 AVDSDDT13 AVDSDDT2

52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
HDATA7 SDDQ13 AVDSDDT3
SWAHD15 1.8 2.2 AVDSDDT3 AVDSDDT3
CVD00 SDDQ3 AVDSDDT4
R2.3
DECDT0 SWAHD8 3.2 P2.1 AVDSDDT12 AVDSDDT4
DECDT0 HDATA8 SDDQ12 AVDSDDT5
DECDT1 SWAHD9 3.2 3.3 AVDSDDT5
DECDT1 HDATA9 IOVDD09 AVDSDDT6
R2.4
DECDT2 SWAHD10 3.2 P2.2 AVDSDDT4 AVDSDDT6
DECDT2 RB1205 HDATA10 SDDQ4 AVDSDDT7
DECDT3 SWAHD11 0x4 3.2 2.2 AVDSDDT11 AVDSDDT7
DECDT3 HDATA11 SDDQ11 AVDSDDT8
R2.1
F DECDT4
DECDT4
IOVSS00 SDDQ5
P2.3
R1.8
AVDSDDT5
AVDSDDT9
AVDSDDT8

DECDT5 SWAHD12 3.2 P1.6 AVDSDDT10 AVDSDDT9

DECDT5 HDATA12 SDDQ10 AVDSDDT10
DECDT6 SWAHD13 3.2 1.8 AVDSDDT10
DECDT6 HDATA13 CVD06 AVDSDDT11
DECDT7 SWAHD14 3.2 2.1 AVDSDDT6 AVDSDDT11
DECDT7 RB1206 JL1208 HDATA14 SDDQ6 AVDSDDT12
R2.3
SWAHD15 0x4 3.2 P2.0 AVDSDDT9 AVDSDDT12
HDATA15 SDDQ9 AVDSDDT13
16 TO(3/22) 2.3 AVDSDDT7 AVDSDDT13
CVS01 SDDQ7 AVDSDDT14
1.6 R2.3
P2.1 AVDSDDT8 AVDSDDT14
ACLK SDDQ8 AVDSDDT15
1.8 C1231 AVDSDDT15

G DECDATI
0
CVD01

ACH12O
IC1202 IOVSS08

SDDQM0O
R0
P0.1
0.01u
B
LDQM
R0
AV DECODER P0.1
ACH34O SDDQM1O UDQM
C1234
ACH56O CVS06 0.01u
3.3 IC1202 3.2 B
CXD1935Q
IOVDD01 SDWEOn WE
R3.2
1.6 P3.0
DECLRCKI R1205 LRCKO SDCASOn CAS
22 1.6 3.3
DECBCKI BCKO IOVDD08
1.6 1.4
DECSPDI DO SDCLKO CLK
1.6 C1235
MRSPDIF CDIN2I IOVSS07 R3.1 0.01u
H MRCDDA
0
CDIN1I SDRASOn
P2.9 B
RAS
C1209 3.3
0.01u IOVSS01 SDCKEO LKE
B 1.6 3.3
MRBCLK CDBCKI IOVDD07
1.6 3.1 50 TO(7/22)
MRLRCLK CDLRKI SDCS0On CS
C1211 3.1
0.01u CVS02 SDCS1On A11
AVDSDO0 B R0
AVDSDO0 0 P1.3 AVDSDAD11 AVDSDAD0
AVDSDO0 DT0I SDAD11O AVDSDAD0
AVDSDO1
AVDSDO1 0 AVDSDAD1
AVDSDO1 DT1I IOVSS06 AVDSDAD1
AVDSDO2
AVDSDO2 0 0 AVDSDAD9 AVDSDAD2
AVDSDO2 DT2I SDAD9O AVDSDAD2
AVDSDO3
I AVDSDO3
AVDSDO4
AVDSDO3 0
DT3I SDAD12O
JL1233 AVDSDAD3
AVDSDAD3
36 TO(5/22) 3.3 0 AVDSDAD10 AVDSDAD4
AVDSDO4 IOVDD02 SDAD10O AVDSDAD4
AVDSDO5
AVDSDO4 0 0 AVDSDAD8 AVDSDAD5
AVDSDO5 DT4I SDAD8O AVDSDAD5
AVDSDO6 0 3.3
AVDSDO5 AVDSDAD6
AVDSDO6 DT5I IOVDD06 AVDSDAD6
AVDSDO7
AVDSDO6 0 R0/P0.1 AVDSDAD0 AVDSDAD7
AVDSDO7 DT6I SDAD0O AVDSDAD7
AVDSDO7 0 R3.2/P1.9 AVDSDAD7 AVDSDAD8
DT7I SDAD7O AVDSDAD8
1.8 R0/P0.3 AVDSDAD1 AVDSDAD9
CVD02 SDAD1O AVDSDAD9
1.6 R3.2/P2.8 AVDSDAD6 AVDSDAD10
AVDSDCK ICLKI SDAD6O AVDSDAD10
J AVDSDEF
3.3
IERRIn CVD05
1.8 AVDSDAD11
AVDSDAD11
3.3 R3.2/P2.9 AVDSDAD2
XAVDSHD ISTARTIn SDAD2O
3.3 R0/P1.4 AVDSDAD5
XAVDSAK R1210 IVALIn SDAD5O
47 3.3 R0/P1.5 AVDSDAD3
XAVDSRQ IREQON SDAD3O
C1212
6 R0/P1.4 AVDSDAD4
IC1201 IC1201
S-T111B18MC-OGDTFG
0.01u
B
IOVSS02 SDAD4O
COMPOUT

IOAVDD00

1.8V REG
IOAVSS00

HSYNCOn

I2C_DATA
DSPACK0
DSPACK1
IOVDD03

IOVDD04

IOVDD05
IOVSS03

IOVSS04

IOVSS05
3.2 3.2
I2C_CLK
DVDD33

D1CLKO
AVDD00

AVDD01

AVDD02

DVSS33
AVSS00

AVSS01

AVSS02
1

CVD03

CVD04
CONT VIN
CVS03

CVS04

CVS05
VREFI

BF_ID
C1201
GOUT

ROUT
YOUT

BOUT

COUT

DVO0
DVO1

DVO2
DVO3

DVO4

DVO5
DVO6

DVO7
FLDO

TRST
IREFI

TMS
VGO

TDO
TCK
10u

TDI
K

NC
16V
2

GND
R1201
0 1.8 0 B+ 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104
3

NOISE VOUT
JL1209

JL1242

JL1243

JL1244

JL1210

JL1211

JL1212
JL1213

C1202
3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3
3.3

0
3.3

1.8

3.3
R1.2
P0.9
R0
P0.9
R0
P0.9
R0
P0.4
1.8

1.6
R0
P1.1
R0
P1.1
1.6

1.5

2.1

3.3

3.3
3.3

3.3

3.2
0.1u FL1201
B+ B B+ B+
SW3.3V SW3.3V_1
FL1202
B+ B+
22 TO(19/22) SW1.8V C1249
10u
16V
DGND DGND
C1203 C1204 C1214 C1216 C1217 C1224 C1228
L 10u
16V
10u
16V
0.01u
B
0.01u
B
0.01u
B
0.01u
B
0.01u
B
2
4
6
8

2
4
6
C1218 8 R1230
0.1u B RB1201 RB1202 10
47x4 47x4
R1226
1
3
5
7

1
3
5
7

2200 C1219 R1229 D1CLKO

0.1u 1k
B

SIGNAL PATH
DECDT0
DECDT1
DECDT2

DECDT3

DECDT4

DECDT5
DECDT6
DECDT7

VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO
AVDTDI CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA SIGNAL
M AVDTDO
JTAGTCK
REC
47 TO(11/22)
JTAGTMS PB
JTAGTRST
16

AV DECODER
4-53 4-54 RD-55 (6/22)
RDR-HX900

For Schematic Diagram

• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RD-55 BOARD(7/22)
SDRAM
-REF.NO.:20000 SERIES-
A NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
AVDSDDT0 AVDSDDT0

AVDSDDT1 AVDSDDT1 IC1203

AVDSDDT2 AVDSDDT2
IC42S16400-7TG IC1203
AVDSDDT3 3.2 64M SDRAM

28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
AVDSDDT3

1
VDD VSS
AVDSDDT4 AVDSDDT0 1.9 R2.4/P1.5 AVDSDDT15
AVDSDDT4

2
DQ0 DQ15
B AVDSDDT5 AVDSDDT5 3.2

3
VDDQ VSSQ
AVDSDDT6 AVDSDDT1 1.9 1.9 AVDSDDT14
AVDSDDT6

4
DQ1 DQ14
AVDSDDT7 AVDSDDT2 R1.9/P1.4 1.9 AVDSDDT13
AVDSDDT7

5
C1237 DQ2 DQ13
AVDSDDT8 0.01u 3.2
AVDSDDT8

6
B VSSQ VDDQ
AVDSDDT9 AVDSDDT3 R1.9/P1.6 R2.4/P1.7 AVDSDDT12
AVDSDDT9

7
DQ3 DQ12
AVDSDDT10 AVDSDDT4 R2.6/P1.7 1.9 AVDSDDT11
AVDSDDT10

8
DQ4 DQ11 C1240
AVDSDDT11 3.2 0.01u
AVDSDDT11

9
VDDQ VSSQ B
AVDSDDT12 AVDSDDT5 1.9 R1.9/P1.7 AVDSDDT10

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
AVDSDDT12 DQ5 DQ10
C AVDSDDT13 AVDSDDT13 AVDSDDT6
C1238
R1.9/P1.7
DQ6 DQ9
1.9 AVDSDDT9
AVDSDDT14 0.01u 3.2
AVDSDDT14 VSSQ VDDQ
B
AVDSDDT15 AVDSDDT7 R2.3/P1.6 R1.9/P2.1 AVDSDDT8
AVDSDDT15 DQ7 DQ8
3.2
UDQM VDD VSS
R0/P0.1
LDQM LDQM N.C.
R3.2/P3.0 R0/P0.1
WE WE UDQM
R3.1/P2.7 1.4
CAS CAS CLK
R3.1/P2.5 3.2
50 TO(6/22) CLK RAS LKE
D RAS
R3.1/P2.6
CS N.C.
AVDSDAD11 R1.0/P1.5 R3.1/P2.8
LKE BA0 A11
C1239 R0/P0.1
0.01u AVDSDAD9
CS B BA1 A9
AVDSDAD10 R0/P0.1 R0/P0.1 AVDSDAD8
A11 A10/AP A8
AVDSDAD0 R0/P0.1 R2.2/P1.7 AVDSDAD7
A0 A7
AVDSDAD1 R0.1/P0.6 R2.9/P2.1 AVDSDAD6
A1 A6
AVDSDAD2 R2.0/P1.6 R1.0/P1.4 AVDSDAD5
A2 A5
AVDSDAD3 R1.1/P1.5 R1.1/P1.4 AVDSDAD4
A3 A4
E AVDSDAD0 AVDSDAD0
3.2
VDD VSS
B+
AVDSDAD1 AVDSDAD1

AVDSDAD2 AVDSDAD2

AVDSDAD3 AVDSDAD3

AVDSDAD4 AVDSDAD4

AVDSDAD5 AVDSDAD5
C1245 IC1206
AVDSDAD6 0.01u SN74LVC08APWR
AVDSDAD6
B 1.5 3.2
AVDSDAD7
F

10 11 12 13 14
AVDSDAD7

1
AVDSDAD8 AVDSDAD8 R1271 3.2 1.5
IC1206

2
4700 R1276 4700
AVDSDAD9 3.2
AVDSDAD9

3
512fs
AVDSDAD10 1.5 1.5 R1279 56
AVDSDAD10 25 TO(20/22)

4
DECDVCK
AVDSDAD11 R1274 3.2 1.5
AVDSDAD11

5
4700 R1277 4700
B+ 1.5 3.2
SW3.3V_1 R1275

9
68 1.5
DGND 51 TO(8/22)

8
DECNZCCKA
R1281
D1CLKO 47

G DECSILCK 17 TO(3/22)

16

SDRAM
RD-55 (7/22) 4-55 4-56
 RDR-HX900
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board.
• Refer to page 4-5, 4-6 for waveforms.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
R4349
1k
RD-55 BOARD(8/22) R1304
2200 R1301 NO MARK:REC/PB MODE :Voltage measurement of the CSP IC
2200 B+ and the Transistors with mark,is
NAZCA 1.0
R1308 not possible. IC1306
A -REF.NO.:20000 SERIES- 7 0.4
R1302
2200
R1303
2200
22 RV001
1k C1376
100u
6.3V
S-T111B33MC--OGSTFG

Q1301 B+ 4.8
R1305

5
MSB709-RT1 COUT VIN
Y/G 1.1 2200 R4350 4.8
R1310 1k
22

2
0.5 GND
CB/B 8 Q1302 C1313 3.3

4
MSB709-RT1 0.01u NP VOUT
CR/R 1.1 R1312 B
Q1301-1306 22
0.5
BUFFER
8 Q1303
9 MSB709-RT1
IC1306

NZCSIL00
NZCSIL01
NZCSIL02

NZCSIL03
NZCSIL04
NZCSIL05
NZCSIL06
NZCSIL07
V

XNZCRST

NAZTD0
JTAGTMS
JTAGTCK
TO(1/22)

SILTD0
B Y
C1377 JL1354
C1374
10u V REF REG
0.1u 16V
JL1355

JL1340
C B
R1319 R1321 R1322 R1330 R1331 JL1356

JL1338
JL1336

R1388
75 75 75 75 75

33
JL1324

R1385
± 0.5% ± 0.5% ± 0.5% JL1326 JL1328
± 0.5% ± 0.5%

33
DGND
R1320 C1317 R4351

R1390
C1330 C1339 R1382 R1391 JTAGTMS
R1316 75 0.1u 0

33
1.0 0.4 1.0 0.1u 0.1u 33 JTAGTMS
22 ± 0.5% B+ B B B 33
C1350 JTAGTCK
R1314 Q1305 0.4 0.1u JTAGTCK
22 B
12 11 10
Q1304 MSB709-RT1 SILTD0
MSB709-RT1 SILTD0 55 TO(11/22)

R1339

0.1u B
R1340
R1306 B+

C1319

C1320

R1387
± 0.5%

C1349
NAZTD0

R1384
R1346
0.1u
10k

0.1u
R1345

± 0.5%
C1326

2700
R1342 C1346

R1343
2200 R1341

0
R1347 NAZTD0

33
2700
0.1u

33
B
B
0 C1340 0.1u
C 2700 2700

B
2700

R4310
± 0.5% 100p XNZCRST
± 0.5% ± 0.5% B

10k
1.1